U.S. patent application number 15/444955 was filed with the patent office on 2017-06-15 for client system, combination client system and server client system.
This patent application is currently assigned to KABUSHIKI KAISHA TOSHIBA. The applicant listed for this patent is KABUSHIKI KAISHA TOSHIBA. Invention is credited to Hideo ANDO, Takumi Hara, Fumihiko Murakami.
Application Number | 20170171359 15/444955 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 57143851 |
Filed Date | 2017-06-15 |
United States Patent
Application |
20170171359 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
ANDO; Hideo ; et
al. |
June 15, 2017 |
CLIENT SYSTEM, COMBINATION CLIENT SYSTEM AND SERVER CLIENT
SYSTEM
Abstract
According to one embodiment, a client system includes a system
controller and a unit. The unit has a function of acquiring or
creating information. And the system controller acquires and
manages the information from the unit. The system controller may
classify the unit into a section to be managed, and hold the
information regarding the section to which the unit belong.
Inventors: |
ANDO; Hideo; (Tokyo, JP)
; Murakami; Fumihiko; (Kanagawa, JP) ; Hara;
Takumi; (Tokyo, JP) |
|
Applicant: |
Name |
City |
State |
Country |
Type |
KABUSHIKI KAISHA TOSHIBA |
Tokyo |
|
JP |
|
|
Assignee: |
KABUSHIKI KAISHA TOSHIBA
Tokyo
JP
|
Family ID: |
57143851 |
Appl. No.: |
15/444955 |
Filed: |
February 28, 2017 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
PCT/JP2015/062437 |
Apr 23, 2015 |
|
|
|
15444955 |
|
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
1/1 |
Current CPC
Class: |
H04L 41/0233 20130101;
H04Q 9/00 20130101; H04L 67/10 20130101; H04L 41/12 20130101; H04L
67/42 20130101; H04L 67/12 20130101 |
International
Class: |
H04L 29/06 20060101
H04L029/06; H04L 29/08 20060101 H04L029/08; H04L 12/24 20060101
H04L012/24 |
Claims
1. A client system comprising: a plurality of units each having a
function of acquiring or creating information and communicating
with the information, and a system controller acquiring and
managing the information from the plurality of units, wherein the
system controller classifies the plurality of units into sections
to be managed, and holds the information regarding the sections to
which the plurality of units belong.
2. The client system of claim 1, wherein the information regarding
the sections to which the units belong are managed as an address
table.
3. A client system comprising: a system controller connectable with
external cloud and managing information, a plurality of units each
having a function of acquiring or creating the information to be
provided to the system controller, wherein the system controller
classifies the plurality of units into sections to be managed, and
holds the information regarding the sections to which the plurality
of units belong.
4. The client system of claim 3, wherein the information regarding
the sections to which the units belong are managed as an address
table.
5. A client system comprising: a plurality of units each having a
function of acquiring or creating information and communicating
with the information, and a system controller acquiring and
managing the information from the plurality of units, wherein the
system controller classifies the plurality of units into sections
to be managed, and holds the information regarding the units, and
when a new unit different from the units is to be registered to the
system controller, the system controller checks presence/absence of
data regarding the units currently held in the system controller,
and if the data regarding the new unit is absent, the system
controller holds the data regarding the new unit as an object
managed by the system controller, and checks to which of the
sections the new unit belongs, and imparts the data regarding the
applicable unit.
Description
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application is a Continuation application of PCT
Application No. PCT/JP2015/062437, filed Apr. 23, 2015, the entire
contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
FIELD
[0002] Embodiments described herein relate generally to a
technology to acquire data using various sensors installed in
public and/or domestic facilities and/or to control various items
based on the acquired data, namely, a machine-to-machine (M2M)
applied technology or an Internet of Things (IoT) applied
technology. In the following description when the term IoT is used
singularly, this term may include meaning of the M2M as the case
may be.
BACKGROUND
[0003] The global standardization of the M2M or IoT applied
technology is now in progress. An aim of this standardization is to
determine a universal standard to collect and/or manage data
obtained from various sensors comprehensively and/or use results
from the data in various services.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0004] A general architecture that implements the various features
of the embodiments will now be described with reference to the
drawings. The drawings and the associated descriptions are provided
to illustrate the embodiments and not to limit the scope of the
invention.
[0005] FIG. 1 shows a wide-area network structure of a system of a
present embodiment.
[0006] FIG. 2 shows a local network structure of the system of the
present embodiment.
[0007] FIG. 3A shows a unit model (1).
[0008] FIG. 3B shows a unit model (2).
[0009] FIG. 4A shows an example of combination module (1).
[0010] FIG. 4B shows an example of combination module (2).
[0011] FIG. 4C shows an example of combination module (3).
[0012] FIG. 4D shows an example of combination module (4).
[0013] FIG. 4E shows an example of combination module (5).
[0014] FIG. 4F shows an example of combination module (6).
[0015] FIG. 5 shows an example of a specific internal structure of
a sensor combination module.
[0016] FIG. 6A shows a first example of a specific internal
structure of an actuator combination module.
[0017] FIG. 6B shows a second example of a specific internal
structure of the actuator combination module.
[0018] FIG. 6C shows a third example of a specific internal
structure of the actuator combination module.
[0019] FIG. 6D shows a fourth example of a specific internal
structure of the actuator combination module.
[0020] FIG. 7A shows an example of a specific structure within a
communication module.
[0021] FIG. 7B shows another example of the specific structure
within the communication module.
[0022] FIG. 8A shows another example of a local network
structure.
[0023] FIG. 8B shows a different example of the local network
structure.
[0024] FIG. 9 shows a variation of the local network structure.
[0025] FIG. 10A shows a basic structure of
application/communication layer of the system of the present
embodiment.
[0026] FIG. 10B shows a schematic structure of data exchanged in a
communication middleware layer.
[0027] FIG. 11 shows a data structure transmitted through a network
in the present embodiment.
[0028] FIG. 12A shows a data structure in a physical layer header
and a MAC layer header.
[0029] FIG. 12B shows details of IEEE extension address of the
present embodiment.
[0030] FIG. 13 shows a data structure in an IPv6 header.
[0031] FIG. 14 shows a communication middleware data structure of
C-format.
[0032] FIG. 15A shows a communication middleware data structure of
E-format.
[0033] FIG. 15B shows a communication middleware data structure of
A-format.
[0034] FIG. 16 shows a variation of the basic structure of
application/communication layer.
[0035] FIG. 17A shows another example (1) of the structure of
application/communication layer.
[0036] FIG. 17B shows another example (2) of the structure of
application/communication layer.
[0037] FIG. 18A shows an example of computer system constitution
including a device driver.
[0038] FIG. 18B shows a present embodiment regarding a computer
system constitution including a management/control area of
in-system unit.
[0039] FIG. 19A shows another embodiment regarding a computer
system constitution including a management/control area of
in-system unit.
[0040] FIG. 19B shows an example of software constitution
indicating management/control method in the in-system unit.
[0041] FIG. 20 shows a comparison between a conventional file
system and a unit management method of the present embodiment.
[0042] FIG. 21A shows a display example indicating hierarchic
configuration controlled by a virtual management drive for managing
units.
[0043] FIG. 21B shows a display example indicating an internal
configuration of a combination module folder.
[0044] FIG. 21C shows a display example indicating an internal
configuration of a sensor combination module folder.
[0045] FIG. 21D shows a display example indicating sensor data in
the sensor combination module.
[0046] FIG. 22 shows a position management routine managing devices
and/or various combination modules in each of sections.
[0047] FIG. 23 shows an example of an address table managed in the
system of the present embodiment.
[0048] FIG. 24 shows an example method for setting sections
separated each other in a system.
[0049] FIG. 25 shows an example method for setting sections
spatially separated each other on the basis of efficiency for
sensing and/or servicing.
[0050] FIG. 26A shows a basic process flow in a system
controller.
[0051] FIG. 26B shows data collection from devices and combination
modules located in sections and a data estimation/determination
method.
[0052] FIG. 27 shows an estimation/determination method of the
present embodiment.
[0053] FIG. 28 shows an example of time-dependent changes in
communication data.
[0054] FIG. 29 shows an example of service providing method in each
section.
[0055] FIG. 30 shows data collection from devices and combination
modules movable across different sections and a data
estimation/determination method.
[0056] FIG. 31 shows a position monitoring method of each device
and/or combination module.
[0057] FIG. 32 shows the structure of a detector for searching a
radio wave source direction of the present embodiment.
[0058] FIG. 33 shows the structure of a stealth plate of the
present embodiment.
[0059] FIG. 34 shows a detection principle for searching the radio
wave source direction of the present embodiment.
[0060] FIG. 35 shows an example method for setting sections
separated each other in a social infrastructure field.
[0061] FIG. 36A shows an example of application of a combination
module in different middleware layers.
[0062] FIG. 36B shows an example of application of a combination
module in different systems.
[0063] FIG. 37A shows an example of application of a combination
module.
[0064] FIG. 37B shows another example of application of the
combination module.
[0065] FIG. 37C shows still another example of application of the
combination module.
[0066] FIG. 37D shows still another example of application of the
combination module.
[0067] FIG. 37E shows still another example of application of the
combination module.
[0068] FIG. 37F shows still another example of application of the
combination module.
[0069] FIG. 37G shows still another example of application of the
combination module.
[0070] FIG. 37H shows still another example of application of the
combination module.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0071] Various embodiments will be described hereinafter with
reference to the accompanying drawings. In general, according to
one embodiment, a client system includes a system controller and a
unit. The unit has a function of acquiring or creating information.
And the system controller acquires and manages the information from
the unit. Herein, the system controller may classify the unit into
a section to be managed, and hold the information regarding the
section to which the unit belong.
[0072] According to other embodiment, the unit may includes a
"combination module" comprising a communication function and
another function. The another function may relate to an actuator
function to control a status change or a sensor function to collect
the data.
[0073] The description of embodiments of the present application
may be separated into the following chapters and sections.
[0074] Chapter 1 System Overview of Present Embodiment
[0075] Section 1.1 Overview of Entirety of System of Present
Embodiment
[0076] Section 1.2 Explanation of Units
[0077] Section 1.3 Internal Structure of Combination Module
[0078] Section 1.4 Internal Structure of Sensor Combination
Module
[0079] Section 1.5 Internal Structure of Actuator Combination
Module
[0080] Section 1.6 Example of Internal Structure of Communication
Module
[0081] Section 1.7 Explanation of Whole Structure of Wide Area
Network System of Embodiment
[0082] Section 1.8 Explanation of Local Network System Structure of
Embodiment
[0083] Section 1.9 Example of Use of Combination Modules in Local
Network System
[0084] Chapter 2 Outline of Hierarchy of Communication Data and
Data Structure
[0085] Section 2.1 Hierarchy of Network Communication Related
Function of Present Embodiment
[0086] Section 2.2 Relationship Between Hierarchy of Communication
Related Functions and Communication Data on Network Line
[0087] Section 2.3 Data Structure of Z-format in Physical Layer and
Media Access Layer
[0088] Section 2.4 Data Structure of Internet Protocol Version 6
Layer
[0089] Section 2.5 Data Structure of C-format in Communication
Middleware Layer
[0090] Section 2.6 Data Structure of E-format in Communication
Middleware Layer
[0091] Section 2.7 Data Structure of A-format in Communication
Middleware Layer
[0092] Section 2.8 Address Table Used in System of Present
Embodiment and Example of Use Thereof
[0093] Chapter 3 Management/Display Method for Each Unit
[0094] Section 3.1 Outline of Basic Unit Management Method
[0095] Section 3.2 Unit Management Means
[0096] Section 3.3 Specific Unit Management Example and Display
Example
[0097] Chapter 4 Outline of Section in System of Present
Embodiment
[0098] Section 4.1 Position of Section in System of Present
Embodiment
[0099] Section 4.2 Method of Managing Position in Section of
Various Modules or Devices
[0100] Section 4.3 Processing Method from Data Acquisition to
Service Offering for Each Section
[0101] Section 4.4 Method of Tracking Movement between Sections in
Various Modules or Devices
[0102] Section 4.5 Adaptability between Different Systems in Unit
(Combination Module or Device)
[0103] Chapter 5 Examples of Various Applicable Fields
[0104] Section 5.1 Examples of Application to Consumer Electronics
Technology
[0105] Section 5.1.1 Example of Application of Wide Area Network
System to Consumer Electronics Technology
[0106] Section 5.1.2 Examples of Application of Combination module
to Consumer Electronics Technology
[0107] Section 5.1.3 Example of Application of Section Division
Method to Consumer Electronics Technology
[0108] Section 5.2 Example of Application to Social infrastructure
Field
[0109] Section 5.2.1 Example of Application 1 of Wide-area Network
System to Social infrastructure Field
[0110] Section 5.2.2 Examples of Application of Combination module
to Social Infrastructure Field
[0111] Section 5.2.3 Example of Application of Section Division
Method to Social Infrastructure Field
[0112] Section 5.3 Example of Application to Health Care Field
[0113] Section 5.3.1 Example of Application of Wide Area Network
System to Health Care Field
[0114] Section 5.3.2 Example of Application of Combination module
to Health Care Field
[0115] Section 5.3.3 Example of Application of Section Division
Method to Health Care Field
[0116] According to the above table of contents, each part/chapter
is described hereinafter.
[0117] Chapter 1 System Overview of Present Embodiment
[0118] Section 1.1 Overview of Entirety of System of Present
Embodiment
[0119] Firstly, an overview of the system entirety of the present
embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.
1 shows the entire structure of a wide-area network system in the
system entirety of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 shows a local
network system which is a component of the wide-area network
system. Furthermore, details, services and novel advantages those
are described with reference to FIG. 1 are as-is applied to the
system of FIG. 2. Similarly, details, services, and novel
advantages those are described with reference to FIG. 2 (or later
described with reference to FIGS. 8A, 8B, and 9) are applied to the
whole wide-area network system of FIG. 1.
[0120] In FIG. 1, a management agency and organization dealing in
specific items and data are referred to as wholesale firms A_1102,
B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2. Furthermore, an organization and group
providing specific service are referred to as service providers
A_1112-1 to C_1112-3. Each of service providers A_1112-1 to
C_1112-3 has one or more servers 1_1116-1 to n_1116-n. Furthermore,
in the system of the present embodiment, servers 1_1116-1 to
n_1116-n may be referred to as cloud servers or a cloud. Service
providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3 acquire items (or data) from
wholesale firm B1_1104-1 and/or wholesale firm B2_1104-2 dealing in
similar items (or data) and provide each of domains 1_1122-1 to
3_1122-3 with services. Domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3 indicate
specific network spaces, and one domain 2_1122-2 is composed of one
or more systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134. Here, in the
description hereinafter, systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 may
be referred to as a network system or a client system. Therefore,
the terms "network system" and "client system" appearing in the
following description may be interpreted as "systems .alpha._1132
and .beta._1134". Furthermore, as mentioned above, a single domain
2_1122-2 may be composed of different systems .alpha._1132 and
.beta._1134. In the description hereinafter, domain 2_1122-2 may be
referred to as a complex client system. Therefore, the term
"complex client" appearing in the following description may be
interpreted as "domain 2_1122-2".
[0121] Here, wholesale firms A_1102, B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2,
service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3, and domains 1_1122-1 to
3_1122-3 are connected to each other via a network. Furthermore,
the service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3 are connected to each
other via a network to perform data and resource sharing 1114.
[0122] System .alpha._1132 shown in FIG. 1 is a minimum network
system unit in which internal components are connected to each
other via a network. Furthermore, in many cases, one system
controller .alpha._1126 is disposed in system .alpha._1132. System
controller .alpha._1126 manages or operates the (network) system.
Similarly, system .beta._1134 which is a minimum network system
unit may be composed of a single system controller .beta._1128.
Furthermore, systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 constituting the
same domain 2_1122-2 may be located physically apart. Furthermore,
different systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 in the same domain
2_1122-2 can operate cooperatively.
[0123] In the system of the present embodiment, predetermined
service units to be provided to users in system .alpha._1132 may be
defined as sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Furthermore, units used
to unify, manage, and control the data acquired in system
.alpha._1132 may be defined as sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. And
the same section of 1-m_1142-1-m may be used as both the service
unit and the data unification/management/control unit. When service
provision, data acquisition, and data management are performed by
each unit of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, efficiency in the
service provision, data acquisition, and data management are
improved and user convenience is thus improved.
[0124] FIG. 2 shows the local network system structure formed in
system .alpha._1132 of FIG. 1. System controller .alpha._1126
includes a processor 1230 and a memory 1232, and network
communication is performed in system .alpha._1132 via the
communication module 1202-3. Furthermore, in parallel, system
controller .alpha._1126 can perform network communication between
external devices via the communication module 1202-3.
[0125] In the system of the present embodiment, basic units having
a network communication function other than system controller
.alpha._1126 in the network system .alpha._1132 are defined as
units 1_1290-1 to 7_1290-7. Furthermore, in the present embodiment,
these units 1_1290-1 to 7_1290-7 are dispersed in network system
.alpha._1132, and these units 1_1290-1 to 7_1290-7 having various
functions are treated as managed units or controlled units. And
using the units managed and/or controlled, various functions in the
same network system .alpha._1132 can easily be managed/controlled
though each of the units may have each of various physical forms.
As shown in FIG. 2, each of units 1_1290-1 to 7_1290-7 includes
each of communication modules 1202-4 to 1202-10 to achieve a
network communication function. Instead of the communication
modules 1202-4 to 1202-10, the network communication function may
be provided with a part of a specific module or with a part of a
device to achieve the network communication function. Furthermore,
the network communication function may be achieved as a part of
functions of specific software.
[0126] In the system of the present embodiment, the system
controller .alpha._1126 basically performs
management/operation/control of the network communication in the
network system .alpha._1132. In many cases, system controller
.alpha._1126 may be physically disposed in the network system
.alpha._1132 as shown in FIG. 2. However, as described later with
reference to FIG. 9, system controller .beta._1128 physically
disposed outside the network system .alpha._1132 may perform
management/operation/control of the network communication in the
network system .alpha._1132. And in that case, units 1_1290-1 to
7_1290-7 can individually perform data communication directly with
system controller .alpha._1126 or .beta._1128. Instead of the
direct communication with system controller .alpha._1126 or
.beta._1128, units 1_1290-1 to 7_1290-7 may individually perform
data communication with each other under the control of system
controller .alpha._1126 or system controller .beta._1128.
[0127] Section 1.2 Explanation of Units
[0128] In the previous section, it has been described that various
predetermined functions dispersed in system .alpha._1132 are
managed and controlled on the basis of unit by system controller
.alpha._1126. As shown in FIG. 2, a large number of function
achieving means are dispersed in the single network system
.alpha._1132, so that, up to the present, collective management and
control of these means have been performed with great complexity.
Moreover, there is a wide variety of physical forms of the units
used to achieve the functions, including devices 1250, combination
module 1295 (described in Section 1.3), sensor module 1260, and
actuator module 1270, for example. Therefore, the collective
management and control of the means are performed with greater
complexity.
[0129] As a countermeasure to the complexity, a wide variety of
function achieving means dispersed in the network system
.alpha._1132 are managed/controlled as units with reference to
network communication function (using network communication
function achieving means of each unit as a basic unit) in the
system of the present embodiment. And a single function or a
collection of various functions which is achievable in cooperation
with a minimum network communication function is interpreted as a
unit which is a common and generalized concept. Furthermore, as
described above, units can individually be formed in various
physical forms; however, management/control/data acquisition are
performed using a common/generalized unit as a basic unit
regardless of specific physical forms. Since a unit which does not
depend on individual functions or physical forms in the network
system .alpha._1132 is defined as a management unit (or
control/data acquisition unit), the management, control, and data
acquisition within the network system .alpha._1132 by system
controller .alpha._1126 or system controller .beta._1128 can be
simplified significantly. Note that specific examples of
management/control using a unit are described in Chapter 3.
[0130] As a specific physical form example of a unit, the entirety
of device 1_1250-1 may be related to unit 4_1290-4, and independent
combination modules 1_1295-1 and 7_1295-7 may be related to unit
1_1290-1 and 7_1290-7 as shown in FIG. 2. Furthermore, combination
modules 6_1295-6, 2_1295-2, and 3_1295-3 which are part of device
2_1250-2 and device 5_1250-5 may be related to units 6_1290-6,
2_1290-2, and 3_1290-3. Here, unit 2_1290-2 and unit 3_1290-3 may
overlap each other at the part of communication module 1202-10 as
in FIG. 2. As can be understood from this point, in the present
embodiment, partial overlap in different units 2_1290-2 and
3_1290-3 may be acceptable. Furthermore, an inclusion relationship
between different units (one unit completely encompassed by a
different unit) may be adopted.
[0131] Following to a specific example of FIG. 2, possible forms of
the units are explained with reference to FIG. 3A. In the unit form
of FIG. 3A (a), a device 1250 having a network communication
function corresponds to a single unit 1290. If device 1250 has
multiple complex functions, unit 1290 is handled as a basic unit
having the multiple complex functions as well and its management,
control and data acquisition are performed in the network system
.alpha._1132.
[0132] On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3A (b), a combination
module 1295 (which will be described in Section 1.3) independently
existing in the network system .alpha._1132 may be related to a
single unit 1290. Or, as another management model (control data
acquisition unit form), a specific device 1250 (which may or may
not have a network communication function independently) with a
certain combination module 1295 added thereto may be regarded as a
single unit 1290 as shown in FIG. 3A (c).
[0133] Unit forms defined within device 5_1250-5 in FIG. 2 are
explained with reference to FIG. 3B for better understanding. As
shown in FIG. 3B, a single sensor module 1260-9 having a sensor
function, and two actuator modules 1_1270-5 and 2_1270-6 having
different actuation or operation functions are stored in device
5_1250-5. Furthermore, a communication module 1202-10 having a
network communication function to perform network communication
with system controller .alpha._1126 in the network system
.alpha._1132 is also stored. And a device controller 1240-3 is
provided with device 5_1250-5 to control operations of the modules
collectively and to collectively acquire and manage status data of
the modules and sensor data obtained therefrom. Here, the data
acquired or generated independently by device controller 1240-3 can
be stored in a memory 1246.
[0134] As mentioned above, as basic units for suitable management,
control, and data acquisition in the network system .alpha._1132,
system controller .alpha._1126 or system controller .beta._1128 can
flexibly set (define) unit forms (as a unit 2_1290-2 or a unit
3_1290-3). For example, if system controller .alpha._1126 or system
controller .beta._1128 needs to control individual sensor functions
and actuation (operation) functions within device 5_1250-5 or to
acquire data via a network (that is, via the communication module
1202-10), unit 2_1290-2 may be defined (set) as shown in FIG. 3B
(a). In that case, unit 2_1290-2 is composed of the sensor module
1260-9, two actuator modules 1_1270-5 and 2_1270-6, and
communication module 1202-10. Thus, system controller .alpha._1126
(or system controller .beta._1128) can perform detailed control
with respect to each module in unit 2_1290-2.
[0135] In contrast, as FIG. 3B (b) shows, a unit 3_1290-3 is
composed of the communication module 1202-10 and device controller
1240-3 alone. Therefore, when system controller .alpha._1126 (or
system controller .beta._1128) perform data communication with unit
3_1290-3, sophisticated control of and data acquisition as to the
entirety of device 5_1250-5 are collectively performable. As a
result, unlike the data communication with unit 2_1290-2, detailed
data communication processes with respect to individual modules are
not required in the data communication with unit 3_1290-3.
Therefore, if unit 3_1290-3 is set (defined), the process in system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) is
greatly simplified and the process efficiency is improved. As can
be understood from the above, if the form (structure) of unit 1290
is changed, the communication data content between system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) and unit
1290 is also changed.
[0136] Note that a unit may have a certain function achieved in
cooperation with a minimum network communication function.
Therefore, a minimum network communication function is provided
with each of the units. If the communication module 1202-10 is
structured as in FIG. 3B as an example of such a network
communication function, the communication module 1202-10 is
simultaneously provided within the units. As a result, unit
2_1290-2 and unit 3_1290-3 overlap each other sharing the
communication module 1202-10 as shown in FIG. 3B (c).
[0137] In conclusion, specific forms in unit 1290 are configured
flexibly within the network system .alpha._1132 such that different
units can overlap each other while sharing some functions, the
freedom of the management (or control or data acquisition) of
system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128)
can be improved.
[0138] Section 1.3 Internal Structure of Combination Module
[0139] As a form of unit 1295, FIG. 3A (b) shows the structure of
combination module 1295. In the present embodiment, a combination
module is defined as a module which can perform both a
communication function and a function other than the communication
function. It is emphasized that the function other than the
communication function is achieved with the participation of the
communication function. Data communication between the combination
module 1295 and external devices (outside the combination module
1295) is performed via the communication function.
[0140] Therefore, using the communication function of the
combination module 1295, data obtained by the combination module
1295 can be acquired from the external devices (from the outside of
the combination module 1295) so that the external devices easily
gather the data resulted from the specific function belonging to
the combination module 1295. On the other hand, using the
communication function of the combination module 1295, the specific
function of the combination module 1295 can be controlled
externally (from the outside of the combination module 1295).
[0141] The specific function other than the communication function
may be, for example, a sensor function, actuator (or operation)
function, control (process) function, memory function, or display
function. However, no limitation is intended thereby, and any
function other than the communication function may be adopted in a
combination module. A combination module having a sensor function
is especially referred to as a sensor combination module 1460 and a
combination module having an actuation (operation) function is
especially referred to as an actuator combination module 1470.
Furthermore, a combination module having a control (process)
function is referred to as a processor combination module 1465, a
combination module having a memory function is referred to as a
memory combination module 1475, and a combination module having a
display function is referred to as a display combination module
1478.
[0142] Now, a difference between the combination module explained
here and the unit explained in Section 1.2 is explained. The
combination module 1295 may be a component of device 1290 as a
prescribed module. Or, the combination module 1295 may exist
independently within the network system. In contrast, unit 1290 is
a basic unit to perform management, control, and data acquisition
within the network system in which various forms such as device
1290, the combination module 1295, and a combination thereof are
used in common or generally. Thus, as FIG. 3A (b) shows, one or
more combination modules 1295 can be included in a single unit
1290, and the single unit 1290 may include the one or more
combination modules 1295. This is evident from the point that a
device 1250 may correspond to an unit 1290 though the combination
module 1295 is simply a part of the device 1290. Here, in this
inclusion relationship, the communication function achieving means
may be shared in both the unit 1290 and the combination module
1295. As explained in Section 1.2, system controller .alpha._1126
is not belong to unit 1290. In contrast, it is another significant
difference between the unit 1290 and the combination module 1295
that the system controller .alpha._1126 may have the combination
module 1295 partially.
[0143] The communication function and the other function in the
combination module may be achieved through software (program) or
hardware (circuit), or may be achieved through a combination of
software and hardware (the functions are partly achieved through
hardware and the rest is achieved through software). And the
communication function and the other function are not necessarily
separated whether they are achieved through software or hardware,
and achieving means of both functions may mix, partly overlap, or
have an inclusion relationship therebetween. Furthermore, the
achieving means of both functions are not necessarily connected
directly with each other on software or hardware. That is, an
achieving means of the communication function and an achieving
means of the other function may be disposed significantly apart
from each other on hardware or in program, and the achieving means
of both functions may operate cooperatively by some kind of linking
means.
[0144] The structures in the combination module are shown in FIGS.
4A to 4F as block diagrams for the convenience of explanation. The
block may be a predetermined circuit (hardware) or may be a
predetermined collection of programs (software). Furthermore, the
blocks may not necessarily separated on the software or the
hardware, and the blocks may mix, be dispersed, partly overlap each
other (be shared), or have an inclusion relationship
therebetween.
[0145] FIG. 4A shows the basic structures of the combination module
1295. To achieve the communication function of the combination
module 1295, a communication module 1660 is provided. In the
structure of FIG. 4A (a), a radio signal sender/receiver antenna
1480 is independently arranged to be connected to the communication
module 1660. On the other hand, in the structure of FIG. 4A (b), a
radio signal sender/receiver antenna is stored in the communication
module and they constitute an antenna-equipped communication module
1666. Furthermore, the antenna-equipped communication module 1666
is functionally connected to (functions in cooperation with) a
different function module (other than the communication function)
1440 which achieves a function other than the communication
function. Note that a direct link between the antenna-equipped
communication module 1666 and the different function module 1440 as
in FIG. 4A (b) is not essential and a different kind of link
therebetween is acceptable. For example of such a link, a distant
link 1444 may be adopted as shown in FIG. 4A (a) such that the
communication module 1666 and the different function module (other
than the communication function) 1440 are located separately to be
linked by a distant cable. If, for example, the combination module
is of a software structure and a program for the communication
module 1660 and a program for the different function module 1440
are arranged in distant servers, the programs may be operated
cooperatively via link data corresponding to the distant link 1444
(such as uniform resource locator (URL)). If, for example, the
different function module (other than the communication function)
1440 is required to be activated in special environments
(underground, underwater, deep within a steel-frame building, and
the like) where radio communication (achievement of the
communication function by the communication module 1660 with the
antenna 1480) is impossible, the combination module 1295 can stably
function even in such special environments because of the distant
link 1444. Furthermore, the structure of the combination module is
not limited to those of FIG. 4A and, for example, the
antenna-equipped communication module 1666 and the different
function module (other than the communication function) 1440 may be
located distantly while a distant link 1444 is established
therebetween by a distant cable.
[0146] FIG. 4B shows structural examples of the combination module
1295 using the sensor combination module 1460. The part utilized as
the different function module (other than the communication
function) 1440 in the structure of FIG. 4A is replaced by a sensor
module 1260 in the examples of FIG. 4B. The sensor module 1260 may
generate a qualitative or quantitative sensing signal within the
system .alpha._1132. The sensor module 1260 may be disposable
within the system .alpha._1132 or may be movable (mobile) in the
system .alpha._1132 to measure or observe the conditions in the
corresponding system .alpha._1132.
[0147] As a specific example of a target of sensing, the sensor
module 1260 may generate human body related data including body
temperature, pulse, heartbeats, or a counted number of respiration,
identification data including human expression, face shape, looks,
or body size data such as height or width, physical data including
luminosity (brightness), speed, temperature, humidity,
power/current/voltage, or flow (of water and gaseous), human
sensory detection data including the number of existing people or
crowdedness within a predetermined section 1142, movement data
including human or vehicle traffic conditions, or architectural
data including temperature, strain, shape, cracks, internal hollow
capacity of architecture. However, no limitation is intended
thereby and any sensible target will be applied.
[0148] FIG. 4C shows structural examples of the combination module
1295 using the actuator combination module 1470. The part utilized
as the different function module (other than the communication
function) 1440 in the structure of FIG. 4A is replaced by an
actuator module 1670 in the examples of FIG. 4C. An external
antenna 1480 connectable to the communication module 1660 may be
adopted (as in FIG. 4C (b)), or the antenna-equipped communication
module 1666 including a radio signal sender/receiver antenna may be
adopted (as in FIG. 4C (a)). In the example of FIG. 4C (a), the
antenna-equipped communication module 1666 and the actuator module
1670 may be located distantly while a distant link 1444 is
established therebetween by a distant cable. However, no limitation
is intended thereby and a distant link 1444 may be established
between the communication module 1660 connectable to the external
antenna 1480 and the actuator module 1670.
[0149] The actuator module 1670 defined here functions as a service
provision related function module to provide specific service or as
a condition change control function module used to control specific
condition change within the system .alpha._1132. A word "actuator"
used in the term actuator module may be misunderstood as an actual
movable part or operable part; however, motion is not essential for
this actuator module. Thus, as specific examples of the function of
the actuator module, there are a predetermined data transfer
function (remote control function) used as a part of a data
transfer path to present sounds and display images, and to
maintain, change, and control the luminosity of light or the
intensity of scent, a data communication relay function, or a
remote manipulation function (of the predetermined device
1250).
[0150] The sensor combination module 1460 and the actuator
combination module 1470 explained above perform relatively passive
data communication under the control of system controller
.alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128). In contrast, the
processor combination module 1465 shown in FIG. 4D performs a
relatively spontaneous or aggressive function. In the present
embodiment, as control (process) function achieving means within
the processor combination module 1465, not only a device controller
1240 within device 1250 but also the processor 1230 in system
controller .alpha._1126 (in FIG. 2) or a processor 1734 in system
controller .beta._1128 (in FIG. 17A/B) may be adopted. Especially,
as shown in FIG. 2, the communication module 1202-3 within system
controller .alpha._1126 or system controller .beta._1128 can
perform data communication with an equipment (such as server
n_1116-n) disposed outside system .alpha._1132 and system
.beta._1134. Here, the combination module 1295 at least requires a
data communication function within system .alpha._1132 (or system
.beta._1134). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 4D, the
communication module 1202-3 is functionally divided into an
in-system communication responsive module 1752 and an out-system
communication responsive module 1758, and only the in-system
communication responsive module 1752 may be used as the
processor-communication module 1465. However, no limitation is
intended thereby and the out-system communication responsive module
1758 may be included in the processor combination module 1465. If
the processor combination module 1465 is included in the device
1250, the out-system communication responsive module 1758 may be
originally excluded from the device 1250 in many cases.
[0151] If the processor combination module 1465 performs a
relatively spontaneous or aggressive function within the system
.alpha._1132 (or system .beta._1134), the processor combination
module 1465 often treats useful data and the useful data may be
stored in the "recording area of data related to management data
(table) 1740" (which is described later with reference to FIG.
10A/B). Therefore, if the processor combination module 1465 is
required to perform a spontaneous/aggressive function, the
processor combination module 1465 may include a part of a memory
1242 in device 1_1250-1, a part of a memory 1246 in device
5_1250-5, a part of memory 1232 within system controller
.alpha._1126 (cf. FIG. 2), or a part of a memory 1248 within system
controller .beta._1128 (cf. FIG. 17A/B).
[0152] For example, when the data recorded in memory 1242 in device
1_1250-1 are read by system controller .alpha._1126, a high-class
data exchange between the processor 1230 within system controller
.alpha._1126 and device controller 1240-1 within device 1_1250-1 is
required. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 4E, a memory
combination module 1475 can simply perform a direct data
communication to the system controller .alpha._1126 (or system
controller .beta._1128) using a greatly simplified communication
protocol because the memory combination module 1475 independently
has the in-system communication responsive module 1752 which can
treat the simplified communication protocol alone. Moreover, the
memory combination module 1475 includes the "recording area of data
related to management data (table) 1740" in the memories 1242,
1246, 1232, and 1248, and the recoding area 1740 stores the
management data (table). Therefore, the memory combination module
1475 simplifies communication of data recorded in the recording
area 1740 of the management data (table) related data.
[0153] As examples of functions performed by the different function
module 1440 in FIG. 4A, FIGS. 4B to 4E show a monofunction
respectively. However, as shown in FIG. 4F, multiple different
functions may be achieved in a single combination module 1295. For
example, in the combination module 1295, multiple different sensor
functions (by sensor modules 1_1260-1 and 2_1260-2), multiple
different actuator (operation) functions (by actuator modules
1_1670-1 and 2_1670-2), control (process) function (by processor
1230, 1734, or device controller 1240), memory function (by memory
1232 or 1248), and display function (by display module 1226) may be
achieved at the same time. Furthermore, as in the example shown in
FIG. 4F, if the antenna 1480 connected to the communication module
1660 is greatly distant from the sensor module 1_1260-1 and the
actuator module 1670-2, respectively, a distant link 1444 may be
established therebetween, respectively, using a distant cable.
[0154] Note that, in the example of FIG. 4F, the communication
module 1660 is individually connected to the different function
modules other than the communication function. Alternately, the
communication module 1660 and the multiple different function
modules may be connected to a common busline. In that case, the
different function modules to be directly connected to the
communication module 1660 are switched one another by a selector
operation or address designation in a time modulation manner.
[0155] Section 1.4 Internal Structure of Sensor Combination
Module
[0156] FIG. 5 shows a more specific and detailed structural example
of the sensor combination module 1460 explained with reference to
FIG. 4B. Basically, sensor signals or detection data obtained by
the sensor module 1260 are transferred to the communication module
1660. And the sensor signals or the detection data are transferred
to the communication module 1202-3 (cf. FIG. 2) of system
controller .alpha._1126 through the communication module 1660. The
communication module 1660 of FIG. 5 may also execute a process of
data communicated with a communication middleware layer APL02
conforming to C-format which is described in Chapter 2 with
reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B.
[0157] Power supplied to the sensor module 1260 and the
communication module 1660 is obtained from a battery charger module
(battery) 1554. Furthermore, the sensor combination module 1460 of
FIG. 5 includes a solar electricity generator module (solar cell)
1552 which has a photoelectric conversion function, and power
generated in the solar electricity generator module (solar cell)
1552 having the photoelectric conversion function is stored in the
battery charger module (battery) 1554. FIG. 5 shows a solar
electricity generator module (solar cell) having a photoelectric
conversion function as a power generator but any other energy
converter may be used instead. As an alternative energy converter,
a thermoelectric converter such as a thermocouple may be used. The
thermoelectric converter may be incorporated in the sensor
combination module 1460 and a user may wear the sensor combination
module 1460. Here, the body temperature of the user is used to
generate power for the operation of the sensor communication module
1460. Furthermore, as a different example, radio energy received by
the communication module 1660 from the communication module 1202-3
in system controller .alpha._1126 of FIG. 2 may be converted to
power and stored, or a near-field energy received from a near-field
communication nodule 1560 may be converted to power and stored. As
can be understood from the above, with an energy converter such as
a solar electricity generator module 1552 and an integral battery
charger module (battery) 1554 included therein, the sensor
combination module 1460 can operate long without an external power
supply.
[0158] Here, if the sensor module 1260 is used to measure
luminosity, ambient temperature, or ambient humidity, or if the
sensor module 1260 is used as a presence sensor, the sensor module
1260 is disposed on the surface of devices 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, and
5_1250-5 (cf. FIG. 2) to be exposed outside. At the same time, the
solar electricity generator module (solar cell) 1552 is disposed on
the surface of devices 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, and 5_1250-5 to be
exposed outside.
[0159] Here, if the sensor combination module 1460 is left in the
dark for a long time, the energy of the battery charger module
(battery) 1554 decreases and the power to be supplied to the sensor
module 1260 and the communication module 1660 may possibly be
insufficient. In consideration of this point, if the output voltage
of or the energy remaining in the battery charger module (battery)
1554 becomes lower than a predetermined reference value, an energy
shortage notification may be sent in a timely manner to system
controller .alpha._1126 in FIG. 2 through the communication module
1660. Although details are explained in Chapter 2 with reference to
FIG. 14, an alarm indicative of "low battery" may be reported to
system controller .alpha._1126 from the sensor combination module
1460. Then, the processor 1230 in system controller .alpha._1126
detects the low battery status of the battery charger module
(battery) 1554 in the sensor combination module 1460, and notifies
the user of the low battery status through a user interface 1234.
As can be understood from the above, since the output voltage of or
the energy remaining in the battery charger module (battery) 1554
is reported in a timely manner to system controller .alpha._1126, a
stop of an operation of the sensor combination module 1460 because
of the low battery status can be prevented and the operability of
the whole system of the present application can be secured.
[0160] In the sensor combination module 1460 of FIG. 5, a
near-field communication module 1560 which can perform near-field
radio communication is stored. As a near-field radio transmission
technique used here will be, for example, TransferJet and Felica (a
combination of words felicity and card) which is a standard for
contactless smartcard technology. Using the near-field
communication module 1560, the above-described external power
supply can be performed and a location of the sensor combination
module 1460 in the initial setting can be detected as explained
below. That is, if a combination module 7_1295-7 corresponding to
the sensor combination module is independently disposed in the
system of the present embodiment in FIG. 2, or if a device 2_1250-2
including a combination module 6_1295-6 corresponding to the sensor
combination module is disposed, the near-field communication module
1560 performs close-range communication with a mobile external
device (not shown) having a Global Positioning System (GPS)
function during the initial setting. At that time, the GPS
positional data is reported to system controller .alpha._1126
through the communication module 1202-3. As a result, location data
of the combination module 7_1295-7 corresponding to the sensor
combination module, or location data of device 2_1250-2 including
the combination module 6_1295-6 corresponding to the sensor
combination module are registered in system controller
.alpha._1126. The registered data are stored in memory 1232 (cf.
FIG. 2) in system controller .alpha._1126 in the format shown in
FIG. 23 which will be explained in Chapter 2. After the initial
setting of the sensor combination module 1460 through the
near-field communication by a mobile external device having a GPS
function, the location of the sensor combination module 1460 is
clear and user-friendly services can be presented.
[0161] Section 1.5 Internal Structure of Actuator Combination
Module
[0162] FIGS. 6A to 6D show more specific and detailed structural
examples of the internal structure of the actuator combination
module 1470 outlined with reference to FIG. 4C. If the actuator
combination module 1470 which is externally controllable is used as
a part of the circuit (as a circuit component) in the device 1250,
the module 1470 is, in many cases, used as an on/off switch,
predetermined voltage output, or variable resistance. In the
present embodiment, the above standard (used most frequently in the
circuit) functions are incorporated in the device 1250 as the
module. Thereby, cost effective and easily assembled device 1250
can be provided. As to the exemplified functions, the internal
structure of the actuator combination module 1470 having a variable
resistance function is shown in FIG. 6A, the internal structure of
the actuator combination module 1470 having an on/off switch is
shown in FIG. 6B, and the internal structure of the actuator
combination module 1470 having a predetermined voltage output
function is shown in FIG. 6C. To provide the variable resistance
function and the on/off switch function, an input terminal 1602 and
an output terminal 1604 are required. In the structure of FIG. 6A,
a variable resistance 1610 is provided between these terminals to
set a variable resistance therebetween. In the structure of FIG.
6B, a conduct/cut switch 1614 is provided between these terminals
and the conduct/cut switch 1614 is configured to be an on/off
switch. As a circuit element for the variable resistance 1610 and
the conduct/cut switch 1614, a complementary metal-oxide
semiconductor (CMOS) type field-effect transistor (FET) may be
used. As the variable resistance 1610, an element having a gentle
gamma characteristic is used. Because the gamma characteristic is
the resistance characteristic between the input terminal 1602 and
the output terminal 1604 with respect to an input voltage applied
to the variable resistance 1610 or the conduct/cut switch 1614, and
the element having a gentle gamma characteristic is an element in
which a change in its resistance is gentle even if the applied
input voltage is changed significantly. As the conduct/cut switch
1614, an element having a steep gamma characteristic is used.
Because the element having a steep gamma characteristic is an
element in which its resistance changes from nearly zero
conductivity to a significantly great cut only by a minute change
in an input voltage around a predetermined threshold. In the
present embodiment, however, a circuit element is not limited to
the CMOS-FET, and any other circuit element having a variable
resistance function or having an on/off switch function under some
kind of control can be used.
[0163] On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6C, a single voltage
output terminal 1606 is required to achieve the predetermined
voltage output function. The output voltage from the terminal is
connected to the output of a predetermined voltage generator 1618
in the actuator module 1670. As a specific example of the circuit
structure in the predetermined voltage generator 1618, a variable
resistance is connected between a constant voltage source in the
actuator combination module 1470 or a constant voltage externally
supplied (a power source voltage, for example) and a ground
(earth), and an intermediate voltage is extracted from the variable
resistance and is maintained by a current supply buffer circuit.
The extracted voltage is then maintained by a current supply buffer
circuit (an electronic circuit which can supply relatively great
external current to maintain an output voltage even if an external
impedance is low). However, no limitation is intended thereby, and
any scheme and circuit which can generate and maintain a
predetermined voltage can be used.
[0164] In the examples of FIGS. 6A to 6C, configuration values are
supplied from the communication module 1660 outside the actuator
module 1670. Here, regulation value memory parts are provided
inside the examples of the present embodiment to maintain the
regulation values even if power to the actuator combination module
1470 is cut. The memory parts are a configured resistance memory
1620 in the example of FIG. 6A, configured status memory 1624 in
the example of FIG. 6B, and configured voltage memory 1628 in the
example of FIG. 6C. They each are a nonvolatile semiconductor
memory such as a NAND memory. However, no limitation is intended
thereby, and any nonvolatile memory can be used as the memory part.
That is, in the examples of FIGS. 6A to 6C, the regulation values
notified from the communication module 1660 are initially sent to
and stored in the configured resistance memory 1620, configured
status memory 1624, and configured voltage memory 1628 in
nonvolatile manner. At the same time, the regulation values stored
in the memory parts are output to control the operation of the
variable resistance 1610, conduct/cut switch 1614, or predetermined
voltage generator 1618.
[0165] If actuator module 1270-1 or 1270-6 is used to control and
change regulation of device 1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5 in FIG. 2,
actuator module 1270-1 or 1270-6 may be an extended form of a
commercially-available remote controller using infrared
communication. That is, an actuator combination module 1470 (a kind
of combination module 1295) is composed of actuator module 1270-1
in device 1_1250-1 and a communication module 1202-4 and is
disposed outside device 1_1250-1 as a new remote controller.
Similarly, an actuator combination module 1470 (a kind of
combination module 1295) is composed of an actuator module 1270-5
in device 5_1250-5 and a part of the communication module 1202-10
and is disposed outside device 5_1250-5 as a new remote controller.
Conceptually such new remote controllers may be used as advanced
versions (replacements) of conventional infrared communication
remote controllers which are accessories of air-conditioners, TVs,
and lighting equipment.
[0166] FIG. 6D shows an internal structure of the actuator
combination module 1470 suitable for the above use. The example of
FIG. 6D can respond to both a binary state transition control
(change of status configuration) such as switching on/off and a
detailed control of status configuration using multi-valued data
items. Furthermore, the binary state transition control (change of
status configuration) by the communication module 1660 which has
received the communication data exchanged in the network system
.alpha._1132 is stored or updated in the configured status memory
1624. On the other hand, the control data for detailed control of
status configuration using multi-valued data items sent from the
communication module 1660 are stored or updated in the configured
voltage memory 1628.
[0167] The data stored or updated in the configured status memory
1624 and the configured voltage memory 1628 are subjected to a
format conversion in a format converter 1644, then subjected to
luminous modulation in an infrared light emitting element 1608
passing through an infrared light driving circuit 1648, and sent to
a remote-controller-compatible infrared light receiver in device
1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5. By simply changing a commercially-available
infrared communication remote controller with the actuator
combination module 1470 in FIG. 6D, various commercially-available
devices 1250 such as an air-conditioner, TV, and lighting equipment
can be incorporated in network system .alpha._1132 without any
replacement of the main body of devices 1_1250-1 and 5_1250-5.
[0168] Here, a conventional remote controller of least necessary
function may not memorize the control status of the device 1250.
However, with the configured status memory 1624 and the configured
voltage memory 1628 stored in the actuator combination module 1460,
the system controller .alpha._1126 can later confirm a control
history via the communication module 1660. Note that, as mentioned
above, a NAND memory or any other nonvolatile memory can be used as
the configured status memory 1624 and the configured voltage memory
1628.
[0169] As communication data exchanged between the system
controller .alpha._1126 and the actuator combination module 1470,
C-format described in Chapter 2 will be used. Explained below is
how the actuator combination module 1470 transfers communication
data to the system controller .alpha._1126 in FIG. 2 based on the
C-format; however, the data exchange between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the actuator combination module 1470 can be
performed based on any other optional format such as A-format or
E-format. Considering a case where the system controller
.alpha._1126 instructs (issues a command to) a
commercially-available device 1250 to begin its operation (to be
turned on), network access control data 1830 in communication data
(FIG. 14 (d)) from the system controller .alpha._1126 to its
corresponding actuator communication module 1470 are set to [111]
(reset instruction), multi-valued transmission data CTMDT are set
to [0000], and binary transmission data CT2DT are set to [1] (ON).
Then, the communication module 1660 receives the data, and the data
indicative of [1] (power on) are transferred/stored to/in the
configured status memory 1624 in the actuator module 1670.
Furthermore, the data are notified to a format converter 1644
through the configured status memory 1624 and are converted into
data indicative of power on in a commercially-available remote
controller. The converted data are transferred to the infrared
light driving circuit 1648 and the light emission of the infrared
light emitting element 1608 is controlled. Then, the converted data
are transferred to the commercially-available device 1250 and the
device 1250 is turned on.
[0170] In the C-format of FIG. 14 (d), multi-valued data change
configuration (reset) corresponding to, for example, a temperature
change of an air-conditioner and an illumination degree change of
an illumination device can be performed together. In that case, the
network access control data 1830 in the communication data (FIG. 14
(d)) are set to [111] (reset instruction), and the multi-valued
transmission data CTMDT are set to a value other than [0000]. In
that case, 5-bit data as a combination of the multi-valued
transmission data CTMDT and the binary transmission data CT2DT are
allocated between [00010] and [11111] as 0 to 100%. Then, the
communication module 1660 receives the data and converts the
changed values into a percentage. The data after the percentage
conversion are transferred/stored to/in the configured voltage
memory 1628. The data after the percentage conversion are notified
to the format converter 1644 through the configured voltage memory
1628 and are converted into data indicative of a state
configuration change value in the commercially-available remote
controller. The converted data are used to operate the infrared
light driving circuit 1648, control the light emission of the
infrared light emitting element 1608, and change the configuration
state of the commercially-available device 1250.
[0171] Next, a method by which the system controller .alpha._1126
confirms a state already configured in the actuator combination
module 1470 will be explained. In the method, communication data in
which the network access control data 1830 are set to [011]
(response [data] request) are initially sent to the actuator
communication module 1470 from the system controller .alpha._1126.
Then, the communication module 1660 in FIG. 6D receives the
response (data) request from the system controller .alpha._1126 and
reads data already stored in the configured status memory 1624 and
the configured voltage memory 1628. The communication module 1660
then sets a result to the binary transmission data CTMDT or the
multi-valued transmission data CTMDT in FIG. 14 (d). Here, the
network access control data 1830 in the communication data to be
sent from the actuator combination module 1470 to the system
controller .alpha._1126 are set to [010] (response reply).
[0172] The operation of the actuator combination module 1470 of the
present embodiment has been described as hardware (electronic
circuit) for the sake of understandable explanation of the module
1470. However, no limitation is intended thereby, and the actuator
combination module 1470 may be formed as a software module in the
system of the present embodiment. Note that, even if the actuator
combination module 1470 is formed as a software module,
input/output terminals 1602 and 1604, voltage output terminal 1606,
and the infrared light emitting element 1608 shown in FIGS. 6A to
6D are provided with such a software module. Now, a use of the
software module will be explained. The communication modules 1202-4
to 1202-10 in FIG. 2 and the communication module 1660 in FIGS. 6A
to 6D, processors 1960 and 1736 shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B are
stored, and they perform a communication control process according
to a predetermined communication control program. As the
communication control program, any optional program language
executable in the processors 1960 and 1736 will be used.
[0173] In the explanation below, a program used to control the
whole communication will be referred to as a main program and a
parcel of predetermined miniature programs called from the main
program will be referred to as a subprogram module. However, no
limitation is intended thereby. Since Java (registered trademark)
script which does not depend on an operating system (OS) and a Java
applet compatible with HTML/HTML5 are adoptable, terms related to
Java programming will be written along with the terms of the
present application. In the main program (class) used for the
operation of the processor stored in the communication module 1660
of FIGS. 6A to 6D, the process according to a subprogram module
(method) corresponding to the actuator module 1670 is performed. In
the subprogram module (method), processes corresponding to
input/output terminals 1602 and 1604 and the voltage output
terminal 1606 are performed based on predetermined regulation
values in the subprogram module (method). When a configuration
change command is notified (issued) from the system controller
.alpha._1126 to the actuator combination module 1470 in FIG. 2, a
different subprogram module (different method) is called up to
perform a regulation value change process in the main program
(class). After that, the processes corresponding to input/output
terminals 1602 and 1604 and the voltage output terminal 1606 are
performed based on the changed regulation values.
[0174] Note that the actuator combination module 1470 which is an
example of the combination module 1295 is exemplified in the above
explanation; however, no limitation is intended thereby. That is, a
combination module 1295 of any type such as a sensor combination
module 1460, processor combination module 1465, and memory
combination module 1475 may be achieved in the software module.
[0175] Furthermore, although some modules are omitted from FIGS. 6A
to 6D for the sake of simpler explanation, modules such as a solar
electricity generator module (solar cell) 1552 as an energy
converter, battery charger module (battery) 1554, and near-field
communication module 1560 as in FIG. 5 may be stored in the
actuator combination module 1470 of FIGS. 6A to 6D.
[0176] Section 1.6 Example of Internal Structure of Communication
Module
[0177] FIGS. 7A and 7B show examples of inner structure of the
communication module 1660 with external antenna 1480, used as a
component of the combination modules of the examples of FIGS. 4A to
4F. Note that the antenna-equipped communication module 1666 and
the in-system communication module 1752 shown in FIGS. 4A to 4E
each include an antenna 1480 for a single system communication
within the communication module 1660 shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B.
[0178] The single communication module 1660 of the present
embodiment can be used uniformly in the system controller
.alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128), the device
controllers 1240-1 and 1240-3 of the device 1_1250-1 and the device
5_1250-5, and the independent combination modules 1_1295-1 and
7_1295-7. Since the single communication module 1660 can be shared
with many structural members (system controller .alpha._1126
(system controller .beta._1128) and the unit 1290) in the same
network system .alpha._1132, costs used to produce the
communication module 1660 can be reduced by a mass production
effect.
[0179] As a specific method to achieve the above shared
communication module 1660, functions shared with various
combination modules 1295 as exemplified in FIGS. 4B to 4F are
provided with the communication module 1660. The functions shared
with various combination modules 1295 as exemplified in FIGS. 4B to
4F are used to:
[0180] [1] support for a communication protocol shared with the
same network system .alpha._1132; and
[0181] [2] conform to data communication schemes of various data
items related to other functions than a communication function. As
explained in Sections 1.2 and 1.3, the communication module 1660 is
always connected to the different function modules having other
functions than the communication function, and thus, the function
of [2] is especially important.
[0182] The above functions of [1] and [2] are provided with the
communication module 1660. Specifically, a communication controller
1700 in FIG. 7A mainly achieves the function [1]. Furthermore, an
interface 1710 in FIG. 7A mainly achieves the function [2]. In FIG.
7A, a region of the communication controller 1700 and a region of
the interface 1710 are separated for easier understanding; however,
no limitation is intended thereby. The circuits used to perform the
above functions [1] and [2] may be mixed. Alternately, some of the
functions [1] and [2] may be achieved through either of the
circuits.
[0183] To impart the versatility to the communication module 1660
to be shared in various types of combination modules 1295, the
structure of an interface (I/F) with the different function modules
1440 is improved in the present embodiment. Specifically, a
connector with the different function modules 1440 is divided into
a contents data interface 1950 and an address data interface 1940
and connection methods are varied corresponding to the type of the
different function modules 1440 which are the connection targets.
The versatility of the communication module 1660 with respect to
various types of different function modules 1440 is improved and
the communication module 1660 can be adoptable in multiobjective
(various) combination modules 1295.
[0184] The above point will be explained in detail below. If the
combination module 1295 is realized as a monofunctional sensor
combination module 1460 as in FIGS. 4B and 5, or as a
monofunctional actuator combination module 1670 as in FIGS. 4C and
6A to 6C, the data communication in the network system .alpha._1132
can be established if only address data unique to the combination
module 1295 and address data of the system controller .alpha._1126
(system controller .beta._1128) are stored therein. Therefore, if
the connector is connected to only one sensor module 1260 (FIG. 4B)
or to only one actuator module 1670 (FIG. 4C) as a different
function module 1440 (FIG. 4A), the address data interface 1940 in
FIG. 7A is not used.
[0185] On the other hand, if the combination module 1295 is used as
a part of the processor combination module 1465 as in FIG. 4D to be
used in the system controller .alpha._1126 (system controller
.beta._1128), address data are different in each unit 1290
(combination module 1295). Therefore, address data of communication
targets are notified from the processors 1230 an 1734 in FIG. 4D to
the in-system communication module 1752 through the busline 1490.
At that time, the address data interface 1940 is used as address
data notification means (data notification input/output
terminal).
[0186] Furthermore, if the combination module 1295 is used within
the memory combination module 1475 as shown in FIG. 4E, the
in-system communication module 1752 needs to designate an address
range within the memories 1242, 1246, 1232, and 1248 in which the
recording area 1740 of data related to management data (table) is
stored via the busline 1490. Therefore, both the contents data
interface 1950 and the address data interface 1940 in FIG. 7A are
connected to the busline 1490 in the processor combination module
1465 of FIG. 4D and the memory combination module 1475 of FIG.
4E.
[0187] At the end of Section 1.3, a method by which a communication
module is connected to a plurality of different function modules
through a common busline is explained as an alternate method of the
example of FIG. 4F. In that case, an address corresponding to the
different function modules directly connected to the communication
module 1660 in a part of the address data interface 1940 is
designated. Thereby, the different function modules directly
connected to the communication module 1660 can be switched in a
time modulation manner.
[0188] If the network communication in the network system
.alpha._1132 is performed through a wireless communication media, a
sender supplies current to the antenna 1480 to generate radio
waves, and a receiver detects weak current flowing in the antenna
1480 and detects signals. Both the current supply and the signal
detection corresponding to the antenna 1480 are performed within a
data communication executor 3016.
[0189] The communication data exchanged between the data
communication executor 3016 and the other communication modules
1660 via the antenna 1480 have the structure of FIG. 11 (a). Note
that the communication data structure indicated in FIG. 11 will be
explained in Section 2.2. Then, communication middleware data APLDT
(and expansion data EXDT) of FIG. 11 (b) in the communication data
are processed in the interface 1710 of FIG. 7A. That is, the
communication middleware data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) are
analyzed in a contents extractor 1938 and necessary data are sent
to the different function modules 1440 via the contents data
interface 1950. As a specific example of the necessary data, state
configuration change data (control data) of the device 1250 and the
actuator combination module 1470 may be included in the
communication middleware data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) of
FIG. 11 (b). In that case, the specific contents of the data are
decoded in the contents extractor 1938 and a decoded result is
notified to the actuator module 1670 via the contents data
interface 1950. Then, the operation (state configuration change) of
the actuator module 1670 is initiated corresponding to the notified
contents.
[0190] Furthermore, data input from the different function module
1440 via the contents data interface 1950 are subjected to the
format conversion in the contents configurator 1934 and the
communication middleware data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) are
generated. As a specific example, if contents data interface 1950
is connected to the sensor module 1260, the sensor data obtained in
the sensor module 1260 are converted into the communication
middleware data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) in the contents
configurator 1934. Then, the communication data are transmitted to
the system controller .alpha._1126 (system controller .beta._1128)
via the data communication executor 3016 and the antenna 1480.
[0191] Data items of FIGS. 11 (c) to 11 (f) within the structure of
FIG. 11 (a) are processed in the communication controller 1700 of
FIG. 7A. That is, the data items of FIGS. 11 (c) to 11 (f) are
generated in a physical layer frame generator 1914 and are combined
with the data items of FIG. 11 (b). The combined data items are
transmitted to the data communication executor 3016 and the
communication data transmission is performed. Contrary, in the
communication data reception, the communication data having the
structure of FIG. 11 (a) are analyzed in the physical layer frame
analyzer 1918 and the data items of FIG. 11 (b) extracted therein
are sent to the contents extractor 1938.
[0192] Furthermore, if the address data interface 1940 is connected
during transmission, address data of the receiver are notified via
the address data interface 1940. Then, the address data conforming
to the format of FIG. 11 (a) are generated in the address data
generator 1924 and communication data of FIG. 11 (a) are generated
in the physical layer frame generator 1914.
[0193] If the address data interface 1940 is connected during
reception, the data items of FIGS. 11 (c) to 11 (f) are selected in
the physical layer frame analyzer 1918, and transferred to an
address data extractor 1928. Then, only the predetermined address
data are extracted in the address data extractor 1928 and sent to
the address data interface 1940.
[0194] If the communication module 1660 is used in a monofunctional
sensor combination module 1460, address data of a system controller
.alpha._1126 (system controller .beta._1128) of the receiver are
stored in advance in the address data generator 1924, instead of
using the address data interface 1940. Thereby, the sensor data can
automatically be addressed to the system controller .alpha._1126
(system controller .beta._1128).
[0195] Furthermore, if the communication module 1660 is used in a
monofunctional actuator combination module 1470, its own address
data are stored in advance in the address data extractor 1928,
instead of using the address data interface 1940. That is, radio
data detected in the data communication executor 3016 are entirely
transmitted to the physical layer frame analyzer 1918 and data
corresponding to the contents extractor 1938 and data corresponding
to the address data extractor 1928 are distributed to the
respective extractors. Then, the receiver side address data
extracted in the address data extractor 1928 are determined whether
or not they match the own address data. If the receiver side
address data do not match the own address data, the data
temporarily stored in the contents extractor 1938 are suitably
destroyed. If the receiver side address data match the own address
data, the data temporarily stored in the contents extractor 1938
are determined to be the communication data with respect to the
combination module 1295 and transferred to the contents data
interface 1950.
[0196] The series of process described above is controlled by a
processor 1960. Note that a connection line of the processor 1960
is omitted from the depiction of FIG. 7A; however, the connection
of the processor is optional such as the processor 1736 which is
directly connected to a busline BUS as in FIG. 7B or the processor
1960 may be directly connected to respective parts in the
module.
[0197] FIG. 7B shows another example of the internal structure of
the communication module 1660. In the example of FIG. 7B, the
communication module 1660 contains a memory 1790. Therefore, when
the unit 1290 containing the communication module 1660 is
transferred from a system to a different system (from system
.alpha._1132 to system .beta._1134), the unit transfer can
seamlessly and easily be performed between different systems.
[0198] Note that an external module connector 1778 of FIG. 7B
corresponds to the contents data interface 1950 and the address
data interface 1940 of FIG. 7A. Furthermore, a signal processor
1780 of FIG. 7B corresponds to the contents extractor 1938 and the
contents configurator 1934 of FIG. 7A. The signal processor 1780
may include the functions of the address data extractor 1928 and
the address data generator 1924 of FIG. 7A, and may further include
the functions of the data communication executor 3016, physical
layer frame analyzer 1918, and physical layer frame generator
1914.
[0199] The communication module 1660 of FIG. 7B is attached to,
embedded in, adhered to, or mounted on the different function
module 1440 having a function other than communication as shown in
FIG. 4A. The combination module 1295 includes the communication
module 1660 attached to, embedded in, adhered to, or mounted on the
different function module 1440. The unit 1290 includes the
combination module 1295 as shown in FIGS. 3A (b) and 3A (c). The
unit 1290 cab be realized as any substance such as a part, product,
item, device, material, and
[0200] Specifically, the communication module 1660 includes various
function blocks structured on an insulating substrate 1660-1
through an integration technique. The communication module 1660
includes an antenna connector 1774 to connect an antenna ANT_1772
thereto for transmission/reception of radio 1770. The antenna
ANT_1772 may be formed on the insulating substrate 1660-1 of the
communication module 1660. The communication module 1660 includes
the external module connector 1778 and is connectable to a
plurality of different function modules 1766-1, 1766-2, . . . , and
1766-n via the external module connector 1778. The different
function modules 1766-1, 1766-2, . . . , and 1766-n may be the
sensor module 1260, actuator module 1670, processor module 1680,
memory module 1690, and/or display module 1226.
[0201] Different function modules 1766-1 to 1766-n may include
various kinds of sensors as the sensor modules 1260. Such sensors
are to detect, for example, a temperature, humidity, pressure,
deformation, water quality (through a chemical reaction or
filtering), gas (through a chemical reaction), brightness,
supersonic wave, color, and pulse. One or more sensors are
selectively set in the different function modules 1766-1 to 1766-n
based on the environment in which the communication module 1660 is
used. Furthermore, different kinds of sensors may be combined as
required. Some of the sensors may be wirelessly connected to the
external module connector 1778 (via radio wave, infrared,
supersonic wave, or the like).
[0202] Furthermore, the actuator module 1670 used in different
function modules 1766-1 to 1766-n may be, for example, an electric
switch, mechanical switch, light emitting substance, heat
generator, reformable substance (shape memory medium), and elastic
substance (rubber), selected optionally based on a use.
[0203] Here, one or more different function modules 1766-1, 1766-2,
. . . , and 1766-n may be formed on the insulating substrate
1660-1. Furthermore, some of the different function modules may
optionally be connected to the communication module 1660 via the
external module connector 1778.
[0204] Furthermore, the communication module 1660 includes a power
supplier 1776 and is connected to a power source via the power
supplier 1776. The power source may be provided apart from the
communication module 1660. Alternately, a power source mount may be
provided with the insulating substrate 1660-1 such that the power
source is formed integrally with the communication module 1660.
[0205] The following various schemes can be used to charge battery
in a power source (not shown). For example, there is a scheme by
which current from solar power generating elements is charged in a
battery. This scheme corresponds to the combination of the solar
electricity generator module (solar cell) 1552 and the battery
charger module (battery) 1554 in FIG. 5. There is another scheme by
which current induced in a coil by an electromagnetic wave effect
is charged in a battery. This scheme corresponds to the combination
of the near-field communication module 1560 and the battery charger
module (battery) 1554 in FIG. 5. There is another scheme by which a
voltage produced in piezoelectric elements by mechanical
oscillation is converted into current and is charged in a battery.
The mechanical oscillation may be made by, for example, pressure
and vibration of sound, pressure and vibration by aerial substance
(wind, gas, and the like), and pressure and vibration by liquid
(water and oil), selected optionally. Based on an environment in
which the communication module 1660 is used, one or more schemes or
a combination of several schemes can be selected.
[0206] The antenna connector 1774, external module connector 1778,
and power supplier are connected to the signal processor 1780.
Furthermore, the processor 1736, memory 1790, and signal processor
1780 are connected such that mutual communication can be
established via the bus BUS in the communication module 1660. Here,
the processor 1736 controls the general operation of the
communication module 1660 based on the applications stored in the
application storage 1792 of the memory 1790.
[0207] The processor 1736 and the signal processor 1780 are
operated based on the applications. Processes performed therein
include, for example, a take-in process of outputs from the sensor
module 1260, output processes of control signals to the actuator
module 1670 and the display module 1226, cooperative control
process with the processor module 1680, input/output process of
recorded data with respect to the memory module 1690, feeding
process of transfer signals to the antenna ANT_1772, take-in
process of reception signals from the antenna ANT_1772, data write
to the memory 1790, and data read from the memory 1790.
[0208] The memory 1790 includes an application change software
storage 1791 and a security target data storage 1799. The memory
1790 further includes an actuator module management data storage
1792, sensor module management data storage 1796, self attribution
data storage 1793, life management data storage 1794, and operation
period management data storage 1795.
[0209] The actuator module management data storage 1792 in the
memory 1790 stores management data of the actuator module 1670
connected thereto through the external module connector 1778.
Furthermore, the sensor module management data storage 1796 stores
management data of the sensor module 1260 connected thereto through
the external module connector 1778.
[0210] For example, the communication module 1660 is sometimes
inspected during the inspection of the communication module 1660,
or at the time of shipment from the factory. When an inspection
device (not shown) gives a particular command to the communication
module 1660 during the inspection through the antenna ANT_1772,
management data of the actuator module 1670 stored in the actuator
module management data storage 1792 and/or management data of the
sensor module 1260 stored in the module management data storage
1796 are read. The management data read therefrom are sent to the
inspection device through the antenna ANT_1772. The inspection
device can refer to a sensing performance and a drive performance
of the communication module 1660.
[0211] Note that, although this is not shown in FIG. 7B, the memory
1790 may include a processor module management data storage which
stores management data of the processor module 1680, memory module
management data storage which stores management data of the memory
module 1690, or display module management data storage which stores
management data of the display module 1226.
[0212] Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1, the system of the present
embodiment includes a plurality of systems (systems .alpha._1132
and .beta._1134) in the same domain 2_1122-2. Similarly, domain
1_1122-1 and domain 3_1122-3 each include one or more systems (in
many cases, include several systems). Furthermore, such systems may
be used for different purposes and fields such as a consumer
products field, infrastructure field, and healthcare field. Thus,
even if a combination module 1295 or a unit 1290 including the
communication module 1660 of FIG. 7B moves between such systems of
different purposes and fields, the operation of the combination
module 1295 or the unit 1290 can be optimized corresponding to each
system. That is, if the combination module 1295 or the unit 1290
moves between the systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 of the same
domain 2_1122-2 or different systems of different domains 1_1122-2,
2_1122-2, and 3_1122-3, the operation of the combination module
1295 or the unit 1290 changes arbitrarily to be optimized for the
application fields and purposes of the system .alpha._1132 (or
system .beta._1134). To achieve the above, the memory 1790 includes
at least one of an application storage 1792, application change
software storage (application change software) 1791, security
target data storage 1799, self attribution data storage 1793, life
management data storage 1794, and operation period management data
storage 1795. Thus, the combination module 1295 or the unit 1290 of
the present embodiment can be used with flexible system
applicability and versatility.
[0213] As described above, a unit 1290 (cf. FIG. 3A) includes a
combination module 1295 (cf. FIG. 4) or a device 1250 (cf. FIG. 2)
in which a communication module 1660 of FIG. 7B or a communication
module 1202 is incorporated. In the unit 1290, data may be
preliminarily recorded in at least any one of the application
storage 1792, security target data storage 1799, self attribution
data storage 1793, life management data storage 1794, and operation
period management data storage 1795 through external radiowaves.
Additionally, a system controller .alpha._1126 may write such data
in such a storage at the time of a check-in process executed by a
user after purchase of the unit 1290 or of a plug-in process
(described in Section 4.2.
[0214] The application change software storage 1791 is used if a
modification or a change occurs in an application which controls
the operation of the communication module 1660. For example, if the
combination module 1295 or the unit 1290 including the
communication module 1660 is transferred from one system to another
system (for example, from system .beta._1134 to system
.alpha._1132), a plug-in process is performed at each transference.
If application field or purpose is significantly different between
system .beta._1134 of pre-transference and system .alpha._1132 of
post-transference, software used for execution of new application
is sent from the system controller .alpha._1126 (or system
controller .beta._1128) configured to manage/control/operate system
.alpha._1132 of post-transference through the communication module
1202-3 of FIG. 2. The software used for execution of new
application is arbitrarily stored in the application change
software storage (application change software) 1791. The process of
the processor 1736 is performed based on the software used for
execution of new application, and thus, even if the combination
module 1295 or the unit 1290 is transferred to system .alpha._1132
directed to a totally different application field or purpose, the
operation of system .alpha._1132 can be optimized.
[0215] Here, a change of application may be initiated as follows:
the communication module 1660 requires new application, or an
application change command is given externally (for example, from
the system controller systems .alpha._1126). Such a change of
application may occur in various occasions such as when the
communication module 1660 is shipped from a factory, when the
operation mode is switched from one to another during the use, when
the environment of the communication module 1660 is changed
(transference between systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134), or
when a period of use of the communication module 1660 is fulfilled.
Since the application change software storage (application change
software) 1791 is disposed in the memory 1790, the communication
module 1660 can freely change, add, or update application to
correspond to a change of environment or purpose.
[0216] On the other hand, the application storage 1792 of the
memory 1790 of FIG. 7B includes common application software which
is irrelevant to a change of the system. Therefore, the combination
module 1295 or the unit 1290 including the communication module
1660 is transferred between different systems, the common
application software preliminarily stored in the application
storage 1792 is not changed and is stored/used continuously
therein.
[0217] Note that the application software stored in the application
change software storage (application change software) 1791 and in
the application storage 1792 is described using a particular
program language or a script (including machine language). The
application software 3050 may include an API command 3045
corresponding to an OS_3030 (or a particular command) as described
later with reference to FIG. 18B. Or, the application software may
be described using a Java script, or a machine language and its
relevant language as described later with reference to FIGS. 19A
and 19B. Or, it may be described using a web-related language such
as Hyper-text Markup Language (HTML) or Extensible Markup Language
(XML).
[0218] The security target data storage 1799 is used for storage of
highly important data such as personal sensitive data. Furthermore,
the security target data storage 1799 may be used for storage of
optional data privately.
[0219] For example, a communication module 1660 is used in a
patient's record card in a hospital. In such a usage, personal
sensitive data (including patient's name, age, disease, treatment
progress) are stored in the security target data storage 1799.
Here, such a patient's record card is not permanently kept in a
hospital and may be discarded, or may be replaced with a new record
card. In such a case, the data of security target existing in the
communication module must be erased.
[0220] Erase of the security target data can be performed through
various ways at arbitrary timing. For example, the security target
data are erased when the communication module 1660 does not make a
communication with the system controller .alpha._1126 for a
particular period. In that case, the communication module 1660 is
determined to be discarded or replaced arbitrarily and the security
target data is erased. Or, the system controller .alpha._1126 may
request the communication module 1660 to erase the security target
data. Or, the security target data may be erased when the sensor
module 1260 connected to the communication module 1660 detects a
particular atmosphere and/or an element (such as a pressure, heat,
humidity, and moisture). That is, if the sensor module 1260 detects
a particular atmosphere and/or an element (such as a pressure,
heat, humidity, and moisture), the processor 1736 automatically
recognizes a change in the environment and erases the security
target data. Or, the security target data may be erased when
particular conditions are met.
[0221] On the other hand, if record cards are restored and the
security target data need to be moved to a new record card, the
system controller .alpha._1126 may control transference and
reception of the security target data between the record cards.
[0222] The self attribution data storage 1793 includes attribution
data indicative of how to handle a unit (product, component,
material, or item) in which the communication module 1660 is, for
example, attached, bonded, mounted, or embedded. Specifically,
attribution data may include identification data of the unit (item
name, component name, or product name) and identification data of a
factory location or a manufacturer.
[0223] For example, a combination module 1295 (or a unit 1290)
including a communication module 1660 is adhered to or embedded in
an aluminum can for beverage. Aluminum cans are used, and may be
recycled. If attribution data indicate that a material of the
target in which the module is adhered to or embedded in is
aluminum, aluminum cans can be automatically sorted and sent to a
section for aluminum recycle process in a recycle plant. In that
case, the entirety of the recycle plant corresponds to the system
.alpha._1132 and a sorting machine in the recycle plant corresponds
to the system controller .alpha._1126. The sorting machine
corresponding to the system controller .alpha._1126 sends a
particular command to the communication module 1660 and reads the
self attribution data. The material of the can be determined based
on the self attribution data.
[0224] On the other hand, a combination module 1295 (or unit 1290)
including the communication module 1660 may be embedded in a
plastic bottle for beverage. In that case, a sorting machine sends
a particular command to the communication module 1660 to read self
attribution data and recognizes that the bottle is plastic. The
sorting machine can easily and automatically send the bottle to a
section for plastic recycle process. The above example does not
intend any limitation; self attribution data can be used for any
object (component, product, item, device, material, and item) in
which the combination module 1295 (or unit 1290) including the
communication module 1660 is adhered, embedded, bonded, or
attached.
[0225] Here, if a combination module 1295 (or unit 1290) including
the communication module 1660 is transferred from one system to
another, the environment may change. The content of the self
attribution data may progressively change to correspond to such a
change of the environment. For example, if a can for beverage is
displayed in a store, data such as a price, display location, and
item category may be stored in the memory 1790 as the self
attribution data. In that case, the system controller .alpha._1126
which monitors the store may perform a stock check and accounting
service for customers using the self attribution data.
[0226] As another example, a combination module 1295 (or unit 1290)
may be added to a fish. Fish are caught in the sea, shipped to a
port, sold to a bidder in an auction held in the port, delivered by
an automobile to a market store, and bought by a customer.
[0227] For example, a tag (combination module 1295/unit 1290) added
to a fish includes a sensor module 1260 which is a combination of a
temperature sensor and a humidity sensor for quality control. In
this example, the self attribution data include a suitable
temperature range, suitable humidity range, and edibility
expiration date. Here, the self attribution data will be input by a
fisherman or a market manager.
[0228] If an ambient temperature or humidity exceeds a suitable
range during the transportation or storage of the fish, the
communication module 1660 can send a first alert signal to the
system controller .alpha._1126 disposed in a ship or transport
truck. Furthermore, when the edibility expiration date approaches
and passes, a second alert signal and a third alert signal are
sent, respectively, through an antenna 1772.
[0229] Then, when fish are displayed in a store, data such as a
price, display location, and item category are added to the self
attribution data. In that case, the self attribution data are
automatically sent from another system controller .alpha._1126 in
the store to be stored in the memory 1790. Using the self
attribution data, the stock check and accounting service for
customers can be performed.
[0230] As above, when a combination module 1295/unit 1290 is moved
from one system to another (system .alpha._1132, for example) to be
disposed therein (to belong thereto), the self attribution data
1793 are automatically added to or updated in the combination
module 1295/unit 1290 by the system controller .alpha._1126 which
manages, controls, and operates the system .alpha._1132. Therefore,
the flexibility and versatility of the combination module 1295 or
the unit 1290 can be improved. That is, using the self attribution
data added or updated as above, the system controller .alpha._1126
can perform a suitable process for the system .alpha._1132.
[0231] Or, the self attribution data may be used to allow a
communication module 1660 to respond to a particular command
(request signal) and to output a response signal which acknowledges
the presence of the communication module 1660. For example, a
communication module 1660 is embedded in a surgical instrument or
an inspection tool of an airplane or a train. In that case, an
operation site is considered as a system .alpha._1132, and a system
controller .alpha._1126 disposed in the operation site requests the
communication module 1660 to respond. A response from the
communication module 1660 in the operation site (system
.alpha._1132) indicates a surgical instrument or an inspection tool
left in the operation site. Using a data communication process of
the self attribution data, items left after surgery or inspection
can be detected.
[0232] As another example of the use of the self attribution data
1793, owner data of a unit 1290 (or a combination module 1295, or a
device 1250) may be added thereto. To sell a unit 1290 (or a
combination module 1295, or a device 1250) with the self
attribution data 1793 recorded therein, it is displayed in a store
as described above. In that case, the store corresponds to a system
.beta._1134. When a user buys the unit 1290 (or combination module
1295, or device 1250), it is moved to the user's house. The user's
house corresponds to a system .alpha._1132 (cf. FIG. 1). Therefore,
the unit 1290 (or combination module 1295, or device 1250) is
disposed in different systems before and after its sale. When the
unit 1290 is disposed in the user's house, the system controller
.alpha._1126 used for management, operation, and data collection in
the system .alpha._1132 performs a check-in process as described in
Section 4.2. At that time, the system controller .alpha._1126
records user data related to the owner to a part of the self
attribution data 1793. The user data include, not only the name of
the owner, but also an ID, address, phone number, and mail address
of the user. Using the user data recorded to a part of the self
attribution data 1793, a unit 1290 can be easily located if it is
lost outside.
[0233] The owner is not limited to the user of the unit 1290. The
owner may be a person, organization, or corporate who or which is
related to the use of the unit 1290 (or combination module 1295, or
device 1250). Or, the owner may be a person, organization, or
corporate who or which is related to the use of an item, component,
or material in which the combination module 1295 with the self
attribution data 1793 recorded therein is disposed, inserted, or
mixed.
[0234] For example, a combination module 1295 with the self
attribution data 1793 recorded therein is inserted or mixed in a
pill or a powdered medicine. When a user swallows such a pill or
medicine in a hospital, nursing home, or house, the system
controller .alpha._1126 records the name and the date of intake to
the self attribution data 1793. The name of the medicine is also
recorded to the self attribution data 1793. When a user goes to
some place where a system controller .beta._1134 is disposed, the
system controller .beta._1134 can refer to and manage data
indicative of who takes what medicine at what time. For a person
who suffers from a chronic disease, taking medicines regularly is
very important but easily missed. If such a system controller
.beta._1134 can manage the above data regularly, disremembering of
taking medicine can be prevented.
[0235] As above, the self attribution data 1793 include a plurality
of data items related to each other, and thus, the combination
module 1295 (unit 1290) with the self attribution data 1793
recorded therein can easily manage its use condition with high
accuracy.
[0236] The life management data storage 1794 can store life
management data used to manage the life of the combination module
1295 (or unit 1290) including the communication module 1660. The
life management data indicate a life limit of the combination
module 1295 (or unit 1290) including the communication module 1660.
After the life limit passes, the communication module 1660 stops
its operation. Thus, there is no unnecessary radiation of
radiowaves after the life limit.
[0237] For example, when a beverage can is wasted or a fish is
cooked, a tag therein (combination module 1295/unit 1290) is no
longer useful. If the memory 1790 includes the life management data
storage 1794 and the tag can be stopped automatically after the
life limit as above, produce of unnecessary radiowaves within the
system .alpha._1132 can be prevented. By preventing such produce of
unnecessary radiowaves, the data communication efficiency in the
system .alpha._1132 can be improved.
[0238] The operation period management data storage 1795 can store
data used for setting an operation period of the communication
module 1660. The operation period and a sleep period of the
communication module 1660 are set based on its environment and
condition of use to increase a power save effect and to prevent
interference with periphery devices. Using the operation period
management data, the operation period and the sleep period can be
set hourly and the operation period and the sleep period can be set
based on outputs from the sensor.
[0239] Section 1.7 Explanation of Whole Structure of Wide Area
Network System of Embodiment
[0240] The system of the present embodiment has been described in
Section 1.1. In this section, a whole structure of a widearea
network system of the present embodiment will be explained in
detail with reference to FIG. 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the service
provider B_1112-2 acquires items (or data) from the wholesale firm
B1_1104-1 and/or wholesale firm B2_1104-2 which handle similar
items (or data) for providing services.
[0241] The wholesale firms A_1102, B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2 are
management organizations handling particular items and data. Such
organizations include, for example, a private profit making
organization including an incorporated foundation and a business
corporation, and also a public organization such as a government,
local government, public corporation, and public-service
corporation. Thus, from the standpoints of the service provides
A_1112-1 to C_1112-3, the wholesale firms may include not only a
company of business but also a trustee of a particular service or a
guide/approver of a particular service. For example, if the
wholesale firm is a company of business of the service providers
A_1112-1 to C_1112-3, items handled by the wholesale firm include
common goods such as power, gas, water, and gasoline, and also
include general materials, liquid assets such as cash, bond, and
jewelry, and fixed assets such as real estate, and also include
valuable information which is difficult to obtain through the
ordinary web (information related to market research, specific
individual, or specific area, specifically, local weather
information, or local traffic information, or the like).
[0242] The service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3 in the system of
the present embodiment are organizations which provide particular
services. Especially, the service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3
perform general management of particular services. Furthermore,
services provided by the service providers include various services
which use data obtained from the sensor module 1260 described
later. As specified later, data obtained from a senor module within
the domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3 through the network are
transferred to a server n_1116-n within the service provider
B_1112-2 with data related to the obtained data, and the service
provider B_1112-2 provides particular services based on the data.
As can be understood from the above, in the system of the present
embodiment, the service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3 can extract
items and data from domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3. Furthermore, the
service provider B_1112-2 includes a plurality of servers 1_1116-1
to n_1116-n and manages databases 1118-1-n of the servers 1_1116-1
to n_1116-n. Furthermore, distributed processing is performed
cooperatively by the servers 1_1116-1 to n_1116-n to accelerate the
process. Although this is omitted from FIG. 1, servers and
corresponding databases are disposed in the service provider
A_1112-1 and the service provider C_1112-3.
[0243] As a specific operation, a service provider can distribute
(let in and let out) items and data received from the wholesale
firm A_1102 or the wholesale firm B1_1104-1 and B2_1104-2 in the
domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3. Such a service will be categorized
into the following examples:
[0244] .alpha.] Retailing items and data handled by the wholesale
firms A_1102, B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2 to end users;
[0245] .beta.] Independently processing items and data handled by
the wholesale firms A_1102, B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2 and providing
the end users with a result of the processing;
[0246] .gamma.] Providing a service determined to be optimal based
on data obtained from a sensor module; and
[0247] .delta.] Combination of .alpha.] to .gamma.].
[0248] Here, retail items handled by service providers include
common goods such as power, gas, water, and gasoline, and also
include general materials, liquid assets such as cash, bond, and
jewelry, and fixed assets such as real estate. Data (items) handled
by service providers also include valuable information which is
difficult to obtain through the ordinary web (information related
to market research, specific individual, or specific area,
specifically, local weather information, or local traffic
information, or the like).
[0249] The service provider A_1112-1 obtains items (or data) from
the wholesale firm A_1102 which are different from those of the
wholesale firms B1_1104-1 and B2_1104-2 and provides a different
service. Between the service provider A_1112-1 and the service
provider B_1112-2, or between the service provider B_1112-2 and the
service provider C_1112-3, data and resource sharing 1114 is
performed to facilitate and advance the service. Furthermore, the
service provider A_1112-1 includes a particular item storage 1154
to store the items obtained from the wholesale firm A_1102.
Furthermore, the service provider A_1112-2 of FIG. 1 includes a
particular item generator 1152 which manufactures a new item by
materializing an item obtained from the wholesale firm A_1102, or
generates a new item (or new data) by processing an item (or data)
obtained from the wholesale firm A_1102. Although this is omitted
from FIG. 1, a particular item storage 1154 and a particular item
generator 1152 are disposed in the service providers B_1112-2 and
C_1112-3.
[0250] The particular item generator 1152 of FIG. 1 generates an
original item to which an original additional value is added. As an
example of the generation of such an original item, there is a
treatment process of a raw material obtained from the wholesale
firm A_1102. In manufacturing industries, product manufacturing
factories correspond to the particular item generator 1152.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the particular item
generator 1152 may correspond to a power plant including a solar
power generator, wind power generator, thermal power generator, or
geothermal power generator, and to a peripheral installment such as
a substation or a transmission station. Furthermore, the system of
the present embodiment is not limited to the above example, and a
production location of common goods including a refinery of
gasoline or a reservoir may correspond to the particular item
generator 1152. In addition, a location where original information
is generated in the service provider A as a form of an item may
correspond to the particular item generator 1152. For example,
various data available on the internet may be analyzed, and such
analyzed data may be used in, for example, a market research or a
weather forecast. Such analyzed data are a form of the original
item.
[0251] Note that the particular item storage 1154 of FIG. 1
temporarily stores the following items (including data):
[0252] .alpha.] Items and data received from the wholesale firm
A_1102 or the wholesale firms B1_1104-1 and B2_1104-2;
[0253] .beta.] Items and data generated in the particular item
generator 1152;
[0254] .gamma.] Items and data extracted from the domains 1_1122-1
to 3_1122-3; and
[0255] .delta.] Combination of .alpha.] to .gamma.].
[0256] For example, when an item temporarily stored in the
particular item storage 1154 is power, the storage 1154 is composed
of a battery, charge/discharge monitor (which corresponds to a
smart meter 1124 in the system .alpha._1132), and charge/discharge
controller. Or, when an item temporarily stored is tap water or
town gas, the storage 1154 is composed of a water tank or a gas
tank, charge/discharge monitor, and charge/discharge
controller.
[0257] Services from the service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3 are
received by the domain 2_1122-2 or the system .alpha._1132 therein
(described later). A price of the service is directly paid to the
service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 1, a
server n_1116-n within the service provider B_1112-2 and the
particular item storage 1154 within the service provider A_1112-1
are connected to the smart meter 1124 and the system controller
.alpha._1126 within the domain 2_1122-2 and the system .alpha._1132
through a network. Furthermore, as depicted by dotted lines in FIG.
1, the smart meter 1124 is connected to the wholesale firm A_1102
and directly communicates therewith. Here, in the example of FIG.
1, a value measured by the smart meter 1124 is transmitted to the
server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2, the system
controller .alpha._1126 in the system .alpha._1132, or the
wholesale firm A_1102. Alternatively, the value measured by the
smart meter 1124 may be transmitted to the system controller
.beta._1128 in the system .beta._1134 in the domain 2_1122-2 or
other devices in the domain 2_1122-2.
[0258] The smart meter 1124 is a device which measures the amount
of inflow/outflow items (similar items) between the inside and the
outside of the domain 2_1122-2 (or system .alpha._1126) at certain
intervals. The smart meter 1124 mainly measures the inflow/outflow
of common goods such as power, gas, water, and sewerage and it can
collect the inflow (or the amount consumed in the inside) of such
goods along with the outflow (the amount sold to the outside) of
such goods as measurement values. In the system of the present
embodiment, however, the smart meter 1124 may measure not only the
inflow/outflow of such common goods but also the inflow/outflow of
general goods, liquid assets, and specific information dealt
through electronic commerce or mail-orders, and results may be sent
out.
[0259] Especially, in the system of the present embodiment, a
communication module 1202-1 is included in the smart meter 1124
(FIG. 8A), and it sends out the measurement values of the smart
meter 1124 at certain intervals. Furthermore, the intervals can be
arbitrarily changed by the server n_1116-n, system controller
.alpha._1126, or wholesale firm A_1102. Or, the measurement value
of the smart meter 1124 may not be sent out at certain intervals
but may be sent out at any arbitrary timing requested by the system
controller .alpha._1126, server n_1116-n, or wholesale firm A_1102.
Or, the measurement value of the smart meter 1124 may be sent out
when the smart meter 1124 itself determines data sending
necessary.
[0260] An example of a service provided by the service provider
A_1112-1 using the smart meter 1124 will be explained. In this
example, particular items and particular data preliminarily stored
in the particular item storage 1154 in the service provider
A_1112-1 are sent to the domain 2_1122-2 (or in the system
.alpha._1132) through the system controller .alpha._1126 or the
smart meter 1124. Or, items left in the domain 2_1122-2 (or in the
system .alpha._1132) may be returned to the particular item storage
1154 through the smart meter 1124. Then, a different between the
amount of items supplied from the particular item storage 1154 to
the domain 2_1122-2 (or in the system .alpha._1132) and the amount
of items returned to the particular item storage 1154 through the
smart meter 1124 is charged by the service provider A_1112-1 as a
used item amount.
[0261] In parallel, the domain 2_1122-2 may directly receive items
(or data) using the infrastructure and delivery system owned or
managed by the wholesale firm A_1102 or the wholesale firm
B1_1104-1 and B2_1104-2. That is, as depicted in FIG. 1 with a
dotted line between the wholesale firm A_1102 and the smart meter
1124, items (or data) handled by the wholesale firm A_1102 may be
directly sent to the domain 2_1122-2 or the system .alpha._1132
therein through the smart meter 1124. In that case, at the same
time, data related to the contents and amount of the items (or
data) received by the domain 2_1122-2 are notified from the smart
meter 1124 to the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2
one after another, and a service fee is periodically charged to a
user from the service provider B_1112-2 based on the notification
data. Here, pathways from the wholesale firm A_1102 to the smart
meter 1124 which functions as a window of the item supply to the
domain 2_1122-2 or the system .alpha._1132 are prepared in a
plurality of ways (the direct line which is represented by the
dotted line and lines going through the service provider A_1112-1
between the wholesale firm A_1102 and the smart meter 1124 in FIG.
1), and with these pathways, original services can be provided by
the service provider A_1112-1. Original services achieved thereby
will be described in Section 5.2.1.
[0262] Now, the domain 2_1122-2 and the system .alpha._1132 therein
which can receive services from the service providers A_1112-1 to
C_1112-3 through a widearea network will be explained. As shown in
FIG. 1, one domain 2_1122-2 includes one or more systems
.alpha./.beta._1132/1134, and the systems .alpha./.beta._1132/1134
include system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128, respectively.
Furthermore, the system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128 and
the smart meter 1124 may be connected to each other directly or
through the server n_1116-n for mutual data transference.
Furthermore, the system .alpha._1132 may be divided into sections
1_1142-1 to m_1142-m (sections will be described in Chapter 4.)
[0263] As described above, the system of the present embodiment
allows coexistence of a plurality of different systems (client
systems) at the same time. In consideration of the contents of FIG.
1 and FIG. 2, there is a complex client system (corresponding to
the domain 2_1122-2 of FIG. 1) including a plurality of client
systems .alpha._1132 (and .beta._1134) (client systems .alpha._1132
and client systems .beta._1134) with a unit 1290 which acquires or
prepares data for communication and a system controller
.alpha._1126 (and .beta._1128) which acquires and manages the data
from the unit 1290, wherein the system controller .alpha._1126
which manages the client system .alpha._1132 included in the
complex client system (domain 2_1122-2) divides a plurality of
units 1295-1 to 1295-7 into management target sections (sections
1_1142-1, 2_1142-1, and m_1142-m in FIG. 2), and data related to
each section of each unit (section data in FIG. 23) are
maintained.
[0264] Here, the domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3 are a network space
including one or more cooperative systems. Especially, a domain of
the system of the present embodiment corresponds to a network space
as a target of various condition measurements or a network space as
a target of a particular operation or execution or a target of
management and execution (related to a particular service). To
participate and operate in a particular domain, an identification
information ID unique to the domain and a unique password may be
necessary in some cases. Here, if the systems
.alpha./.beta._1132/1134 are associated with particular locations
which are physically or geographically close to each other, the
domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3 are associated with particular areas
on the network managed/used by members of a particular group which
can transcends such physical and geographical restriction. The
system .alpha._1132 is a minimum unit of the network system in
which internal units are connected to each other through the
network and a single system controller .alpha._1126 is disposed.
Furthermore, the network system is managed and operated by the
system controller .alpha._1126. The physical and geographical range
of the system .alpha._1132 may be set as particular areas which are
physically and geographically close to each other related to one or
more particular users (an area defined by a behavioral range of one
or more particular users within a particular period of time, for
example). The system .alpha._1132 in the present embodiment may be
associated with a network unit specified by particular
identification information such as personal area network (PAN),
local area network (LAN), metropolitan area network (MAN), and
widearea network (WAN). For example, according to institute of
electrical and electronic engineers (IEEE) 802.15.4, identification
information of personal area network identifier (PANID) should be
set to each PAN, and a single PAN defined by such PANID may be
associated with a system of the present embodiment. Or, as other
examples, a system may be associated with one home, one vehicle,
one peripheral space of a mobile device, or one work station
area.
[0265] Furthermore, one system includes one or more system
controllers .beta./.beta._1126/1128 to manage and operate the
communication within network systems which correspond to the
systems .alpha./.beta._1132/1134. Furthermore, as described above,
using the system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128, connection
to a widearea network which is outside the systems
.alpha./.beta._1132/1134 (network used for data communication with
the service providers A_1112-1 to C_1112-3) is established.
Furthermore, the system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128
include processors used for collection and proper processing of
signals and data obtained from one or more sensor modules within
the same systems .alpha./.beta._1132/1134 (sensor modules 1260
described later with reference to FIGS. 8A and 9). Such a system
controller may be, for example, a personal computer (PC), a mobile
device such as a smartphone, tablet, and mobile phone,
processor-equipped switchboard, processor-equipped refrigerator,
television, recorder, and audio recorder. Furthermore, the smart
meter 1124 may include a processor to function as a system
controller .alpha._1126, or a remote controller of an air
conditioner, television, or illumination device may include a
processor and a communication module (communication module 1202
described later with reference to FIGS. 8A and 9) to function as a
system controller. However, no limitation is intended thereby, and
in the present embodiment, any processor-equipped device including
a program used for collecting signals and data obtained from a
sensor module in a system and providing services to users may be
used as a system controller. Furthermore, a system controller may
be composed of a physical combination of several devices or may be
a sum of cooperative operations of several devices.
[0266] Especially, when a processor and a communication module are
installed in a remote controller to be used as a system controller
and such a remote controller is fixed or detachably attached on a
wall or a shelve by screws or the like, an original use (and an
advantage obtained thereby) is achieved. In that case, such a
remote controller needs to be fixed or positioned in a location
from which infrared communication with a main device such as an air
conditioner, television, and illumination device is performable.
Furthermore, sensor/communication modules (described later with
reference to FIG. 8B) related to temperature sensors, air current
sensors, or close-range motion sensors are provided with many
positions in a room to allow communication with the remote
controller (system controller .alpha._1126) in the system
.alpha._1132. Thereby, services including a prioritized temperature
control of exact locations of users in a room with high accuracy,
and a display control of a television to show three-dimensional
images for different users in different positions with naked eyes
are provided with users. Thus, by simply replacing a
commercially-available remote controller with the above remote
controller with a system controller function, its corresponding
commercially-available device (air conditioner, television, or
illumination device) which has already been installed can be
operated more efficiently.
[0267] In many cases of the conventional techniques related to
machine-to-machine (M2M) or internet of things (IoT), a cloud
server (which corresponds to a server n_1116-n of FIG. 1) collects
the entire signals and data obtained from home sensor modules in a
house, and services are provided with end users directly from the
cloud server. In such cases, a system controller .alpha._1126
simply functions as a gateway or a router as in FIG. 9 to relay
signals and data transference on the network. Such conventional
techniques face:
[0268] (1) a problem that personal data of a user is sent to a
server n_1116-n which is relatively public and the security thereof
may be jeopardized; and
[0269] (2) a problem that services to end users become unavailable
if a trouble occurs in a communication line between the system
controller .alpha._1126 or the smart meter 1124 and the server
n_1116-n, and the whole system is vulnerable.
[0270] In the present embodiment, the system controller
.alpha._1126 functions not only as a gateway or a router configured
to relay the signal and data transference on the network but also
as a processor configured to perform determination, conversion,
treatment of the collected signals and data from sensor modules and
to perform original services to the users based on the signals and
data. Thereby, in the present embodiment:
[0271] (1) the personal data of a user can be secured since the
system controller .alpha._1126 independently determines whether or
not each signal and data transference to server n_1116-n is
performed; and
[0272] (2) original services can be provided with users based on
the determination by the system controller .alpha._1126 based on
the collected signals and data from the senor modules, and since
these services can be performed even if there is a trouble in the
communication lines to the servers n_1116-n, the whole system
structure becomes strong. Especially, the system controller
.alpha._1126 of the present embodiment can gather the data from the
sensor modules 1260 determine/estimate behaviors of users (for
example, if a user is present, or if a user is sleeping or not) and
conditions of users (for example, if a user is a child or adult)
and can estimate requests of users. Therefore, even without a
server n_1116-n, suitable services can be provided with users
independently by the domain 2_1122-2.
[0273] Furthermore, in the system of the present embodiment, system
controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128 can work cooperatively in the
domain 2_1122-2. Therefore, one system controller .alpha._1126 can
collect signals and data obtained from the entre sensor modules in
the domain 2_1122-2 (and, although this is not depicted, including
sensor modules disposed in the system .beta._1134). As a result,
the system controller .alpha._1126 can collect data in the domain
2_1122-2 and provide suitable services in the system .alpha._1132
to users.
[0274] To achieve the cooperative operation of the system
controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128 in the domain 2_1122-2, the
present embodiment provides two network pathways: a direct network
pathway through which data are directly exchanged between the
system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128 using, for example,
wireless communication as in FIG. 1; and a indirect network pathway
through which data are indirectly exchanged between the system
controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128 through a server n_1116-n
using, for example, the internet. Thus, users can receive various
services. For example, if a home PC is a system controller
.alpha._1126 and a mobile device such as a smartphone or a tablet
is a system controller .beta._1128, and they are physically close
to each other, rapid data exchange can be performed through
wireless local area network (WLAN) or wireless personal local area
network (WPAN). If the internet line including a cable one is used
between the system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128, data
exchange therebetween is guaranteed regardless of the physical
distance therebetween. If direct data exchange is performed between
the system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128, privacy is kept
therebetween without involving a server n_1116-n, and a possibility
of leakage of personal sensitive data to the server n_1116-n which
is relatively public. The server n_1116-n can acquire data such as
local weather forecast data or traffic jam data, which are not
acquirable in the domain 2_1122-2, through a different network
pathway. Therefore, the system controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128
can perform indirect data exchange therebetween through the server
n_1116-n and can provide various services using the data originally
owned by the server n_1116-n to users. Here, as mentioned above,
the system controller .alpha._1126 itself can estimate behaviors
and conditions of users and desired and requests of users, and
thus, the system controller .alpha._1126 itself can switch, based
on its own determination, connection pathways between the systems
controllers .alpha./.beta._1126/1128.
[0275] Section 1.8 Explanation of Local Network System Structure of
Embodiment
[0276] In Section 1.1, a structural example of local network system
in the system .alpha._1132 in the domain 2_1122-2 of FIG. 1 has
been explained with reference to FIG. 2. In this section, examples
of systems other than that of FIG. 2 will be described with
reference to FIGS. 8A to 9.
[0277] In the example of FIG. 8A, devices 1250-1-3 include
communication modules 1202-4-6, respectively, and allow data
communication within the system .alpha._1132. Furthermore, the
devices 1250-1-3 include sensor modules 1260-1-5 and an actuator
module 1270-1. In the example of FIG. 8B, the relationship between
the communication modules 1202-4-6 and the sensor modules 1260-1-5
of FIG. 8A is interpreted and managed as sensor combination modules
1460-1-5. Similarly, the relationship between the communication
module 1202 and the actuator module 1270 is interpreted and managed
as actuator combination modules 1470-1-2. Or, as explained in
Section 1.3, they may be interpreted and managed as a combination
module 1295 including, for example, a processor combination module
1465, memory combination module 1475, and display combination
module 1478. Or, as the sensor combination module 1460-5 of FIG.
8B, a single combination module may be disposed alone.
[0278] In the system of the present embodiment, the amount (or
total amount) of common goods such as power, gas, clean
water/sewerage used in a single system (for example, system
.alpha._1132) in every particular period is measured automatically
and the data measured are periodically and automatically sent out
by a smart meter 1124. Actually, one smart meter 1124 is disposed
to each item of the common goods including power, gas, and clean
water/sewerage; however, for the sake of simple illustration, the
smart meter 1124 alone is depicted in the examples of FIGS. 8A and
8B. Or, the amount (or total amount) of common goods of each of
sections 1_1142-1, and 2_1142-2, which are described later, may be
automatically measured and sent out.
[0279] The smart meter 1124 includes, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 9,
an inflow monitor 1208 (for example, buy-power amount measure) and
an outflow monitor 1206 (for example, sell-power amount measure).
With the outflow monitor 1206, excess of common goods in the system
.alpha._1132 is measured and discharged (sold) to the wholesale
firm A_1102 by the smart meter 1124. Each measurement value (or
accumulation value) obtained in the smart meter 1124 is
periodically reported to a server n_1116-n through a communication
module 1202-1, and to the wholesale firm A_1102.
[0280] The communication modules 1202 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9 are
communication function parts conformable to wired or wireless data
transference communication schemes. The communication function
parts conforms to wired data transference communication schemes
such as local image signal transference line, local audio signal
transference line, phone line, and internet-related Ethernet
(registered trademark) corresponding communication line.
Furthermore, the communication function parts conforms to wireless
data transference communication schemes including close range
wireless communication schemes such as ZigBee (registered
trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), ultra wide band
(UWB), and Z-wave, middle range wireless communication schemes such
as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), EnOcean, and long range wireless
communication schemes such as second generation/personal digital
cellular (2G/PDC), global system for mobile communications (GSM)
(registered trademark), third generation/code division multiple
access (3G/CDMA), and world wide interoperability for microwave
access (WiMAX).
[0281] Especially, the system of the present embodiment has a
function to execute minimum essential processes in the
communication modules 1202 and 1660 as described later with
reference to FIG. 10A. Thus, the communication protocol
(communication data) structured as in FIGS. 11 to 15B, which will
be described in Chapter 2, is processed and executed in the
communication modules 1202 and 1660. Such a process may be
performed in accordance to basic (standard) application with a
versatile program such as Java script which does not require a
particular OS. Or, such a process may be performed in accordance
with ECMA script, decryption of HTML or HTML5, or execution of Java
applet corresponding to the decryption, for example. No limitation
is intended by the above-mentioned commercially-available versatile
scripts, and original processing scheme may be adopted.
[0282] In the examples of FIGS. 8A and 9, the communication module
1202 is stored in each of the system controller .alpha._1126, smart
meter 1124, and devices 1250 to allow data communication
therebetween. As shown in FIGS. 8A and 9, either a sensor module
1260 or an actuator module 1270 or both are disposed in each of the
devices 1250.
[0283] In the example of FIG. 8A, the devices 1250-1-3 disposed in
the system .alpha._1132 use the communication modules 1202-4-6,
respectively, and perform data communication with the system
controller .alpha._1126 through the communication module 1202-3. As
in FIG. 8A, there are three types of devices, that is, a device
including one or more sensor modules as the devices 1250-2-3
including sensor modules 1260-3-5, a device including both one or
more sensor modules and an actuator module as the deice 1250-1
including sensor modules 1260-1-2 and actuator module 1270-1, and a
device including one or more actuator modules (which is not shown).
In the example of FIG. 8A, the device 1250-1 including a device
controller 1240-1 and a memory 1242 which can store and manage
history data related to the sensor modules 1260-1-2 and the
actuator module 1270-1 and the devices 1250-2-3 can be mixed in the
system.
[0284] Here, as the service provider A_1112-1 explained with
reference to FIG. 1 in Section 1.7, if a function corresponding to
the particular item generator 1152 or a function corresponding to
the particular item storage 1154 is adopted in the system
.alpha._1132, the excess of common goods can be secured and
temporarily maintained therein. In the examples of FIGS. 8A and 8B,
a battery (car battery) 1220 functions as the particular item
storage 1154. However, no limitation is intended thereby. In the
system of the present embodiment, any device functioning as the
particular item generator 1152 or the particular item storage 1154
may be disposed in the system .alpha._1132. For example, a power
center or a reservoir (or such storage facilities) may be disposed
in a building or in an area to temporarily maintain the excess of
common goods in the building or the area.
[0285] In the explanation of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the battery (car
battery) 1220 is exemplified, and an internal space of a vehicle is
referred to as a section 1_1142-1. Specifically, various data in
the vehicle (for example, the amount of consumed gasoline, engine
torque, room temperature, and condition of each human being in the
vehicle) are detected by the sensor module 1222, and results are
sent to the system controller .alpha._1126 through the
communication module 1202-2. In the section 1_1142-1 (in the
internal space of the vehicle), an inflow monitor 1218 which
measures power charged in the battery (car battery) 1220 and an
outflow monitor 1216 which measures power discharged (sold) to the
outside from the battery (car battery) 1220, and values measured
thereby are sent to the system controller .alpha._1126 through the
communication module 1202-2. In the system of the present
embodiment, especially, an outflow controller 1212 which can
accurately control the power discharged (sold) to the outside from
the battery (car battery) 1220 and an inflow controller 1214 which
can accurately control the power charged in the battery (car
battery) 1220. Both are connected to the system controller
.alpha._1126 through the communication modules 1202-2 and 1202-3.
Thus, the system controller .alpha._1126 can send feedback of the
discharged (sold) power measured by the outflow monitor 1216 to the
outflow controller 1212 such that the power discharged (sold) to
the outside can be accurately controlled. Similarly, the system
controller .alpha._1126 can send feedback of the incoming (bought)
power measured by the inflow monitor 1218 to the inflow controller
1214 such that the power charged in the battery (car battery) 1220
can be accurately controlled.
[0286] As described in Section 1.7, the system controller
.alpha._1126 controls, manages, and operates the communication in
its corresponding system .alpha._1132 (network system). As shown in
FIG. 8A, the system controller .alpha._1126 includes a processor
1230. The processor 1230 collects data from the entire sensor
modules 1222, and 1260-1-5 in the domain 2_1122-2, and stores the
data in the memory 1232 as history data. Furthermore, the processor
1230 stores command data to the actuator module 1270-1 as history
data. Furthermore, the system controller .alpha._1126 includes a
user interface 1234 which receives direct input by a user and
displays the current status to the user. However, no limitation is
intended thereby, and the user interface 1234 may be disposed
outside the system controller .alpha._1126 and may be connected
thereto through the communication module 1202-3.
[0287] Especially, in the system of the present embodiment, the
entire data related to the sensor modules 1222 and 1260-1-5 and the
actuator module 1270-1 within the domain 2_1122-2 are not
automatically transferred to a server n_1116-n, but system
controller .alpha._1126 (or the processor 1230 therein,
specifically) independently chooses necessary data and send them to
the server n_1116-n. Thus, personal private data of a user can be
secured. Furthermore, what to be sent to the server n_1116-n may
not be the necessary data chosen by the system controller
.alpha._1126 but may be a part of data extracted and analyzed from
the necessary data by system controller .alpha._1126. Thus, the
server n_1116-n can collect only the essential data and the
collective management process performed by the service provider
B_1116-1 can be more efficient.
[0288] Furthermore, in the system of the present embodiment, the
system controller .alpha._1126 (or the processor 1230 therein,
specifically) can collect original data from the server n_1116-n
through the communication module 1202-3 and store the original data
in the memory 1232. The original data are data which cannot be
obtained from the domain 2_1122-2, such as traffic jam information,
local weather forecast, and current price of common goods. The data
stored in the memory 1232 are analyzed by the system controller
.alpha._1126 (or the processor 1230 therein, specifically) to
estimate/determine behaviors, conditions, or requests of end users.
Based on the estimation/determination, the system controller
.alpha._1126 (or the processor 1230 therein, specifically) controls
the system .alpha._1132 (or the domain 2_1122-1) and provides
suitable services to the end users. As a service providing method,
the actuator module 1270-1 in FIG. 8A may be remotely controlled.
The system controller .alpha._1126 (or the processor 1230 therein,
specifically) independently analyzes the data collected from the
sensor modules 1222 and 1260-1-5 and server n_1122-2 and command
history to the actuator module 1270-1 collectively, and thus,
original services including a user friendly service performed
within the domain 2_1122-2 which has been difficult before.
Furthermore, such an original service in the domain 2_1122-2 can be
securely provided to the users even if there is a communication
shutdown with the server n_1116-n caused by a system trouble, and
thus, the strength of the services provided to the end users can be
secured.
[0289] FIG. 9 shows a variation of the system of the present
embodiment of FIG. 8A. In the example of FIG. 9, a processor 1330
or a device controller 1240-1 or -2 is stored in the entire devices
within the domain 2_1122-2 except for the smart meter 1124 and
router (gateway) 1300, and direct data exchange can be performed
between the system of FIG. 9 and a server n_1116-n through the
router (gateway) 1300 including a battery.
[0290] Here, the processor 1330 stored in the section 1_1142-1 (a
vehicle) performs the control of the vehicle including not only
charging/discharging power in/from the battery (car battery) 1220
but also air conditioning in the vehicle and energy efficient
engine burning. The data related to these controls can be
transferred to the server n_1116-n through a router (gateway) 1300
(or directly). Furthermore, the entire communication modules
1202-1-7 are connected to the server n_1116-n through the router
(gateway) 1300. In the variation of FIG. 9, the router (gateway)
1300 does not perform any discrimination or determination and
automatically transfer the entirety of the data from the devices
1250-1 and 1250-4, and this is a major difference from the function
of the system controller .alpha._1126 of FIG. 8A.
[0291] In the variation of FIG. 9, the entire devices 1250-1 and
1250-4 in the domain 2_1122-2 include memories 1244 and 1246,
respectively. The signals and data detected by the sensor modules
1260-1-7 at each moment are chronologically stored in the memories
1244 and 1246. Furthermore, command data arbitrarily issued from
the device controllers 1240-1-2 to the actuator modules 1270-1-3
are stored in the memories 1244 and 1246. Using the data stored in
the memories 1244 and 1246, the device controllers 1240-1-2 can
provide original services to end users by each of the devices
1250-1 and 1250-4. When providing the original services, the
devices controllers 1240-1 and 1240-2 estimate/determine the
behavior, condition, or request of an end user and control the
actuator modules 1270-1-3 using the detection signals and history
of measured data sent from the sensor modules 1260-1-7 which change
at each moment stored in the memories 1244 and 1246 (this will be
detailed in Sections 4.2 to 4.4.
[0292] The variation of FIG. 9 performs the management and control
of the entirety of the network communication system .alpha._1132
from the outside of (a physical space area formed by) the network
communication system .alpha._1132 and the variation of FIG. 9 does
not involve a system controller .alpha._1126 which is disposed
inside (a physical space area formed by) the network communication
system .alpha._1132 to perform the management or control of the
network communication system .alpha._1132. From such a standpoint,
the management and operation of the data communication within an
in-system network line 1782 formed by the devices 1250-1 and 1250-4
in the system .alpha._1132 through the battery-equipped router
(gateway) 1300 may be performed by a system controller .beta._1128
which is physically remote from the system .alpha._1132 instead of
the server n_1116-n.
[0293] As a further variation, a mixture of the system of FIG. 2 or
FIG. 8A/B and the system of FIG. 9 may be used. In that case, to
relay the inside and the outside of the system .alpha._1132, such a
system may include both the system controller .alpha._1126 and the
battery-equipped router (gateway) 1300. Furthermore, the
management, operation, and control of the entirety of the network
communication system .alpha._1132 may be performed by the system
controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128 in cooperation, or may be
performed by the system controller .alpha._1126 alone in a normal
state. Data exchange between the system controllers .alpha._1126
and .beta._1128 is performed frequently such that the data
collected from the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and the data
necessary for the service providing are entirely shared between the
system controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128. In that case,
relative files stored in the memory 1232 of the system controller
.alpha._1126 are arbitrarily copied in the memory 1248 of the
system controller .beta._1128 through a mirroring process. Here,
the data collected from the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and the
data necessary for the service providing include, for example, an
address table shown in FIG. 23, an estimation/determination
comparison table shown in FIG. 27, and a chronological data tracing
table shown FIG. 28 will be described later. Since the data are
arbitrarily shared between the system controllers .alpha._1126 and
.beta._1128, even if the main controller of the
management/operation is switched therebetween (or is performed in
cooperation), processes in the system .alpha._1132 can be continued
without a mix-up. Or, the system controller .alpha._1126 and the
server n_1116-n may cooperate to perform the management, operation,
and control of the network communication system .alpha._1132. In
that case, as mentioned above, the data collection from the
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and the data necessary for the
service providing may be entirely shared between the system
controller .alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n (by mirroring or
the like). Since the management, operation, and control of the
network communication system .alpha._1132 are performed by a
plurality of devices in different positions, processes such as an
emergency response can be performed with flexibility, and the
security and reliability of the network communication system
.alpha._1132 can be improved. For example, even if the system
controller .alpha._1126 is accidentally shut down, or even if the
data stored in the memory 1232 are entirely destroyed by a head
crash or the like, the controller is automatically switched to the
system controller .beta._1128 or to the server n_1116-n as an
emergency response. Thus, the processes of the system .alpha._1132
are securely continued without causing any stress to a user. Not
only that, since a user can remotely operate the system controller
.beta._1128 to perform data collection from the network
communication system .alpha._1132 or the control of the network
communication system .alpha._1132, it is more user efficient.
Furthermore, in that case, combination modules including the
devices 1250-1 and 1250-4 with the device controller 1240 and the
memory 1242, device 1250-2 and 1250-3 without a device controller
1240 or a memory 1242, sensor combination module 1460, and actuator
combination module 1470 may be mixed in the system
.alpha._1132.
[0294] The mixture will be further explained. As shown in FIG. 5,
in many cases, a combination module 1295 (or unit 1290) disposed
inside the network system .alpha._1132 includes a battery charger
module (battery) 1554. Thus, even if a power failure occurs in the
system .alpha._1132, the combination module 1295 (or unit 1290)
basically continues its operation without being affected.
Furthermore, in the system of FIG. 9, the router (gateway) 1300
which performs relay of the data communication inside and outside
the system .alpha._1132 includes a battery, and thus, there is no
effect of the power failure in the network system .alpha._1132.
Thus, with a backup for the management/control of the network
system .alpha._1132, even if there is an accident such as a power
failure or a breakdown, the data communication within the system
.alpha._1132 can be continued without interruption caused by such
an accident.
[0295] As stated in Section 1.1 that a system controller
.alpha._1126 performs the management, control, operation, and data
collection of the data communication within the network system
.alpha._1132, the management, control, operation, and data
collection of the data communication within the network system
.alpha._1132 are normally performed by the system controller
.alpha._1126. However, if there is an accident such as a power
failure or a breakdown, the system controller .beta._1128
temporarily performs the management, control, operation, data
collection of the data communication within the network system
.alpha._1132 as a substitute. Here, in the ordinary operation, a
system controller .beta._1128 may be handled as a single unit 1290
in the network system .alpha._1132.
[0296] As explained in Section 1.1 with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2,
the system controller .alpha._1126 which performs the management,
control, operation, and data collection of the data communication
in the network system .alpha._1132 performs in-system data
communication with each unit 1290 in the network system
.alpha._1132 and performs out-system data communication with a
server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) outside the network system
.alpha._1132. If the system controller .beta._1128 temporarily
substitutes the above functions for the system controller
.alpha._1126 to respond to an accident such as a power failure or a
breakdown, the data communication between each unit 1290 and the
server n_1116-n should be performed in the same data communication
format used before the substitution. This is because the same data
communication format allows a smooth and seamless substitution
process.
[0297] As explained in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10A,
C-format can be used in the data communication of a communication
middleware layer APL02 between the system controller .alpha._1126
and the combination module 1295. On the other hand, A-format,
E-format, or W-format can be used in the data communication of a
communication middleware layer APL06 between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server). If
the system controller .beta._1128 substitutes the system controller
.alpha._1126, the same data communication format should be used.
That is, C-format is used in the data communication of the
communication middleware layer APL02 between the system controller
.beta._1128 and the combination module 1295, and A-format,
E-format, or W-format is used in the data communication between the
system controller .beta._1128 and the server n_1116-n (cloud or
cloud server).
[0298] When the contents of Section 2.1 explained with reference to
FIGS. 10A and 17A and the above system are combined, a client
system is achieved. A client system (system .alpha._1132) is an
electronic device system connectable to external cloud (server
n_1116-1 of FIG. 1) (through a system controller .alpha._1126 of
FIG. 10A, router (gateway) 1300, or system controller .beta._1128),
and including a first system controllers .alpha._1126 which
acquires and manages data from a unit 1290 (or combination module
1295) with a function to send the data independently acquired or
created, and a second system controller .beta._1128 which acquires
and manages the data from the unit 1290 (or combination module
1295), wherein the system controller .alpha._1126 divides a
plurality of units 1290 (or combination modules 1295) into sections
1142 (as in FIG. 1) and retains data related to sections to which
each unit attributes (address table of FIG. 23 or chronological
data tracing table of FIG. 28 explained in Section 4.3, and a first
data format (C-format of FIG. 17A) is used for the communication
between the second system controller .beta._1128 and the units 1290
(or combination modules 1295) and a second data format
(A/E/W-format of FIG. 17B) is used for the communication between
the second system controller .beta._1128 and the cloud (server
n_1116-n of FIG. 1).
[0299] As mentioned above, the system controller .beta._1128 may be
handled as a unit 1290 in the network system .alpha._1132 which
performs the management, control, operation, and data collection of
the system controller .alpha._1126 in a normal state. Furthermore,
in the system of the present embodiment, data communication between
different units 1290 in the same network system through the network
system .alpha._1132. As mentioned above, when the data
communication is performed between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and unit 1290, C-format is used for the data
communication of the communication middleware layer APL02. Thus,
when data communication is performed between the system controllers
.alpha._1126 and .beta._1128, C-format should be used in the data
communication of the communication middleware layer APL02 to
facilitate the management, control, operation, and data collection
related to the system controller .alpha._1126.
[0300] On the other hand, when data communication is performed
between the system controller .beta._1128 and the server n_1116-n
(cloud or cloud server), A-format, E-format, or W-format should be
used in the data communication of the communication middleware
layer APL06. Thereby, even if the system controllers .alpha._1126
becomes unusable by a power failure or a breakdown, the
substitution of the management, control, operation, and data
collection of the network system .alpha._1132 can be performed
smoothly and seamlessly.
[0301] In other words, the client system (system .alpha._1132) can
be connected to external cloud (server n_1116-1 of FIG. 1) (through
a system controller .alpha._1126 of FIG. 10A, router (gateway)
1300, or system controller .beta._1128), and the client system
(system .alpha._1132) includes a first system controllers
.alpha._1126 which acquires and manages data from a unit 1290 (or
combination module 1295) with a function to send the data
independently acquired or created, and a second system controller
.beta._1128 which acquires and manages the data from the unit 1290
(or combination module 1295), wherein the system controller
.alpha._1126 divides a plurality of units 1290 (or combination
modules 1295) into sections 1142 (as in FIG. 1) and retains data
related to sections to which each unit attributes (address table of
FIG. 23 or chronological data tracing table of FIG. 28 explained in
Section 4.3, and a first data format (C-format or the like) is used
for the communication between the second system controller
.beta._1128 and the units 1290 (or combination modules 1295) and a
second data format (A/E/W-format of FIG. 17B) is used for the
communication between the second system controller .beta._1128 and
the cloud (server n_1116-n of FIG. 1).
[0302] Here, the above description has been made relatively
focusing on the cooperation and substitution between the system
controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128. However, no limitation is
intended thereby. For example, the system of the embodiment shown
in FIG. 9 which does not include a system controller .alpha._1126
in the first place can be described as follows. The client system
(system .alpha._1132) is an electronic device system connectable to
external cloud (server n_1116-1 of FIG. 1) (through a system
controller .alpha._1126 of FIG. 10A, router (gateway) 1300, or
system controller .beta._1128), and including a unit 1290 (or
combination module 1295) with a function to send the data
independently acquired or created, a system controller .beta._1128
which acquires and manages the data from the unit 1290 (device 1250
of FIG. 9), and a gateway 1300 which performs the communication
between the unit 1290 (device 1250 of FIG. 9) and the system
controller .beta._1128, wherein the system controller .beta._1128
divides a plurality of units 1290 (devices 1250 of FIG. 9) into
sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 and retains data related to the
sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 to which each unit attributes
(address table of FIG. 23 or chronological data tracing table of
FIG. 28 explained in Section 4.3, and a first data format (C-format
or the like) is used for the communication between the second
system controller .beta._1128 and the units 1290 (devices 1250 of
FIG. 9) and a second data format (A/E/W-format of FIG. 17B) is used
for the communication between the second system controller
.beta._1128 and the cloud (server n_1116-n of FIG. 1).
[0303] Section 1.9 Example of Use of Combination Modules in Local
Network System
[0304] In the examples shown in FIGS. 8A and 9, the system
controller .alpha._1126 of FIG. 8A and the server n_1116-n of FIG.
9 basically communicates with devices 1250-1-4. Conventionally,
since basic functions of a device have been preliminarily
determined, contents of network communication data (communication
protocols in communication middleware layers APL or exchangeable
data 1810 which will be explained in Chapter 2) have been
preliminarily standardized to suit for such basic functions.
However, as time changes, devices have been evolved/developed
diversely on a daily basis, and the standardization to suit for
functions of such rapidly evolving devices has become difficult to
achieve. For example, a basic function of televisions is receiving
broadcast waves and displaying contents to a user. However,
Japanese high-end televisions include not only the above basic
function but also a data communication function using a network
line and a recording function. Furthermore, although this is not so
popular, naked-eye three dimensional televisions include a function
to detect positional data of a viewer. In future, a luminosity
sensor may possibly be included in televisions (to optimize the
brightness of the display screen). In consideration of such
diversity and expansion of devices, the communication data format
(exchangeable data 1810) and communication protocol of the devices
1250-1-4 may be made with versatility; however, in such a case,
devices 1250-1-4 including high-performance device controllers
1240-1-2 used for decoding the communication data would become
expensive. That is, the device 1250-2 or device 1250-3 in FIG. 8A
has difficulty in decoding such versatile complicated communication
data, and a device controller 1240 is required for decoding the
data and performing various processes in the device corresponding
to a result of decoding.
[0305] To deal with the above, the example of FIG. 8B allows sensor
combination modules 1460-1-5 and actuator combination modules
1470-1-2 which attribute combination modules 1295 and are disposed
inside devices 1450-1-4 or independently outside the devices.
[0306] Here, for the sake of simpler explanation, the devices
1450-1-4 of FIG. 8B include the sensor combination modules 1460-1-4
and actuator combination modules 1470-1-2 which attribute
combination modules 1295. However, no limitation is intended
thereby, and an example of FIG. 3 (c) or the like may be adopted.
That is, the combination module 1295 (sensor combination module
1460 or actuator combination module 1470) may be additionally
stored in devices 1250-1-4 as in FIGS. 8A and 9. In that case, the
devices 1250-1-4 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9 perform the data
communication related to a basic function of a device (for example,
a function of receiving broadcast waves and displaying contents to
a user). Combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 newly added
directly perform the data communication related to newly added
functions caused by technological development and diversity. The
system controller .alpha._1126 collectively performs the
management/grasp and control the whole functions of the highly
diverse/evolving devices 1250. Thereby, the expansion of newly
added functions in commercially-available devices (expansion of
incorporated sensors/drive types) can be easily performed.
Furthermore, since the functions of the combination modules 1295,
1460, and 1470 are very limited and simplified, communication data
exchanged between the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 and
external devices can be greatly reduced. With greatly reduced
communication data exchanged with external devices,
high-performance device controllers 1240-1-2 used for
decoding/controlling complex communication data are not required
and the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be produced
cost effectively and miniaturized.
[0307] In the example of FIG. 8B, the devices 1450-1 and 1450-2 are
disposed in section 2_1142-2 and the devices 1450-3-4 are disposed
in section m_11142-m. However, this does not mean that positions of
the devices 1450-1-4 are fixed, and an end user can freely choose
any of the devices 1450-1-4 and dispose it in a different
section.
[0308] Furthermore, in the system of the example of FIG. 8B, a
sensor module and a actuator module are independently integrated
with a communication module in the smart meter 1124 and section
1_1142-1 (corresponding to the entirety of a vehicle, for example).
As a result, the smart meter 1124 of FIG. 8B includes an outflow
monitoring combination module 1406 and an inflow monitoring
combination module 1408 which are independently connected to the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n. Similarly,
the section 1_1142-1 includes an outflow monitoring combination
module 1416, inflow monitoring combination module 1418, outflow
controller combination module 1412, and inflow controller
combination module 1414, and they are independently connected to
the system controller .alpha._1126 (the processor 1230 therein)
through the communication module 1202-3. Here, the outflow
monitoring combination module 1406, inflow monitoring combination
module 1408, outflow monitoring combination module 1416, and inflow
monitoring combination module 1418 correspond to the sensor
combination module 1460. Furthermore, the outflow controller
combination module 1412 and the inflow controller combination
module 1414 correspond to the actuator combination module 1470. In
that case, the entire detection signals and measured data obtained
in the sensor combination modules 1460-1-5, outflow monitoring
combination modules 1406 and 1416, and inflow monitoring
combination modules 1408 and 1418 in the system .alpha._1132 are
gathered and collected (and stored in the memory 1232) by the
system controller .alpha._1126. Furthermore, the system controller
a 1126 collectively controls (and commands) the actuator
combination modules 1470-1-2, outflow controller combination module
1412, and inflow controller combination module 1414 in the system
.alpha._1132. As a result, the system controller .alpha._1126
singly manages and controls the devices 1450-1-5 in the system
.alpha._1132 efficiently and provides services of high quality to
end users.
[0309] Furthermore, if the example of the system of FIG. 8B is
adopted, the devices 1450-1-5 can be produced highly cost
effectively. That is, by mass-producing versatile and standardized
combination modules 1460 and 1470, the production cost thereof can
be greatly reduced. Since there is no need of a novel interface
connecting the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470, they can
be incorporated into the devices 1450-1-5 easily and cheaply by a
simple physical arrangement. If the actuator combination modules
1470-1-2 can be supplied cost effectively, the number of actuator
combination modules 1470-1-2 incorporated in the devices 1450-1-5
can be increased that that of the example of FIG. 8B. Furthermore,
the incorporation of the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470
into the devices 1450-1-5 is not necessarily performed with screws,
and it may be performed with a double-sided tape or an adhesive
tape by end users. That is, in the example of FIG. 8B, the devices
1450-1 and 1450-3 include the sensor combination modules 1460-4 and
1460-5, respectively, and the device 1450-2 includes the sensor
combination modules 1460-2-3. However, the above method allows an
end user to reattach any particular one of the sensor combination
modules 1460-2-5 to a different device 1450.
[0310] In the system of the example of FIG. 8, the sensor
combination module 1460-5 is not disposed in any of the devices
1450 but is disposed alone at an arbitrary location within a
particular section 1142 (or domain 1122). Such a disposition of a
combination module 1460-5 (or combination module 1295, 1460, or
1470) alone may be performed by fixing it on a wall, roof, or floor
by a user with a fixation member such as a tape, adhesive agent, or
thumbtack, or by mixing it in a paint and applying the mixture on a
wall, roof, or floor by a user. Furthermore, although this is not
shown, an actuator combination module 1470 (as a remote controller
which controls, for example, an air conditioner, television, or
illumination) may be disposed alone at an arbitrary location within
a particular section 1142 (or domain 1122).
[0311] As another example of the system of the present embodiment,
the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 may be arranged to be
mobile with a user to measure position changes of the combination
modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 in order to collect a behavioral
history the user. Furthermore, although this is not shown, the
actuator combination module 1470 may be arranged to be mobile with
a user to control a condition change (for example, air condition or
brightness by controlling an air conditioner, television, or
illumination) from a location of the user within a particular
section 1142 (or domain 1122). Such modules 1295, 1460, 1470, or
the like can be mobile with a user by temporarily fixing or
adhering the module to user's belongings such as glasses, tiepin,
shoes, or wallet with a tape or an adhesive agent, or by firmly
fixing the module thereto with a screw or the like, or by
incorporating the module in such belongings.
[0312] Chapter 2 Outline of Hierarchy of Communication Data and
Data Structure
[0313] Throughout Chapter 1, the whole structure of the system of
the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 1
to 9. In Chapter 2, significances and details of the structure
(contents of communication protocol) of the communication data
exchanged within the system of the present embodiment described in
Chapter 1 will be explained.
[0314] Section 2.1 Hierarchy of Network Communication Related
Function of Present Embodiment
[0315] In the network communication of the present embodiment,
there is a hierarchy levels of which correspond to different
functions, as shown in FIGS. 10A, 10B, and 16 to 17B. In this
hierarchy, physical communication media required for the network
communication are defined by the lowest physical layers PHY02 and
PHY06 corresponding to physical functions shown in FIGS. 10A, 10B,
and 16 to 17B. If a physical communication medium is Ethernet
connected by a cable or a wire, a cable and a connector of shape
and characteristics defined by the standard of the physical layer
PHY06 are used. On the other hand, a communication medium is a
wireless scheme, a frequency, channel, modulation scheme, basic
communication frame structure defined by the standard of the
physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 are used.
[0316] Media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 correspond to access
functions to communication media and they are positioned above the
physical layers PHY02 and PHY06. The media access layers MAC02 and
MAC06 define data required for proper data transference to a node
connected to the network (device 1250 of FIG. 8A or combination
modules 1460 and 1470 of FIG. 8B). Furthermore, at the highest
layer, an expansion application layer EXL06 and communication
middleware layers APL02 and APL06 define various services using the
network communication (various service providing functions using
the communication).
[0317] The hierarchy including levels corresponding to the
functions allows a suitable selection/combination of format for
each level determined based on the characteristics and performances
of the communication sender/receiver. As a result, the whole system
(combination modules 1460 and 1470 of FIG. 8B) can be achieved at a
low cost, and the communication data (exchanged with the devices
1250 of FIG. 8A) can be achieved with high performance. This
advantage will be explained in the following. First, in the
physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02, Z-format
(which will be described in Section 2.3 can be used since it is
applicable to close range wireless communication which is suitable
for the power efficiency required for the combination modules 1460
and 1470. Furthermore, C-format (which will be described in Section
2.5 can be used for the communication middleware layer APL02 since
it has simplified communication data which are suitable for the low
cost required for the combination modules 1460 and 1470. On the
other hand, A-format (which will be described in Section 2.7,
E-format (which will be described in Section 2.6, or W-format can
be used for the communication middleware layer APL06 since they can
handle various data items at the same time in the communication and
is thus suitable for the high performance communication required to
communicate with a server n_1116-n and a device 1250-1, and
therein, the communication data of the expansion application layer
EXL06 may be used.
[0318] As an intermediate layer of the above hierarchy (layer above
the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 and below the communication
middleware layers APL02 and APL06), an internet protocol version 6
layer IPv6 which corresponds to an internet protocol function is
provided, and the data defined thereby can be shared. Sharing of
the data means that communication data (which will be described in
Section 2.4 defined by the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6
can be shared by the entire nodes connected to the network within
the system of the examples of FIGS. 1 to 8B (communication targets
corresponding to senders and receives in the network communication
and are specifically, the devices 1250, server n_1116-n, wholesale
firm A_1102 of FIG. 8A or the complex modules 1460 and 1470 of FIG.
8B) during the communication. The above situation will be
interpreted as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, the
communication data used in (sent by) an out-system network line
1788 and an in-system network line 1782 (which will be described
later) may include data defined in common by a standard
corresponding to the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6. Here,
the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 defines the
communication protocol on the Internet and performs address
management and communication route management on the Internet.
Thus, the standard defined by the internet protocol version 6 layer
IPv6 can set an original Internet protocol (IP) address to every
node (communication target) regardless of different types of nodes
such as the wholesale firm A_1102, server n_1116-n, system
controller the systems .alpha._1126, device 1250-1, and combination
modules 1460 and 1470. During communication between different
systems within the domain 2_1122-2 (during communication between
the systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 in FIG. 1), the management
of the communication sender/receiver can be greatly simplified by
using the IP addresses (which will be described in Section 2.8. As
a result, the following can be achieved, for example. Even if a
user goes on a business trip to a foreign country (system
.beta._1134 of FIG. 1, data collection by the sensor combination
module 1460 in the home (systems .alpha._1132 of FIG. 1) or
operation of the actuator combination module 1470 can be controlled
by a mobile device (system controller .beta._1134) such as a
smartphone or a tablet by the user, and this is a great improvement
of convenience of the user. Furthermore, at that time, the trip
destination (system .beta._1134) and the home (system .alpha._1132)
are protected by the domain 2_1122-2 which does not allow an
intruder, and this is a firm security of the system.
[0319] Now, based on the system model shown in FIG. 8B, the
hierarchy (architecture) levels of which correspond to the
functions related to the network communication will be explained
with reference to FIG. 10A. Since the examples of FIGS. 10A and 10B
are prepared based on the system model of FIG. 8B, the combination
modules 1460 and 1470 are disposed in the system as network nodes
at the right end. Instead of the combination modules 1460 and 1470,
communication modules 1202-5-6 (and sensor modules 1260-3-5) within
devices 1250-2-3 which do not involve a device controller 1240-1
shown in FIG. 8A may be used as network nodes at the right end of
the in-system network line 1782.
[0320] In the left of FIG. 10A, the hierarchy (architecture) levels
of which correspond to the functions related to the communication
between the server n_1116-n and the system controller .alpha._1126
is shown. Furthermore, in the right of FIG. 10A, the hierarchy
(architecture) levels of which correspond to the functions related
to the communication between the system controller .alpha._1126 and
each of the combination modules 1460 and 1470 is shown.
[0321] Here, in the system of FIG. 1, the server n_1116-n can be
disposed physically outside the area of the system .alpha._1132 in
which the system controller .alpha._1126 is disposed. Thus, as
shown in the left of FIG. 10A, the communication between the server
n_1116-n and the system controller .alpha._1126 uses the out-system
network line 1788. The out-system network line 1788 may be a cabled
or wired or wireless Internet line. However, no limitation is
intended thereby, and a network line used in a relatively tight
area such as LAN can be used, for example.
[0322] As a physical communication medium, a fiber-optic cable may
be used, for example. The physical communication medium is not
limited thereto, and it may be any signal transference means such
as an electric cord, telephone line, or power line. Furthermore,
the signals transferred may be either analogue or digital. The
communication standard in the physical layer PHY06 may differ
depending not only on physical or signal characteristics of the
communication medium but also on communication service provider or
country in charge of the communication. Therefore, in the system of
the present embodiment, communication standards passing through a
physical line in the physical layer PHY06 will be referred to as
L-format. On the other hand, if wireless communication is used as
the out-system network line 1788 in the physical layer PHY06,
communication standards of long range wireless communication scheme
such as 2G or 3G or WiMAX may be used. Or, communication standards
of middle range wireless communication scheme may be used in the
system of the present embodiment. Wireless communication standards
including such long range wireless communication schemes and middle
rang wireless communication schemes are here referred to as
G-format.
[0323] Comparing to the above, the combination modules 1460 and
1470 of FIG. 8B are disposed in common in the system .alpha._1132
which is managed by the system controller .alpha._1126. A range of
physical formation of the system .alpha._1132 is limited to a
relatively small area. Thus, the data communication between the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the combination modules 1460 and
1470 is performed using the in-system network line 1782 of FIG.
10A. Here, to distinguish from G-format and L-format used in the
out-system network line 1788, the communication standards of the
data communicated in the in-system network line 1782 used in the
physical layer PHY02 will be referred to as Z-format. In the system
of the present embodiment, the in-system network line 1782 may be
achieved as either wireless or wired (or wireless/wired
switchable).
[0324] On the other hand, the standard used in the media access
layer MAC02/06 is, in many cases, discussed and proposed by a
standard developing committee together with the physical layer
PHY02/06. Thus, to conform to that of the physical layer PHY06,
L-format or G-format can be used in the media access layer MAC06
which is transferred on the out-system network line 1788 between
the server n_1116-n and the system controller .alpha._1126.
Similarly, Z-format can be used in the media access layer MAC02
which is transferred on the in-system network line 1782 between the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the combination modules 1460 and
1470. However, no limitation is intended thereby. For example,
Z-format may be used in the physical layer PHY02 and L-format or
G-format may be used in the media access layer MAC02. Or, L-format
or G-format may be used in the physical layer PHY06 and Z-format
may be used in the media access layer MAC06.
[0325] Note that data processing (mainly communication control
processing) related to each function of the physical layer PHY06 to
the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 are performed by the
server n_1116-n and the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 in
the system controller .alpha._1126. Note that the communication
module 1660 in the combination module 1460 or 1470 explained with
reference to FIGS. 5 and 6 as to its internal structure may be
divided by its functions into a communication controller 1700 and
an interface 1710. The communication controller 1700 performs data
processing (mainly communication control processing) related to
each function of the physical layer PHY06 to the Internet protocol
version 6 layer IPv6.
[0326] The data related to each function of the physical layer
PHY06 to the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 are mainly
related to the communication control and are not so firmly related
to, for example, the function, operation, or performance of the
devices 1450. With respect to this point, the communication
middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and expansion application layer
EXL06 of FIG. 10A are related to various service providing
functions using the network communication. The communication data
processing related to the functions of the communication middleware
layer APL06 and expansion application layer EXL06 (mainly
processing related to service providing to users) are performed by
processors 1738 and 1230 in the server n_1116-n and the system
controller .alpha._1126. On the other hand, the data related to the
functions of the communication middleware layer APL02 communicated
through the in-system network line 1782 are processed in the
interface 1710 in the communication module 1660 in the combination
modules 1460 and 1470. That is, in the system of the present
embodiment, the entire communication data communicated through the
in-system network line 1782 can be processed in the communication
module 1660 without providing an expensive processor with the
combination modules 1460 and 1470. Since there is no need of
disposing any expensive processor therein, the combination modules
1460 and 1470 can be presented cost effectively.
[0327] In the system of the present embodiment, amongst the data
communicated through the out-system network line 1788, original
data which are exclusively usable on particular application
software installed in both the server n_1116-n and the system
controller .alpha._1126 can be stored in the expansion application
layer EXL06 to be used in the communication. Thereby, such
particular application software can be distinguished from other
application software installed in both the server n_1116-n and the
system controller .alpha._1126. This will cause eager development
of application software in software companies based on the market
competition principle, and the software-related technique thus will
be advanced. Furthermore, this will be convenient for users.
Furthermore, since the original data stored in the expansion
application layer EXL06 are used, the quality of the services
provided with users by the application software can be improved.
Note that the performance of the devices 1250-1-2 shown in FIGS. 8A
and 9 and their additional extended functions are
improved/developed in future, the standards of A-format, E-format,
and W-format used in the communication middleware layer APL06 must
be updated to correspond to such improvement/development. However,
a very complicated procedure is required to update such standards
of the above formats and performing the update of standards to keep
up with such improvement of performance and extension of additional
functions of the devices 1250-1-2 is very difficult. With respect
to this point, application software venders can easily respond to
the improvement of performance and extension of additional
functions of the devices 1250-1-2 by using the expansion
application layer EXL06 without waiting for the update of
standards. Since particular software vender can freely set data
stored in the expansion application layer EXL06 to be used for the
communication, the description format of the communication data is
not necessarily defined preliminarily as a world standard.
[0328] On the other hand, communication data related to the service
providing function of the communication middleware layer
APL02/APL06 may be based on defined formats such as A-format,
E-format, W-format, and C-format. If the communication data related
to the service providing function of the communication middleware
layer APL02/APL06 conform particular standard format, compatibility
between the server 1116 and the system controllers 1126/1128 and
between the combination modules 1460 and 1470 can be easily
achieved.
[0329] As shown in FIG. 25, both the server n_1116-n and the system
controller .alpha._1126 include a mass storage memory 1232 (and
database 1118-n) and high-speed and powerful processors 1738/1230.
Thus, various and large quantity of communication data
corresponding to various services can be set in the communication
middleware layer APL06 exchanged between the server n_1116-n and
the system controller .alpha._1126. As compared thereto, the
combination modules 1460 and 1470 have difficulty in including such
a processor for multiple service providing. Therefore, in the
system of the present embodiment, a format (C-format or the like)
may be used in the communication middleware layer APL02, which is
different from a format (A-format, E-format, or W-format) used in
the communication middleware layer APL06 in the data communication
with the combination modules 1460 and 1470. Especially, by
relatively simplifying C-format (described in Section 2.5) used in
the communication middleware layer APL02, the load of the
processing and costs thereof in the combination modules 1460 and
1470 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the processing can be
performed relatively speedy and shortly, the power used by the
battery charger module (battery) 1554 can be reduced. However, no
limitation is intended thereby, and A-format, E-format, or W-format
may be used in the data communication with the combination modules
1460 an 1470.
[0330] Here, switching (conversion) of data used in the
communication middleware layer APL02 contained in the communication
data using the in-system network line 1782 and data used in the
communication middleware layer APL06 contained in the communication
data using the out-system network line 1788 is performed in the
system controller .alpha._1126. Note that, in the communication
middleware layers APL02 and APL06 of the system of the present
embodiment, the communication data used in the in-system network
line 1782 and the communication data used in the out-system network
line 1788 do not necessarily make a perfect match and may partly
differ. The method of this process will be explained here. As
already explained in Sections 1.1 and 1.7 and shown in FIG. 8B, the
management and operation of the network communication in the
network system .alpha._1132 are performed by the system controller
.alpha._1126. Then, the data detected successively and in real time
by the entire sensor combination modules 1460 through the in-system
network line 1782 and the data of the entire conditions controlled
(set) by the actuator combination modules 1470 are arbitrarily
stored in the memory 1232 in the system controller .alpha._1126 as
management data 1744. The management data 1744 may be stored as a
management table in a table format. Furthermore, the structures of
FIGS. 8A and 8B are mixed, the data of the entire devices 1250
(detected data and current status data, for example) are stored as
a part of the management data 1744 in the system controller
.alpha._1126. Then, the system controller .alpha._1126 excerpts
only particular data with user privacy data secured from the
management data 1744 and sends the data to the server n_1116-n
through the out-system network line 1788. The data sent to the
server n_1116-n are stored in the database 1118-n as the management
data 1748 (which may be converted in a table format) which is
managed by the server n_1116. Since the system controller
.alpha._1126 performs the conversion (switching) of the
communication data used in the communication middleware layers
APL02 and APL06 as above, the data of users can be secured, and
since minimum required data can be selected in advance and
received, the process of the server n_1116-n can be simplified as
well.
[0331] The client system as a combination of the above-explained
contents and the outline of the system of the present embodiment as
explained in Section 1.1 will produce the following feature. A
client system (system .alpha._1132) is an electronic device system
connectable to external cloud (server n_1116-1 of FIG. 1), and
including a system controller .alpha._1126 which manages data and
units (units 1_1290-1-7_1290-7 in FIG. 2) configured to acquire or
prepare data to be provided with the system controller
.alpha._1126, wherein the system controller .alpha._1126 divides
the units into sections 1142 (sections 1_1142-1-m_1142-m in FIG. 1)
as management targets and retains data related to sections to which
each unit attributes, and communication between the system
controller and the units (including combination modules 1295, 1460,
and 1470) is performed using a first data format (C-format or
Z-format of FIG. 10A) and communication between the system
controller .alpha._1126 and the cloud (server n_1116-n) is
performed using a second data format (A/E/W-format or L/G format).
Note that the first data format and the second data format are
different data formats.
[0332] Then, as described in Section 2.2, the first data format
includes a header (corresponding to a physical layer header PHYHD
in FIG. 11), first data (data from a MAC layer header MACHD to a
TCP header TCPHD in FIG. 11), and second data (communication
middleware data APLDT).
[0333] Furthermore, when communication processing of the
communication data with the above characteristics is performed
through the system controller .alpha._1126, it proceeds as follows.
That is, the system controller .alpha._1126 converts the
communication data obtained from the units (combination modules
1295, 1460, and 1470 included therein) into the second data format
(A/E/W-format or L/G format in FIG. 10A) and sends the converted
data to the cloud (server n_1116-n), and the system controller
.alpha._1126 converts data from the cloud (server n_1116-n) into
the first data format (C-format or Z-format) and sends the data in
the first data format to the units (combination modules 1295, 1460,
and 1470).
[0334] The units include a function to transfer data to the system
controller (this function is performed by the communication module
1660 in FIG. 4A), a function to detect external environment data
(including, for example, a temperature and a luminosity) as the
data (this function is performed by the sensor module 1260 in FIG.
4B), and a state changing function to change the state of the unit
which is a basis of the transferred data (this function is
performed by the actuator module 1670 in FIG. 4C). Thus, the units
acquire or prepare the data in the first data format as a part of
the above data transfer function.
[0335] Note that, for the sake of simpler explanation, the
communication module 1660, sensor module 1260, and actuator module
1670 are depicted separately in the examples of FIGS. 4A to 4C.
However, no limitation is intended thereby, and they may be shared
or partly functionally overlapped. In that case, the detection
function, the state changing function, and the data transfer
function are merged in the units.
[0336] Furthermore, if the structure of FIG. 7A is adopted in the
communication module 1660, the functions of the communication
module 1660 may be achieved by a combination of functional circuits
without using the processor 1960 which has been explained with
reference to FIG. 7A. In that case, a central processing unit (CPU)
which processes the data is omitted in the units.
[0337] Now, characteristics of communication data used
(transmitted) between the in-system network line 1782 and the
out-system network line 1788 in the communication middleware layers
APL02 and APL06 will be compared with reference to FIG. 10B.
Communication data in accordance with A-format or E-format may be
used in the communication between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n through the out-system network
line 1788. Note that, in the system of the present embodiment,
A-format includes any formats described in text formats in a broad
sense as the communication data related to the communication
middleware layer APL. On the other hand, as described in Section
2.6, E-format includes any formats which store a configuration code
in a particular area which is preliminarily defined in an area of
the communication middleware data APLDT (cf. Section 2.2).
Especially, A-format and E-format have a characteristic of
communicating (sending) data including plurality of items at once.
Note that, the out-system network line 1788 may become busy if it
is used by other users. Thus, if a scheme in which data
transference is repeated very frequently between the system
controller .alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n, the communication
therebetween will be slowed when the network line is extremely
busy. In contrast, if the format which can communicate data
including plurality of items at once is used as in the present
embodiment, the frequency of the data transference between the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n can be
reduced and such a risk of slow communication can be reduced.
However, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to the
above formats, and the communication between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n may be performed with
communication data in accordance with C-format or W-format.
[0338] In A-format and E-format, a plurality of template tables
preliminarily determined to correspond to types of exchangeable
data 1810 exchanged between the system controller .alpha._1126 and
the server n_1116-n. Data indicative of what type of table
preliminarily determined as a template should be adopted are
included in the exchangeable data 1810 as exchangeable data type
identification data 1840. The exchangeable data (table) 1810 are
shared between the system controller .alpha._1126 and the server
n_1116-n, and thus, data processing therebetween can be efficient.
That is, application software including a process routine of the
exchangeable data (table) 1810 is installed in both the system
controller .alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n, and thus, advanced
service can be provided with users.
[0339] On the other hand, data indicative of a use purpose of the
exchangeable data (table) 1810 to be notified to a receiver are
included in the exchangeable data (table) 1810 as the network
access control data 1830. For example, the network access control
data 1830 in E-format include codes corresponding to a write
request, read request, notification request, write and read
request, write response, notification, read response, notification
response, write and read response, and the like, which are directed
to the receiver. Furthermore, the network access control data 1830
in A-format include WRITEONLY (state configuration instruction to a
receiver or notification of a sender state to a receiver), READONLY
(a request of a reply to a current state of a receiver), READWRITE,
and the like which are describable in the exchangeable data (table)
1810 in an extensible markup language (XML) format.
[0340] Although this is not depicted in FIG. 10B, as another data
communication scheme through the out-system network line 1788,
World Wide Web may be used. This scheme corresponds to W-format in
FIG. 10A, and either the system controller .alpha._1126 or the
server n_1116-n functions as a Web server. In that case, a sender
(either the system controller .alpha._1126 or the server n_1116-n)
of the communication data designates a receiver (whichever is not
the sender between the system controller .alpha._1126 and the
server n_1116-n) based on a uniform resource location (URL), and
automatically writes the communication data in a write column which
is designated by a form format in a web site. After the data
communication completes, the receiver stores reception data (or a
result of the process) in the management data 1744 or 1748 in
accordance with a program preliminarily determined by PHP (a
recursive abbreviation of hypertext preprocessor) or Java applet.
Here, by providing a plurality of write columns designated by the
form format in one web site, data of different contents can be
transferred (sent) at once, and the above advantages can be
achieved in W-format. In the system of the present application,
W-format includes any formats in which a sender writes data in a
write column preliminarily designated by a receiver to perform data
communication. W-format is not limited thereto, and any formats in
which a tag unique to HTML or HTML5 is described may be classified
as W-format.
[0341] As described above, the data communication between the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n through the
out-system network line 1788 is manipulated to reduce the number of
data exchanges therebetween. On the other hand, the data
communication through the in-system network line 1782 is managed
and operated by the system controller .alpha._1126, and there is
not such a risk that the communication is slowed by busy network
line. The communication data in the communication middleware layer
APL02 with respect to the combination modules 1460 and 1470 are
simplified to meet the cost-effective and miniaturization demands
of the combination modules 1460 and 1470. Specifically, data
communication in accordance with one of cases 1 to 3 shown in FIG.
10B can be performed. In case 1, the system controller .alpha._1126
sends an instruction (command issuance) 1852 for a configuration
status change (status control) of an actuator combination module
and receives a response indicating a result of execution of the
instruction 1852 from the actuator combination module. In case 2,
the system controller .alpha._1126 issues a response request
(request) 1872 to collect sensing data (detection data) of the
sensor combination module 1460 and receives the sensing data
(detection data) as a reply (response) 1874 from the sensor
combination module 1460. Furthermore, as in case 3, if such sensing
data (detection data) are notified to the system controller
.alpha._1126 by the sensor combination module 1460 at optional
times (or periodical times preliminarily determined),
periodic/nonperiodic notification 1894 is performed.
[0342] Note that, in the system of the present embodiment, other
data communication schemes can be used. For example, if the device
controller 1240-1 and the device 1250-1 with memory 1242 therein
are disposed in the system .alpha._1132 as shown in FIG. 8A, the
communication middleware layer APL06 and the expansion application
layer EXL06 in accordance with A-format, E-format, or W-format as
shown in FIG. 16 may be used for the data communication between the
device 1250-1 and the system controller .alpha._1126 on the
in-system network line 1782. In that case, for example, application
software which can use the expansion application layer EXL06 may be
installed in the server n_1116-n in advance. Then, after approval
of a user is acquired through the user interface 1234 (shown in
FIG. 8A), the system controller .alpha._1126 may automatically
perform the install process of the application software in the
system controller .alpha._1126 itself and its corresponding device
1250. In the case, the system controller .alpha._1126 accesses the
server n_1116-n and transfers the application software
preliminarily stored in the database 1118-n. Thereby, the
out-system network line 1788 and the in-system network line 1782
are connected through the system controller .alpha._1126 and the
automatic install of application software in the corresponding
device 1250 can be performed. Thus, an environment in which the
expansion application layer EXL06 can be automatically structured
without causing a work load to users, and the updated device 1250
with new extended function can be easily compatible and flexible in
the network system. Note that, in the system of the present
embodiment, communication data in accordance with C-format may be
used in, for example, the data communication of the communication
middleware layer APL06 between the system controller .alpha._1126
and device 1250 in FIG. 16.
[0343] Note that, if the device 1250-1 and the server n_1116-n are
directly connected to each other through the router (gateway) 1300
an in FIG. 9, the router (gateway) 1300 is disposed between the
device 1250 and the server n_1116-n instead of the system
controller .alpha._1126 in FIG. 16. In that case, the same
communication data are used for the expansion application layer
EXL06 and the communication middleware layer APL06 in both the
out-system network line 1788 and the in-system network line 1782.
Furthermore, in that case, since an original IP address is set in
each of the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n, the data
communication can be performed directly between the device 1250 and
the server n_1116-n using sender IP address data SIPADRS and
receiver IP address data DIPADRS configured in the internet
protocol version 6 layer (which will be described in Section 2.4
with reference to FIG. 13). In that case, the communication data in
accordance with E-format or A-format are used in the data
communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 between
the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n. However, in the system of
the present embodiment, C-format or W-format may be used instead.
Since the same communication data are used in the out-system
network line 1788 and the in-system network line 1782, a work load
of a relaying process of the router (gateway) 1300 can be greatly
reduced. Note that different formats may be used between the
physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 and between the media access layers
MAC02 and MAC06 (in the example of FIG. 16, Z-format is used in the
in-system network line 1782 and L-format or G-format is used in the
out-system network line 1788). In that case, the format conversion
is performed in the router (gateway) 1300.
[0344] On the other hand, if data communication is performed
between the system controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128 which
are disposed in the same domain 2_1122-2 but in different systems
.alpha._1132 and .beta._1134, a communication scheme similar to
that adopted between the system controller .alpha._1126 and the
server n_1116-n in the left of FIG. 10A may be used. In that case,
the communication data on the out-system network line 1788 may be
used in the entire layers from the physical layer PHY06 to the
expansion application layer EXL06. In that case, as mentioned
above, the automatic install of application software may be
performed with respect to the system controller .beta._1134. Thus,
the communication data in accordance with E-format or A-format are
mainly used in the data communication in the communication
middleware layer APL06. However, no limitation is intended thereby,
and in the system of the present embodiment, C-format or W-format
may be used. In that case, a format used in the physical layer
PHY06 and the media access layer MAC02 may be:
[0345] L-format or G-format if a distance between the systems
.alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 is far; and
[0346] Z-format is used if a distance between the systems
.alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 is close.
[0347] Here, characteristically, the data communication can be
performed throughout the world with L-format or G-format while the
communication requires relatively longer time, and the data
communication area is restricted with Z-format while the
communication requires relatively shorter time. Therefore, by
switching formats to correspond to a distance between the systems,
advantage of each format can be arbitrarily obtained.
[0348] Furthermore, as a variation of the system of the present
embodiment, the structures of FIGS. 1 and 8B may be merged. In that
case, the system controller .beta._1128 in the system .beta._1134
(FIG. 1) may directly access the combination modules 1460 and 1470
in the system .alpha._1132. In that case, a communication scheme
used will include the system controller .beta._1128 of FIG. 1 is
disposed instead of the server n_1116-n of FIG. 10A, and an
in-domain network line is disposed instead of the out-system
network line of FIG. 10A. In that case, L-format, G-format,
A-format, E-format, or W-format may be used for the communication
data in the in-domain network line 2082. Furthermore, in the system
of the present embodiment, Z-format or C-format may be used.
Furthermore, similarly to the above, Z-format and L/G-format may
automatically be switched based on a distance between the
combination module (in system .alpha._1132) and the system
controller .beta._1128. Note that the scheme using the internet
protocol version 6 layer IPv6 will be detailed in Section 2.8.
[0349] Section 2.2 Relationship Between Hierarchy of Communication
Related Functions and Communication Data on Network Line
[0350] FIG. 11 shows a relationship between the functional
hierarchy of FIGS. 10A and 16 to 17B and specific communication
data contents transferred on actual network lines. Even if network
communication media are wired or wireless, communication data are
transmitted intermittently in each packet on such physical
communication media. The packet corresponds to a physical layer
frame PPDU of FIG. 11 (f). If a single channel (single
correspondent) is used, the packet occupies the network
communication media (physical layer frame PPDU) and other
communication data cannot be transferred thereon. If the packet
(physical layer frame PPDU) has a large size, the occupation period
of the network communication media becomes long, and other
communication will be blocked. To solve this problem, in the system
of the present embodiment, a data size of one physical layer frame
PPDU is set to be 127 bytes or less. Thus, a risk that data
communication other than the physical layer frame PPDU
communication is blocked in the network system can be reduced. One
physical layer frame PPDU includes, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), a
physical header PHYHD, MAC layer header MACHD, IPv6 header IPv6HD,
TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, expansion
data EXDT, and cyclic redundancy code CRC in the order of data
transference from a sender to a receiver (sequential order or order
of data sending). From the standpoint of FIG. 11 (f), the above may
be interpreted that the first in the physical layer frame PPDU is a
physical layer header PHYHD, and the next is physical layer data or
physical layer payload PSDU in which a MAC layer header MACHD, IPv6
header IPv6HD, TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data
APLDT, expansion data EXDT, and cyclic redundancy code CRC are
stored.
[0351] Note that, in the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 of FIGS.
10A and 16 to 17B, the physical layer frame PPDU is processed
entirely. The physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 are an abstract
concept of the functions corresponding to physical communication
media. The actual process of each function of the physical layers
PHY02 and PHY06 to the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is
executed in the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and the
communication controller 1700 (FIG. 10A). Here, in this section, to
simplify the explanation of a relationship between the functions of
each level and communication data transferred on the network lines,
a data handling order in each level will be explained in detail.
However, no limitation is intended thereby and the communication
data may be prepared while partially omitting the data handling of
each level. For example, in the communication modules 1768 and
1202-3 and communication controller 1700 (FIG. 10A) during data
sending, data (data structure) shown in FIG. 11 (a) may be directly
prepared from the communication middleware data APLDT and expansion
data EXDT (or the communication middleware data APLDT alone) from
the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (more
specifically, from the processor 1230, 1738 or the interface in the
communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A), and the data may be sent
through the network lines 1782 and 1788. Furthermore, in the
communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and communication controller
1700 (FIG. 10A) during data reception, a necessary physical layer
frame PPDU alone is selectively extracted from the network lines
1782 and 1788 and the communication middleware data APLDT and
expansion data EXDT (or communication middleware data APLDT alone)
are extracted, and they are handed to the communication middleware
layers APL02 and APL06 (more specifically, to the processor 1230,
1738 or the interface in the communication module 1660 in FIG.
10A).
[0352] As a specific reception function performed by the physical
layers PHY02 and PHY06, the contents of the physical header PHYHD
in the first position of the received physical layer frame PPDU are
identified and the physical layer data or physical layer payload
PSDU in the subsequent position is entirely handed to the media
access layers MAC02 and MAC06. Thus, from the standpoint of the
media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, the entire physical layer data
or physical layer payload PSDU corresponds to a MAC layer frame
MPDU. On the other hand, as a specific sending function performed
by the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06, the MAC layer frame MPDU
received from the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 is stored in
the physical layer data or physical layer payload PSDU and the
physical layer frame PPDU in which the physical header PHYPD is
added to its first position is transferred through the network
lines 1782 and 1788.
[0353] Note that, as shown in FIG. 11 (e), the MAC layer frame MPDU
includes a MAC layer header MACHO, MAC layer data/payload MSDU, and
cyclic redundancy code CRC in this order. In the media access
layers MAC02 and MAC06 during the reception, access response
control on the communication media is performed using the
communication data stored in the MAC layer header MACHD in the MAC
layer frame MPDU handed by the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06.
Specifically, only the MAC layer data/payload MSDU related to the
corresponding device 1250, combination modules 1460 and 1470, or
the system controller .alpha._1126 is extracted and handed to the
internet protocol version 6 layer _IPv6. On the other hand, during
the sending, data handed from the internet protocol version 6 layer
_IPv6 are stored in the MAC layer data/payload MSDU, and the MAC
layer frame MPDU to which the MAC layer header MACHD is added is
structured and is handed to the MAC layer frame MPDU.
[0354] Using the cyclic redundancy code CRC added to the end
position of the MAC layer frame MPDU (FIG. 11 (e)), whether or not
there is a data error in the MAC layer frame MPDU can be checked
(or a data error location can be extracted). In the present
embodiment, the cyclic redundancy code CRC is used. The CRC is
calculated as a redundancy (remainder) obtained by dividing the
whole MAC layer header MACHD and MACH layer data/payload MSDU by a
predetermined code in a binary notation (1s and 0s). In the data
sending, the cyclic redundancy code CRC calculated as above is
added to the end position of the MAC layer frame MPDU. In the data
reception, a redundancy obtained by dividing the MAC layer header
MACHD and MAC layer data/payload MSDU by the code is compared to
the cyclic redundancy code CRC. If the redundancies match, it is
recognized that there is no error. If there is an error, the
location of error can be extracted through a reverse operation
based on the cyclic redundancy code CRC obtained in the data
reception. Here, an error correction performance (that is, a size
of an error correctable area in the entirety of the error
correction target data including the cyclic redundancy code CRC
(the entirety of the MAC layer frame MPDU in this case)) is
determined based on the data size of the cyclic redundancy code
CRC. Thus, if the data size of the cyclic redundancy code CRC is
fixed, the error correction performance is relatively improved
because the data size of the entirety of the error correction
target data including the cyclic redundancy code CRC (MAC layer
frame MPDU) becomes smaller, and thus, the data reliability of the
MAC layer frame MPDU (the error correction is taken into
consideration) can be improved.
[0355] In consideration of the above, the cyclic redundancy code
CRC is disposed in the end position of the MAC layer frame in the
present embodiment as shown in FIG. 11 (e). As explained in Section
2.3 with reference to FIG. 12A, relatively highly robust data are
contained a lot in the physical header PHYHD. That is, even if
there are some error bits in the physical header PHYHD, they can be
dealt with by automatic correction through some means. In contrast,
vary high data accuracy is required for the data in the MAC layer
frame MPDU handled in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 or
above layers. Thus, by adding the error correction function to the
MAC layer frame while excluding the physical header PHYHD which has
relatively high robustness, the error correction performance is
improved and the reliability of the whole communication data
(physical layer frame PPDU) can be improved.
[0356] Then, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the data in which the IPv6
header IPv6HD is disposed in the first and IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU
is subsequently disposed are stored in the MAC layer data/payload
MSDU. Then, in the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 during
the data sending, a combination of the TCP header TCPHD,
communication middleware data APLDT, and expansion data EXDT is
stored in the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU, the IPv6 header IPv6HD is
added thereto and handed to the media access layers MAC02 and
MAC06. Furthermore, during the data reception, the IPv6 header
IPv6HD is extracted from the MAC layer data/payload MSDU handed by
the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, subjected to an original
treatment, and the communication middleware data APLDT and
expansion data EXDT (or the communication middleware data APLDT
alone) are handed to the communication middleware layers APL02 and
APL06.
[0357] Then, the communication middleware data APLDT and expansion
data EXDT (or the communication middleware data APLDT alone) shown
in FIG. 11 (b) are processed in the communication middleware layers
APL02 and APL06. Here, various service functions provided through
the network communication by the communication middleware layers
APL02 and APL06 are achieved by various processes performed by the
processors 1230, 1738, 2030, device controller 1240, or interface
of the communication module 1660 which are shown in FIGS. 10A and
16 to 17B.
[0358] Section 2.3 Data Structure of Z-Format in Physical Layer and
Media Access Layer
[0359] FIG. 12A shows a specific data structure of the physical
header PHYHD and the MAC layer header MACHD based on Z-format which
is applicable to the physical layer PHY02 and the media access
layer MAC02 corresponding to the in-system network line 1782 (cf.
FIGS. 10A and 16). Here, Z-format explained below is an example of
the format used in the system of the present embodiment, and other
formats which can correspond to the in-system network line 1782 may
be used instead. Furthermore, data transferred on the in-system
network line 1782 is not limited to those have a hierarchy in which
the physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02 are
included, and data without a hierarchy or data with a different
hierarchy may be used instead.
[0360] Initially, the data structure of FIG. 12A (c) is an exact
transcription of the contents of FIG. 11 (a). As shown in FIG. 12A
(b), the physical header PHYHD includes a synchronization header
SYNC disposed in the initial five bytes and length data of physical
layer data/payload LPSDU disposed by one byte immediately after the
synchronization header SYNC. Thus, the data size of the physical
header PHYHD is six bytes (five plus one). Note that the length
data of physical layer data/payload LPSDU indicate the data size of
the physical layer data/payload PSDU of FIG. 11 (f) and are
represented by bytes. As already explained in Section 2.2, the
maximum data size of the physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127
bytes. Thus, the length data of physical layer data/payload LPSDU
are set to be 121 bytes or less (127 minus 6).
[0361] Then, as shown in FIG. 12A (a), the synchronization header
SYNC includes a preamble PRM of four bytes disposed initially and a
physical layer frame initialization data SFD of one byte. As the
preamble PRM, [00000000h] (where h is a hexadecimal value) is set.
Here, a direction sequence spread spectrum scheme is used for the
signal modulation, and thus, synchronization signals are obtained
from 0s of the preamble PRM. Then, [A7h] is set within the area of
the physical layer frame initialization data SFD. Here, [A7h] which
is a hexadecimal value is converted to 10100111 in a binary
notation.
[0362] The use of communication data within physical header PHYHD
within the communication controller 1700 in the communication
module 1660, or the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 in FIG.
10A or within the communication module 1202-4 and 2002 in FIGS. 16
to 17B will be explained. Generally, the communication data within
physical header PHYHD are used for chip synchronization and bit
synchronization in the receiver side. That is, the above
communication modules include an oscillator (phase lock loop (PLL)
circuit) which can automatically synchronize the frequency and
phase. The oscillator (PLL circuit) can automatically synchronize
the frequency and phase to match the preamble PRM (chip
synchronization). Then, the position of the physical layer frame
initialization data SFD is detected by, for example, a pattern
matching method, and (1) the oscillator recognizes the use of
Z-format for the physical layer PHY02 and detects an initialization
bit position of the MAC layer header MACHD from a series of binary
bits I/O (bit synchronization).
[0363] As shown in FIG. 12A (d), the MAC layer header MACHD
includes areas storing a MAC layer frame control data MACNTL, MAC
layer sequence number MASQNM, and address data MADRS in the order
of data transference from a sender to a receiver (sequential order
or order of data sending).
[0364] In the first MAC layer frame control data MACNTL area, the
control data of the whole MAC layer frame MPDU (FIG. 11 (f)) are
stored in two bytes. Specifically, the MAC layer frame control data
MACNTL include data indicative of types of the MAC layer frame MPDU
in the first three bits. The types are identification data such as
a beacon, data, ACK (acknowledgment), and command frame type. In
the next one bit, data indicative of presence/absence of security
are stored. In the following one bit, data indicative of
presence/absence of pending data are stored, and in the following
one bit, data indicative of presence/absence of acknowledgement
message request are stored.
[0365] In the following one bit, data indicative that the data
communication is limited within a private area network (PAN) or is
performed across a plurality of PANs are stored. As already
explained with reference to FIGS. 1 and 8A, in the system of the
present embodiment, one PAN may be associated with one system
.alpha._1132, or may be associated with one section 1142. Thus, the
setting of data may be changed depending on to which the PAN is
associated. Note that, if Z-format is used in the data
communication in the in-domain network line 2082, data indicative
that the data communication is performed across a plurality of PANs
may be stored in this area. This is because, as shown in FIG. 1,
the system of the present embodiment allows a case where the system
controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128 are separated greatly in
the domain 2_1122-2 (and thus are not contained in a single PAN).
In such a case, the data indicative that the data communication is
performed across a plurality of PANs are stored in this area. On
the other hand, if the system controller .beta._1128 is mobile and
is moved toward the system controller .alpha._1126 (and thus both
the system controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128 are in the same
PAN), the data indicative that the data communication is performed
within a PAN are stored in this area.
[0366] Then, in the following two bits and the last two bits in the
MAC layer frame control data MACNTL (two bytes), address mode data
of each of the receiver and the sender are stored. In Z-format,
IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS may be set or
shortened addresses may be set. Here, as shown in FIG. 12A (e), in
the system of the present embodiment, the IEEE extension addresses
DEXADRS and SEXADRS are used for the receiver and the sender,
respectively, as address mode data. In the system of the present
embodiment, the network communication is performed through not only
the communication modules 1202-3-6 in the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the devices 1250-1-3 in FIG. 8A but also
combination modules such as the sensor combination modules 1460-1-5
and the actuator combination modules 1470-1-2 in FIG. 8B. Thus, in
the system of the present embodiment, the media access layer MAC02
easily identifies which modules are used for the network
communication, the communication modules 1202-3-4 or the
combination modules 1260-1-5 and 1470-1-2, using the IEEE extension
addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS in the address modes (which will be
described later with reference to FIG. 12B (e)). Through this
process, (1) rapid switching of the communication middleware layer
APL02 (C-format or other format) in the receiver side can be
performed, and (2) should any error occurs in the sender side
(erroneous identification of communication modules 1202-3-4 or
combination modules 1460-1-5 and 1470-1-2), such an error can
easily be detected.
[0367] Now, the data storage area of the MAC layer sequence number
MASQNM data size of which is one byte as shown in FIG. 12A (d) will
be explained. As stated above, in the system of the present
embodiment, the data size of the whole physical layer frame PPDU is
set to 127 bytes or less. That is, if the data size of the
communication middleware data APLDT and expansion data EXDT (cf.
FIG. 11 (b)) becomes larger, a single physical layer frame PPDU
becomes insufficient for the data communication (transfer). This
risk increases especially when A-format or E-format is used in the
communication middleware layer APL06. In consideration of this
point, in the system of the present embodiment, the communication
middleware data APLDT and the expansion data EXDT are divided into
256 (2.sup.8) physical layer frames PPDU for the transference
(communication). Specifically, the communication middleware data
APLDT and the expansion data EXDT are divided into a plurality of
pieces and sequentially transferred (sent) to the network line. In
that case, the physical header PHYHD and IPv6 header IPv6HD (and
TCP header TCPHD) shown in FIG. 11 (a) contain the same data
contents. Then, in accordance with the data sending (communication)
order on the network line, a value starting from 0 (an increment
value) is added one by one to the area in the area of the MAC layer
sequence number MASQNM. As a result, the divisional sending order
of the communication middleware data APLDT and the expansion data
EXDT is set, and thus, stable data communication can be performed
even if the reception order of the physical layer frames PPDU
changes by a network trouble or the like.
[0368] The data structure in FIG. 12A (e) is the same as that of
FIG. 12B (c). Thus, the address data MADRS in the MAC header MACHD
will be explained with reference to FIG. 12B. Note that, in the
system of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 1, a single system
.alpha._1132 may be formed as a single PAN or as a combination of a
plurality of PANs. Or, each of the sections 1142-1-m in the system
.alpha._1132 may be formed of one ore more PANs. If a system
.alpha._1132 includes a plurality of PANs, the system controller
.alpha._1126 needs to perform the management of the PANs. Thus,
data are exchanged between different PANs in the system
.alpha._1132. To correspond such a situation, the system controller
.alpha._1126 allocates PAN-unique identification data to each PAN,
and areas to store PAN-unique identification data DPANID and SPANID
including receiver and sender nodes are set in a storage area of
the address data MADRS as shown in FIG. 12B (c).
[0369] In both the receiver and sender IEEE extension addresses
DEXADRS and SEXADRS, expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS of
one byte and IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE of
eight bytes are disposed to create each data storage area. Note
that the IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE
includes unique numbers preliminarily allocated to all the
communication modules 1202-3-6, sensor combination modules
1460-1-5, and combination modules such as actuator combination
modules 1470-1-2 which conform to the IEEE 802.15.4 standard. The
unique numbers are not redundant between different communication
modules and combination modules around the world. Note that,
although the unique numbers are mainly assigned to the
communication modules 1202-3-6 and combination modules during their
factory stage, they may be assigned by a direct request to, for
example, the IEEE. In the issuance of such unique numbers by the
IEEE or a particular organization, individual performance and
functions of a combination module and its corresponding
communication data in accordance with C-format (categories and
template types used in data communication) are acquired in such an
organization. Thus, using the data of the IEEE 802.15.4 conformable
per-chip address ADRSIEEE, the individual performance and functions
of a target combination module can be recognized and the type of
communication data using C-format can be officially estimated.
Thus, the preparation of corresponding processes by the
communication middleware layer APL02 can be accelerated and
simplified.
[0370] FIG. 12B (e) shows an example of data structure in the
expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS of the system of the
present embodiment. The first one bit thereof is an area which
stores module structure data MST. If the one bit is [0], it
indicates the communication modules 1202-3-6 stored in the system
controller .alpha._1126 and the devices 1250-1-3. If the one bit is
[1], it indicates that the corresponding node has a combination
module structure. Furthermore, data stored in the next one bit area
indicate combination module structure data CMST. If the one bit is
[0], it indicates that the corresponding node is a sensor
combination module, and if the one bit is [1], the corresponding
node is an actuator combination module.
[0371] Note that, the data sent from a sensor combination module
include various data items such as binary optical level
(illumination on/off), multi-valued optical level (corresponding to
the luminosity), human presence, and temperature. Furthermore, as
explained in Section 1.5 with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6D, data
used for the control of an actuator combination module include
various data items such as binary on/off data, multivalued data,
and remote control data of the device. Thus, the system of the
present embodiment includes an area in which data identifying the
types of the sensor combination modules 1460 and actuator
combination module 1470 are stored as six bit combination module
type identification data CMTID. Note that, while the data CMTID are
set to identify the type of each of the combination modules 1460
and 1470, the type of the device 1250 is identified by using the
number attribution in the <table> Element in A-format (cf.
Section 2.7 and FIG. 15B), and is identified by using exchangeable
data type identification data EPC in E-format (cf. Section 2.6 and
FIG. 15A (f)). Thus, the combination module type identification
data CMTID may be used as the exchangeable data identification data
1840 shown in FIG. 10B. As in A-format and E-format, the
interpretation of data stored in multi-valued/binary transmission
data units CTMDT and CT2DT (described in Section 2.5 with reference
to FIG. 14 (d)) conforming to C-format can be facilitated.
Furthermore, if the module structure data MST, combination module
structure data CMST, and combination module type identification
data CMTID are compared to target node functions estimated from the
IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE, the accuracy
and reliability of read of the address data MADRS can be improved.
That is, if a sender should erroneously writes data in a storage
area of the module structure data MST, combination module structure
data CMST, or combination module type identification data CMTID, or
if a receiver erroneously reads data with a bit shift (erroneous
reading), such errors can be detected easily through the above
comparison. In that case, an alarm notification is made from a
receiver to a sender. Specifically, for example, [000] is set in
the communication access control data 1830 of FIGS. 14 (d), and
[00011] is set by combining the multi-valued transmission data
CTMDT and binary transmission data CTMDT. This will be further
explained in Section 2.5.
[0372] Section 2.4 Data Structure of Internet Protocol Version 6
Layer
[0373] In Section 2.4, the data structure of the communication data
corresponding to the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 will be
described with reference to FIG. 13. In this data structure, there
are areas storing sender and receiver IP address data SIPADRS and
DIPADRS each described in sixteen bytes as shown in FIG. 13 (b). An
IP address is set uniquely and individually to every communication
and combination module in the world. The IP addresses uniquely and
individually set to the communication and combination modules in
the world are not redundant. Therefore, in the system of the
present embodiment in which data communication including IPv6
header IPv6HD (FIG. 13 (a)) is performable, data communication can
be established with a particular communication module or a
particular combination module from anywhere in the world by simply
entering the domain 2_1122-2 (FIG. 1).
[0374] IP packet related data IPPKT are stored in the initial eight
bytes of the IPv6 header IPv6HD shown in FIG. 13 (b). As can be
understood from FIG. 13 (c), the IP packet related data IPPKT
include areas storing first data SIPHD, IPv6 data/payload length
data LIPv6DU, header type identification data NXHD immediately
after the IPv6 header, and remaining passable node number data
HPLMT in this order. The IPv6 data/payload length data LIPv6DU
indicate the data size of the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU shown in
FIG. 11 (d) and the area storing the data has two bytes.
[0375] Now, the header type identification data NXHD immediately
after the IPv6 header will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11 (a),
various headers are sequentially stored in one physical layer frame
PPDU. Then, the header type identification data NXHD immediately
after the IPv6 header designate a header type immediately after the
IPv6 header IPv6HD. Thus, in the example of FIG. 11 (a), TCP header
TCPHD is designated as the header type identification data NXHD
immediately after the IPv6 header. Then, the header type
identification data NXHD immediately after the IPv6 header can
designate a communication path setting method on a communication
network (Internet). Note that, in the system of the present
embodiment, data contents stored in the physical layer frame PPDU
are not limited to that of FIG. 11 (a) and different data may be
stored therein. For example, as another variation, a different type
header data may be disposed immediately after the IPv6 header
IPv6HD. For example, a user datagram protocol (UDP) header may be
disposed instead of the transmission control protocol (TCP) header
in FIG. 13. Or, as another variation, the communication middleware
data APLDT may be disposed/stored immediately after the IPv6 header
IPv6HD. For example, if E-format is used for the communication
middleware data APLDT, data of E-format header E-HD are
disposed/stored in the first area of the communication middleware
data APLDT as described in Section 2.6 with reference to FIG. 15A
(b). Thus, in that case, the header type identification data NXHD
immediately after the IPv6 header designate the identification data
of the E-format header E-HD.
[0376] Data communication between the server n_1116-n and the
system controller .alpha._1126 using the out-system network line
1788 shown in FIG. 10A or data communication between the system
controller .alpha._1126 and system controller .beta._1128 using the
in-domain network line 2082 are rarely performed directly
therebetween, and in many cases, data pass a plurality of relay
points (relay nodes) through the out-system network line 1788 or
the in-domain network line 2082. Here, the maximum number of the
relay points (relay nodes) in the middle of the communication paths
acceptable between the sender node and the receiver node is denoted
by an integer (including zero) by the remaining passable node
number data HPLMT in FIG. 13 (c). For example, if data
communication is performed between a pair of the above
relationship, the value of the remaining passable node number data
HPLMT is initially set in the sender node. Then, every time when
the communication data pass (are relayed by) the relay points
(relay nodes) middle of the communication path, one is subtracted
(decrements) from the remaining passable node number data HPLMT,
that is, when the data pass one relay point (relay node), one is
subtracted from the value of the remaining passable node number
data HPLMT. Then, when the remaining passable node number data
HPLMT become zero, the network data communication is discarded.
Note that the remaining passable node number data HPLMT are
described in one byte, and thus, 256 (2.sup.8) relay points (relay
nodes) can be set at the maximum.
[0377] However, when the number of relay points (relay nodes)
increases, a communication time required until data from the sender
reaches the receiver (time required for data transference) becomes
longer. In an emergency data transference such as alarm
notification, the communication time must be shortened. In
consideration of the data transference time through the relay
points (relay nodes), the number of the relay points (relay nodes)
must be set 100 or less, and more preferably, 10 or less. Thus, in
the system of the present embodiment, the remaining passable node
number data HPLMT in the sender side is set to 100 or less or, more
specifically, 10 or less in the data communication through the
out-system network line 1788 or the in-domain network line 2082.
Naturally, the value of the remaining passable node number data
HPLMT which is reset (updated) at each of the relay points (relay
nodes) on the out-system network line 1788 or the in-domain network
line 2082 must be 100 or less, or more specifically, 10 or less.
When the value of the remaining passable node number data HPLMT
decreases, a router disposed in some relay point (relay node) on
the out-system network line 1788 or the in-domain network line 2082
automatically finds the shortest path to the receiver node to
prevent discard of data communication in progress. Thereby, the
time required for the data communication between the server
n_1116-n and the system controller .alpha._1126 or between the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the system controller
.beta._1128 can be shortened, and emergency data communication such
as alarm notification can be performed promptly.
[0378] On the other hand, as a data communication mode using the
in-system network line 1782 of the system of the present
embodiment, the data communication between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the combination modules 1460 and 1470 as in FIG.
10A, and the data communication between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the devices 1260 as in FIG. 16 can be performed.
Then, as in FIG. 1, if a plurality of sections 1142 structure a
single system and each section 1142 has a unique PAN, a network
communication connecting the PANs is required. In that case, a data
transference process is required in a relay point (relay node)
every time when communication data crosses adjacent PANs. Thus, in
the system of the present embodiment, the maximum number of relay
points (relay nodes) between the sender node and the receiver node
must be set even in the data communication using the in-system
network line 1782. Note that the combination modules used in the
system of the present embodiment each include a battery charger
module (battery) 1554 as shown in FIG. 5 for power supply. The
power charged in the battery charger module (battery) 1554 is used
every time when the data transference process is performed in the
relay point (relay node). Thus, in the data communication using the
in-system network line 1782, the number of the communication data
transference at the relay points (relay nodes) must be kept as
small as possible. Here, the power used for one communication data
transference and the power chargeable in a battery charger module
(battery) 1554 are taken into consideration, a suitable number of
relay points (relay nodes) is 30 or less, or more specifically, 10
or less. Therefore, when data communication is performed on the
in-system network line 1782 in the system of the present
embodiment, the sender node sets the value of the remaining
passable node number data HPLMT to 30 or less, or more
specifically, 10 or less. Thereby, unnecessary power use of a
battery charger module 1554 in a combination module can be
prevented, and the network communication in the system of the
present embodiment can be maintained stably for a long period.
[0379] As shown in FIG. 13 (d), the first data SIPHD area of the
IPv6 header IPv6HD includes version data IPVRS, communication class
data IPCLS, and communication type label data IPLBL, disposed in
this order therein. The area storing the version data IPVRS is four
bits area and 6 (0110 in the binary notation) as an internet
protocol version.
[0380] The communication type label data IPLBL are stored in
2.5-byte area which is disposed immediately before the area where
the IPv6 data/payload length data LIPv6DU are stored. Note that, if
the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT and the
expansion data EXDT (FIG. 11 (d)) become large, such data are
divided and disposed (stored) separately in a plurality of physical
layer frames PPDU as explained in Section 2.3. In this method, to
clarify the transference order between the physical layer frames
PPDU, incremented values are stored within the MAC number sequence
number MASQNM area in the MAC layer header MACHD. In parallel, if
the communication middleware data APLDT (and the expansion data
EXDT) are scattered in different IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU areas
(cf. FIG. 11 (d)), the communication type label data IPLBL is used
to identify the entirety of the communication middleware data APLDT
(and the expansion data EXDT) in the system of the present
embodiment. Note that the contents of the communication type label
data IPLBL are determined in the sender node in the first place
(before the network communication begins). Thus, when gathered (a
series of) communication data contents of the communication
middleware data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) related to
particular service are scattered (stored) in a plurality of IPv6
data/payload IPv6DU areas for communication, common label data are
stored in the entire storage areas of the corresponding
communication type label data IPLBL. Note that, in the system of
the present embodiment, the data communication between the server
n_1116-n and the system controller .alpha._1126 using the
out-system network line 1788 as in FIG. 10A, the data communication
between the system controller .alpha._1126 and the devices 1250
using the in-system network line 1782 as in FIG. 16, and the data
communication between the system controller .alpha._1126 and the
system controller .beta._1128 using the in-domain network line 2082
are performable. By changing the contents of the communication type
label data IPLBL in communication middleware data APLDT (and
expansion data EXDT) related to each service, the communication in
the above relationships can be performed with the communication
middleware data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) related to
different services. As a result, data communication related to
different services can be performed at once between the server
n_1116-n and the system controller .alpha._1126 (or between the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the devices 1250, or between the
system controller .alpha._1126 and the system controller
.beta._1128) to provide various services to users at once. In
addition, by combining the communication type label data IPLBL and
the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM in the MAC layer header MACHD,
the accuracy of reliability confirmation of communication data at
the receiver can be improved. Furthermore, as another variation,
the common data stored in the communication type label data IPLBL
may be used as a cryptographic key for the communication middleware
data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) related to the same
service.
[0381] Note that the communication class data IPCLS of FIG. 13 (d)
are used to indicate a communication class in the network
communication. Specifically, the communication class data IPCLS are
considered to be used mainly in a layer above the internet protocol
version 6 layer IPv6 in FIG. 10A (that is, in communication
middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and expansion application layer
EXL06). As already explained in Section 2.3 with reference to FIG.
12B (d) and (e), the expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS is
used. Thus, as a variation of the system of the present
embodiment,
[0382] discarding storage areas of the expanded IEEE extension
address EXEXADRS in the receiver and sender IEEE extension
addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS;
[0383] storing only the IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address
ADRIEEE in the storage areas of the receiver and sender IEEE
extension address DEXADRS and SEXADRS (that is, conforming the
receiver and sender IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS to
the IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE); and
[0384] storing the IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address
ADRSIEEE in the storage areas in the communication class data IPCLS
(that is, conforming the communication class data IPCLS to the IEEE
802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE).
[0385] As already explained in Section 2.2 with reference to FIG.
10A, the functions of the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6
are performed by the communication module 1768 or 1202-3, or the
communication controller 1700 in the communication module 1660.
Then, service providing functions corresponding to the
communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the expansion
application layer EXL06 are performed by the processor 1738 or
1230, or the interface 1710 of the communication module 1660. Thus,
the data including IPv6 header IPv6HD which are disposed before the
TCP header TCPHD in FIG. 11 are processed by the communication
module 1768 or 1202-3 or the communication controller 1700 of the
communication module 1660. Similarly, the communication middleware
data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) are processed by the processor
1738 or 1230, or the interface 1710 in the communication module
1660. Then, upon receipt of a physical layer frame PPDU, the
communication class data IPCLS are initially processed in the
communication module 1768 or 1202-3, or the communication
controller 1700 in the communication module 1660, and the
communication middleware data APLDT (and expansion data EXDT) are
handed over to the processor 1738 or 1230, or the interface 1710 in
the communication module 1660. Thus, by storing the expanded IEEE
extension address EXEXADRS in (the storage area for the
communication class data IPCLS) the IPv6 header IPv6HD, a
preparation to correspond to combination modules can be made in the
processor 1738 or 1230, or the communication module 1660 in advance
to reception of the communication middleware data APLDT (and
expansion data EXDT). Thereby, the speed of process performed by
the system controller .alpha._1126 in response to the communication
data sent from the combination modules can be improved.
[0386] Section 2.5 Data Structure of C-Format in Communication
Middleware Layer
[0387] In the system of the present embodiment, the main purpose of
C-format is to be used in the communication middleware layer APL02
sent to the combination modules 1460 and 1470 on the in-system
network line 1782 as explained in Section 2.1 with reference to
FIG. 10A. Furthermore, apart from the above, C-format may be used
in the data communication between devices in different systems,
specifically, between the system controller .beta._1128 in the
system .beta._1134 and the communication modules 1460 and 1470 in
the system .alpha._1132 as explained in the last section of Section
2.1. Alternatively, C-format may be used in data communication with
devices 1250. Here, in C-format, the expansion application layer
EXL06 (cf. FIG. 10A) is not defined and is only used in the
communication middleware layer APL02.
[0388] The data structure of C-format is designed as simple as
possible to reduce the work load of the communication modules 1460
and 1470 to a minimum. As one of the simplest designs of the data
structure, data redundancy in the areas between the physical header
PHYHD and the TCP header TCPHD in FIG. 11 (a) is prevented to a
maximum (details and advantages thereof will be described later).
For example, in this structure, the size data of the communication
middleware data APLDT is not stored therein but is stored as IPv6
data/payload length data LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD. Here,
the IPv6 data/payload length data LIPv6DU indicate the data size of
the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU in FIG. 11 (d). Since the data size of
the TCP header TCPHD is preliminarily determined, and data size of
the communication middleware data APLDT is automatically derived
from the IPv6 data/payload length data LIPv6DU as shown in FIGS. 14
(c) and (d). The basic data size of the communication middleware
data APLDT in C-format is defined to one byte; however, depending
on the contents of communication data between the combination
modules 1460 and 1470, the data size thereof may exceed one byte by
adding expanded transference data CEDT to the last part of the
communication middleware data APLDT as shown in FIG. 14 (d).
[0389] As already explained in Section 2.1 in FIG. 10B,
exchangeable data (table) 1810 used in the data communication
include network access control data 1830 in A-format or E-format.
The network access control data 1830 can be stored in C-format in a
three-bit format. Especially, by describing in the three-bit format
(that is, describing 8 control data types), various network access
control data 1830 types can be identified. As a specific control
method, in a time of instruction (command issuance) 1852 described
in case 1 of FIG. 10B, a reset instruction of [111] is set as the
network access control data 1830. When sending a result report
(status) 1854, a response reply of [010], or report notification,
or acknowledgement notification of [001] is set as the network
access control data 1830.
[0390] In the system of the present embodiment, when data
communication is performed by converting signals detected through
an analogue way by sensors in the sensor combination module 1460 in
binary data, a threshold value (a reference level used for the
binary signal conversion) can be set externally. To set the
threshold value, a threshold level setting instruction of [110] is
set as the network access control data 1830 to correspond to the
instruction (command issuance) 1852 in case 1 of FIG. 10B.
[0391] On the other hand, a response (data) request of [011] is set
as the network access control data 1830 to correspond to a response
request (request) 1872 in case 2 of FIG. 10B. In a response 1874
thereto, a response reply/report notification of [010] is set as
the network access control data 1830.
[0392] Furthermore, the response reply/report notification [010] is
set as the network access control data 1830 to correspond to the
periodic/nonperiodic notification 1894 voluntarily performed by the
combination modules 1460 and 1470 as in case 3 of FIG. 10B. When an
error is detected in the combination modules 1460 and 1470, the
alarm notification is performed by setting [000] to the network
access control data 1830 as the nonperiodic notification.
Furthermore, when the periodic notification is performed
voluntarily by the combination modules 1460 and 1470, a time
interval between periodic notifications can be set by the system
controller .alpha._1126. In that case, an instruction of the
intervals between the notifications can be performed by setting
[101] to the network access control data 1830.
[0393] For example, a case where a smart meter 1124 of FIG. 8A
reports used power (common goods) to the system controller
.alpha._1126, server n_1116-n, or wholesale firm A_1102 at the
above time intervals will be considered. In such a case, the report
may be prepared as instantaneous values of the user power (common
goods) measured in moments, or an accumulation value of the used
power measured at particular intervals. In consideration of this
point, in the system of the present embodiment, data accumulation
intervals are instructed by setting [100] to the network access
control data 1830. Here, if [00000] is designated to an area
storing transmission data immediately after the storage area of the
network access control data 1830, the instantaneous values of usage
of goods (used quantity of the common goods such as power) are
reported from combination modules at designated time intervals.
[0394] As shown in FIG. 14 (d), four-bit storage area of
multi-valued transmission data CTMDT set immediately after the
storage area of the network access control data 1830 and one-bit
storage area of binary transmission data CT2DT send transmission
data of multi-values or binary. Here, in the present embodiment, a
specific data storage area indicative of either binary or
multi-values is not included in the transference data but the
identification of binary/multi-values is performed by the
transference data. That is, if the transference data are binary,
values of four-bit multi-valued transmission data CTMDT are set to
zero (that is, [0000]). To indicate an ON state or an OK state, [1]
is set to the binary transmission data CT2DT. To indicate an OFF
state or NG (No) state, [0] is set to the binary transmission data
CT2DT. On the other hand, if an error occurs in the combination
modules 1460 and 1470 and an alarm notification is sent to the
system controller .alpha._1126 ([000] is set in the network access
control data 1830), the following transference data setting method
is used. In that case, [0000] is set in the multi-valued
transmission data CTMDT. Then, if the error in the combination
modules 1460 and 1470 is a sensor detection error or an actuator
error (actuator is uncontrollable or difficult to control), [1] is
set to the binary transmission data CT2DT. Note that, as shown in
FIG. 5, since a battery charger module (battery) 1554 is stored in
each of the sensor combination module 1460 and the actuator
combination module 1470, there is always a risk of low battery
(shortage). When the battery charger module (battery) 1554 becomes
low, [0] is set to the binary transmission data CT2DT to notify the
low battery to the system controller .alpha._1126.
[0395] On the other hand, if the transference data is multi-valued,
the data are represented in five-bit signals as a combination of
the multi-valued transmission data CTMDT and the binary
transmission data CT2DT. For example, if 0 to 100% of multi-valued
data are stored as the transference data, the multi-value data of 0
to 100% are divided into thirty portions and represented from
[00010] (which corresponds to 0%) to [11111] (which corresponds to
100%). However, in the system of the present embodiment, the
multi-valued data may be represented by other methods using the
combination of the multi-valued transmission data CTMDT and the
binary transmission data CT2DT. Furthermore, if the communication
of sensor data or setting of threshold values or control values
requires very high accuracy for, for example, detecting a
temperature or humidity, or changing a luminosity of an
illumination, thirty divided portions of the multi-value will be
insufficient for the representation of the multi-value data. In
such a case, a storage area of expanded transference data CEDT may
be added to immediately after the area storing the binary
transmission data CT2DT to increase the accuracy in the
representation of the multi-valued data. The number of bits used
for the representation of multi-value depends on the IPv6
data/payload length data LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD as
mentioned above.
[0396] As above, binary data or multi-valued data are identified
not by binary/multi-value identifiers but by the contents of
transmission data, and thus, the data size of the communication
middleware data APLDT can be reduced. As a result, data
communication traffic (slowdown) on the in-system network line 1782
can be smoothed, and process in the combination modules 1460 and
1470 (especially, in the interface 1710 shown in FIG. 10A) is
simplified, and costs of the combination modules 1460 and 1470 can
be reduced.
[0397] Furthermore, data indicative of meaning of transference data
represented in a multi-value are not stored in an area in the
communication middleware data APLDT conforming to C-format.
Instead, in the system of the present embodiment, the data of IEEE
802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE of FIG. 12B are used
as the data indicative of meaning of transference data represented
in a multi-value. As already described in Section 2.3, an
organization which issues the IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip
address ADRSIEEE grasps the functions and performances of the
combination modules 1460 and 1470 corresponding to the address. By
publishing the data on the Internet, the meaning of the
transference data corresponding to the combination modules
corresponding to the IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address
ADRSIEEE can be recognized. Furthermore, as can be understood from
the explanation of Section 2.3 with reference to FIG. 12B and the
explanation of Section 2.4 with reference to FIG. 13 (d), the
combination module type identification data CMTID can be stored in
the receiver or sender IEEE extension addresses DEXADRS or SEXADRS
in the MAC layer header MACHD or in the communication class data
IPCLS in the IPv6 header IPv6HD. Thus, by combining the IEEE
802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE and the combination
module type identification data CMTID, the meaning and
interpretation method of transference data CTMDT, CT2DT, and CEDT
(represented in multi-value data, for example) transferred between
the combination modules 1460 and 1470 can be recognized accurately.
The combination module type identification data CMTID are, since
they can be used in the meaning and interpretation method of the
transference data CTMDT, CT2DT, and CEDT, related to the
exchangeable data type identification data 1840 (cf. FIG. 10B).
That is, the combination module type identification data CMTID can
be used for the same purpose as the number attribute (cf. FIG. 15B
(b)) in <table> Element of A-format, which will be described
in Section 2.7. On the other hand, the exchangeable data type
identification data 1840 correspond to the exchangeable data type
identification data EPC (cf. Section 2.6 using FIG. 15A (f)) of
E-format. As to both E-format and A-format, the exchangeable data
type identification data 1840 of FIG. 10B are stored in the
communication middleware data APLDT.
[0398] As compared to E-format or A-format, data in the MAC layer
header MACHD (combination module type identification data CMTID of
FIG. 12B (e)) or data in the IPv6 header IPv6HD (data in
communication class data of FIG. 13 (d) in Section 2.4 can be used
in C-format as data related to the exchangeable data type
identification data 1840 of FIG. 10B. As explained in Section 2.2,
the process of communication data progresses from the lower level
of the structure of FIG. 10A in a data reception. Thus, if which
module is a target node, a sensor combination module 1460 or an
actuator combination module 1470, and also what type of combination
module is used are preliminarily determined at a relatively lower
function level such as the media access layer MAC02 or the Internet
protocol version 6 layer IPv6, C-format conforming preparation can
be performed in the interface 1710 before the communication
middleware data APLDT are handed from the communication controller
1700 in the communication module 1660 (shown in FIG. 10A) to the
interface 1710. Thereby, the communication data process in the
receiver side can be accelerated.
[0399] Furthermore, as described above, C-format uses data defined
in one level in the other levels to decrease the data size of the
communication middleware data APLDT. Thus, the data communication
traffic (slowdown) on the in-system network line 1782 can be
smoothed, process in the combination modules 1460 and 1470
(especially, in the interface 1710 shown in FIG. 10A) can be
simplified, and costs of the combination modules 1460 and 1470 can
be reduced.
[0400] Now, a specific example of the communication middleware data
APLDT in C-format in accordance with the above method will be
explained. For example, if the system controller .alpha._1126
performs an instruction (command issuance) 1852 (FIG. 10B) of
operation stop with respect to the actuator combination module
1470, [111] reset instruction is set to the network access control
data 1830, [0000] binary data instruction is set to the
multi-valued transmission data CTMDT, and [0] off instruction is
set to the binary transmission data CT2DT. Or, if the sensor
combination module 1460 sends a notification (report) that 50% of
common goods is currently used to the system controller
.alpha._1126, [010] report notification is set to the network
access control data 1830, and [10001] 50% is set to the five-bit
area which is a combination of the multi-valued transmission data
CTMDT and the binary transmission data CT2DT.
[0401] Furthermore, another specific example of the communication
middleware data APLDT will be explained. As described in Section
4.3;
[0402] an adult person with a relatively large finger can stably
perform an input even if the sensitivity of a touchpad or a
capacitance button is low; however
[0403] a child or a female person with a relatively small finger
cannot perform an input unless the sensitivity of the touchpad or
the capacitance button is increased much. In relation to this
point, the system controller .alpha._1126 performs the following
sensitivity setting with respect to the sensor combination module
1460 which corresponds to a touchpad or a capacitance button after
estimating/determining a condition of a user (size of his/her
finger) in accordance with Section 4.3. In that case, [110]
threshold value level setting instruction is set to the network
access control data 1830. Then, if the sensitivity of the touchpad
or the capacitance button is increased from 25 to 73%, [11000]
corresponding to 73% is set to the five-bit area which is a
combination of the multi-valued transmission data CTMDT and the
binary transmission data CT2DT.
[0404] In the above example, communication timing of binary data
related to on/off state setting or the like is separated from
communication timing of multi-value data related to user condition
setting or the like, if the communication data are binary or
multi-valued is identified by checking whether or not there is
[0000] in the multi-valued transmission data CTMDT. However, no
limitation is intended thereby. For example, the binary data
related to on/off state setting or the like and the multi-valued
data related to user condition setting or the like can be
transferred at the same time. In that case, one-bit binary data may
be set to the binary transmission data CT2DT and four-bit
multi-valued data may be set to the multi-valued transmission data.
If the binary data and multi-valued data are sent together such
that both starting an operation and setting a condition setting
value (such as temperature setting), the frequency of data
communication between the system controller .alpha._1126 and the
combination modules 1460 and 1470 is decreased, and the data
communication traffic in the in-system network line 1782 (FIG. 10A)
can be smoothed.
[0405] As described above, the accuracy and stability of the
communication can be improved when a combination of the IEEE
802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE and the combination
module type identification data CMTID. If an error should occur in
the system controller .alpha._1126, and the function of the
combination modules 1460 and 1470 is mistaken, such an error can be
detected by comparing the data of the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the data of the combination modules 1460 and 1470.
If the combination modules 1460 and 1470 detect the error in the
system controller .alpha._1126, the system of the present
embodiment supports the combination modules 1460 and 1470 to notify
the error detection to the system controller .alpha._1126. In that
case, [000] alarm notification is set to the network access control
data 1830 of FIG. 14 (d). Then, [00011] is set to the five-bit area
of the combination of the multi-valued transmission data CTMDT and
the binary transmission data CTMDT for a target erroneous
identification notification. As above, in the system of the present
embodiment, if an error occurs in the system controller
.alpha._1126, the combination modules 1460 and 1470 can notify the
error to the system controller .alpha._1126. Thus, the stability
and reliability of the data communication on the in-system network
line 1782 can be improved.
[0406] Section 2.6 Data Structure of E-Format in Communication
Middleware Layer
[0407] The main purpose of E-format used in the system of the
present embodiment is, as described in Section 2.1 with reference
to FIG. 16, to be used in the communication middleware layer APL06
which is mainly transferred to the devices 1250 and the server
n_1116-n. However, no limitation is intended thereby, and E-format
may be used in the data communication between the system controller
.alpha._1126 and the system controller .beta._1128, or may be used
in the data communication with the combination modules 1460 and
1470. Furthermore, as described in Section 2.1 with reference to
FIG. 10B, the data communication is basically performed exchanging
the exchangeable data (table) 1810 between the sender node and the
receiver node in E-format. Thus, the exchangeable data (table) 1810
(or a part thereof) are stored in the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU as a
part of the communication middleware data APLDT shown in FIG. 11
(a). As described in Section 2.7, A-format is described in a text
format in a broad sense. In contrast, in E-format, data
corresponding thereto are stored in a configuration code in a
particular area set in advance. Thus, E-format is defined as a
format which stores a configuration code in a particular area in
the communication middleware data APLDT. Therefore, in the system
of the present embodiment, E-format includes every format which
stores configuration codes in series in a particular area set in
advance.
[0408] In the first position of the communication middleware layer
data APLDT of E-format, an E-format header E-HD shown in FIG. 15A
(b) is stored in a two-byte area. Then, the value of E-format
header E-HD is set to [1081h] (h is a hexadecimal value and this is
[0001000010000001] in binary notation). In the subsequent two-byte
area, request-response association identification data TID are
stored. The request-response association identification data TID
are a parameter to associate a preliminarily-sent response request
with a received response when a sender sends a response request and
receives the response. A sequence of receiving a response 1874 to a
response request 1872 corresponds to the sequence of case 2 in FIG.
10B. The code stored in this area can be designated arbitrarily by
the sender node of the response request. Then, when the receiver
node makes the response to the response request, the same code as
the code set by the sender node of one-previous request response is
stored in the area of the receiver node. On the basis of a degree
of match of the request-response association identification data
TID, whether or not the reception data indicate a response to the
one-previous request response is determined.
[0409] Then, as shown in FIG. 15A (b), E-format data E-DT stored in
the area next to the request-response association identification
data TID correspond to the exchangeable data 1810 explained in
Chapter 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B. As shown in FIG. 15A (c),
the E-format data E-DT include three-byte sender device
identification data SEOJ, three-byte receiver device identification
data DEOJ, one-byte communication access control data ESV,
control/process related data CMI, disposed in this order. Here, the
one-byte communication access control data ESV correspond to the
network access control data 1830 explained in Chapter 2.1 with
reference to FIG. 10B.
[0410] Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15A (d), both the sender
device identification data SEOJ and the receiver device
identification data DEOJ include one-byte device-type group code
DTGC, one-byte device-type code DTC, one-byte same type device
identification code DIDC, disposed in this order. The device-type
group code DTGC indicates groups of device types to specify which
group a target device is included, such as a sensor related device
group, air conditioner related device group, residence/facility
related device group, or cooking/housework related device group.
The device-type code DTC indicates a type of device such as a
television or an air conditioner. Note that, if there are a
plurality of devices 1250 which are the same type of device in a
single system .alpha._1132 (for example, if there are several air
conditioners disposed in one residence), the same type device
identification code DIDC is set to identify each device 1250.
[0411] If each device 1250 is given as an air conditioner, a
plurality of setting items such as a temperature, strength of air
current, wind direction, and timer (automatic on/off) can be set
and changed (condition change control). Thus, in the exchangeable
data (table) 1810 shown in FIG. 10B, conditions related to a
plurality of items or same time setting change instructions related
to a plurality of items (condition change control data) are defined
even for a single device, and such data can be described in a table
format. Thus, the control/process related data of FIG. 15A (c) can
perform condition change control such as condition data collection
and setting change of a plurality of items at the same time, as
shown in FIG. 15A (e). The number of items of the condition data to
be collected at the same time, or the number of items conditions of
which are changed at the same time (setting change is performed) is
described in one byte as number of control/process NCM. By the
number of items set by the number of control/process NCM, the first
to nth control/process data CM-1-n are disposed in this order.
[0412] As shown in FIG. 15A (f), exchangeable data type
identification data EPC of one byte, data size PDC of individual
exchangeable data of one byte, and individual exchangeable data EDT
are disposed in each of the control/process data CM-1-n in this
order. The individual exchangeable data EDT include items such as
condition data to be collected, condition data to be sent as a
response, and condition change (setting change) control data
corresponding to each device 1250. Furthermore, data size data of
each of the individual exchangeable data EDT are stored as the data
size PDC of individual exchangeable data.
[0413] Note that, depending on the type of device 1250 (that is,
depending on contents of device-type code DTC), items indicative of
conditions and items of targets of condition change control
(setting change) differ. Thus, in E-format, items of data
conditions of which should be collected and their data
representation format are preliminarily determined depending on the
type of the device 1250 (contents of the device-type code DTC), or
items which should be subjected to the condition change control
(setting change) and representation format of the control data are
preliminarily determined depending on the type of device 1250, and
templates and item codes (template codes) are prepared in
accordance with the representation format of each item. The item
code set to each type of device 1250 (contents of the device-type
code DTC) is stored as the exchangeable data type identification
data EPC. The exchangeable data type identification data EPC
correspond to the exchangeable data type identification data 1840
shown in FIG. 10B.
[0414] Now, the E-format data E-DT corresponding to the
exchangeable data (table) 1810 will be explained with reference to
a case where a setting change (condition change control) of a home
air conditioner is performed by the system controller .alpha._1126.
Note that an instruction (command issuance) of setting change
(condition change control) in E-format corresponds to a write
request explained in Section 2.1. Thus, as the communication access
control data ESV (1830) of FIG. 15A (c), [60h] (=no response is
required) or [61h] (=response is required) is set. Furthermore, as
a setting code of the communication access control data ESV (1830),
[62h] is set when the instruction corresponds to a read request,
[73h] is set when the instruction corresponds to a notification,
and [72h] is set when the instruction corresponds to a read
response. The device-type group code DTGC of the home air
conditioner is [01h] which is an air conditioner related device
group. Furthermore, the device-type code DTC is [30h]. When the air
conditioner is assigned as the first air conditioner in the system
.alpha._1132, the same type device identification code DIDC is
[01h]. Thus, when the system controller .alpha._1126 sends a
command 1852 for the condition change control of the home air
conditioner (this corresponds to case 1 of FIG. 10B), the
identification data of the receiver in FIG. 15A (c) indicate
[013001h]. When the air conditioner is activated by the system
controller .alpha._1126, the exchangeable data type identification
data EPC are [80h], data size PDC of individual exchangeable data
are [01h] (=one byte), and individual exchangeable data EDT are
[30h]. When the above data are combined altogether, the initial
control/process data CM-1 are [800130h]. Then, as nth
control/process is set to 26.degree. C., the exchangeable data type
identification data EPC are [B3h], data size PDC of individual
exchangeable data are [01h] (=one byte), and individual
exchangeable data EDT are [1Ah] which indicates 26.degree. C. As
the above data combined altogether, nth control/process data CM-n
are denoted as [B3011A].
[0415] Section 2.7 Data Structure of A-Format in Communication
Middleware Layer
[0416] The main purpose of A-format used in the system of the
present embodiment is, as explained in Chapter 2.1 with reference
to FIG. 16, to be used in the communication middleware layer APL06
which is mainly exchanged with the device 1250 or the server
n_1116-n. However, no limitation is intended thereby. A-format may
be used in data communication between different system controllers
.alpha._1126 and .beta._1128, or may be used in data communication
between combination modules 1460 and 1470. Furthermore, as
explained in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B, the data
communication is performed by exchanging the exchangeable data
(table) 1810 between a sender node and a receiver node. Therefore,
the exchangeable data (table) 1810 (or a part thereof) are stored
in the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU as a part of the communication
middleware data APLDT shown in FIG. 11 (a).
[0417] As shown in FIG. 15B, A-format may be described in an
extensible markup language (XML) format as the communication
middleware data APLDT. In the present application, a text base
description method such as XML or hypertext markup language (HTML)
will be referred to as a text format in a broad sense. In HTML
format, tags are used in the description. However, the text format
in a broad sense does not necessarily include a tag and any
description containing a text format can be interpreted as the text
format in a broad sense. Thus, programs such as Java applet, Java
script, and C language are included in the text format in a broad
sense. By describing the communication middleware data APLDT in the
text format in a broad sense, the versatility and extensibility of
the communication middleware data APLDT can be secured. Thus, in
the system of the present embodiment, A-format is defined as a
forma described in a text format in a broad sense as the
communication data related to the communication middleware layer
APL. Any formats described in the text format in a broad sense are
included in A-format. The exchangeable data (table) 1810 structured
in a table format as in FIG. 10B may be interpreted as a
<table> Element area (area defined by tags from
<table-> to </table>) in FIG. 15B.
[0418] Furthermore, in A-format, <tdl> Element which is a
Root Element may be set as a Parent Element of the <table>
Element. Here, <tdl> is transferring data language.
Furthermore, as in FIG. 15B (b), date of preparation of the
<table> Element may be described using data attribution as
the attribution data of the <tdl> Element. In the description
of FIG. 15B (b), the date of preparation of the table is Dec. 25,
2014.
[0419] Then, as shown in FIG. 15B (b), the number attribution or
the name attribution in the <table> Element corresponds to
the exchangeable data type identification data 1840 shown in FIG.
10B. Note that, in the communication middleware data APLDT
described in A-format, there is not an area to indicate data
corresponding to the device type group code DTGC and the device
type code DTC as in E-format explained in Section 2.6. Instead,
templates of the table defining items to be collected for condition
check and data representation format in the device 1250, or items
of condition change control (setting change) and representation
format of the control data of the device 1250 are finely set with
respect to each device type. A table number and its table name are
designated to each template of the table set finely with respect to
each device type. Here, as described as number="02" in FIG. 15B
(b), a template number of a table may be directly designated by the
number designated by number attribution. Thus, by describing the
number attribution or the name attribution in the <table>
Element, description of the communication middleware data APLDT
automatically matching the template of the table can be performed.
Furthermore, in the system of the present embodiment, an additional
text may be associated with the exchangeable data type
identification data 1840 used for the selection of standard
templates used in data exchange tables. Furthermore, similarly to
the method of associating the template of the table with the type
of device 1250 by designating the value with the number
attribution, the combination module type identification data CMTID
of FIG. 12B (e) may be used for standard template calling for the
data exchange corresponding to the combination modules 1460 and
1470 (which will be described in detail in Section 2.5).
[0420] Here, as an example of the communication data description in
the communication middleware data APLDT conforming to A-format,
periodically-accumulated power value measured by the smart meter
1124 is notified as an accumulated current value (amperes) to a
service provider B_1112-2 (server n_1116-n therein) which is a
power supplier. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the smart meter
1124 is connected to the system controller .alpha._1126 or the
wholesale firm A1102 through the network, the communication data
may be sent to the system controller .alpha._1126 and the wholesale
firm A1102. On the other hand, a voltage value to be supplied is
preliminarily determined depending on the position of the smart
meter 1124 (that is, a voltage value is determined to correspond to
a house, building, or industrial factory), and an accumulated
current value is notified instead of an accumulated power value.
Aside from the example of description of FIG. 15B (b), data
described in a text format in a broad sense can be used in the data
communication between any devices 1250 and any combination modules
1460 and 1470.
[0421] As an example of the notification of the accumulated current
value, a standard table (table template) including a table number
of 2 and a table template name of Device Nameplate Table may be
used in A-format. Furthermore, in A-format, table may be
abbreviated to TEL. Therefore, the number attribution in the
<table> Element will be described as number="02" and the name
attribution will be described as name='DEVICE NAMEPLATE TEL''.
[0422] As described in Section 1.7, a smart meter may notify use
conditions of various kinds of common goods such as gas, clean
water, and sewerage in addition to the power. In the example of the
description in FIG. 15B (b), a type attribution is written
type="E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD", in which RCD means Record of
packedRecord. As described in Section 2.2, the communication
middleware layer data APDLT (or a part thereof) described in FIG.
15B (b) are packed in the MAC layer data/payload MSDU for the
communication. The communication with the communication middleware
layer data APDLT (or a part thereof) packed and recorded in a
physical layer frame PPDU is described as packedRecord. The same
term is used in the number attribution in the <packedRecord>
Element to be described as name="E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD".
[0423] As in Section 2.1 and FIG. 10B and in Section 2.6, A-format
and E-format include the network access control data 1830 in the
exchangeable data (table) 1810. Then, the network access control
data 1830 are associated with the accessibility attribution in the
<table> Element or the <set> Element. Using the
accessibility attribution, a sender node can request any one of
READWRITE, READONLY, and WRITEONLY to a receiver node. Here, READ
is an instruction to read a condition of a receiver node (such as
device 1250 and combination module 1460 and 1470) and to send data
read therein (or notify sensor data), and it corresponds to a read
request in E-format. Furthermore, WRITE is a data replay or an
instruction of condition change setting to the receiver node, and
it corresponds to the notification, read response, or write request
in E-format. Then, READWRITE is used to instruct a sequence
performance of response request 1872/response 1874 in case 2 of
FIG. 10B to the receiver node. Or, in the system of the present
embodiment, a different description text may be associated with the
network access control data 1830. In the example of FIG. 15B (b),
accessibility="WRITEONLY" is set because the accumulated current
value (amperes) data measured by the smart meter 1124 are notified
to the receiver node (such as server n_1116-n, controller
.alpha._1126, or wholesale firm A1102).
[0424] Furthermore, an element in the example of FIG. 15B (b) is an
item such as sensing target data, detection target condition data,
or condition data as control (setting change) target. The element
is described in each <element> Element as to per item
preliminarily designated in a template of a table selected to match
the data contents (data contents designated by number attribution
or name attribution in <table> Element) designated in the
exchangeable data type identification data 1840 in FIG. 10B.
[0425] Here, in preliminarily set table templates with their table
number being 2, the table template defined as
type="E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD" preliminarily includes, as items
defined in <packedRecord> Element, E_KH (periodically
accumulated power), E_KT (test pulse output), E_INPUT_SCALAR
(defining unit of communication data and indicating a compression
rate of the value input by sensors), E_ELEEMNT (local number of
smart meter), E_VOLTS (real time monitoring of instant voltage
value/change in voltage in power transmission system), and E_AMPS
(periodically accumulated current value). In the example of FIG.
15B (b), only E_KH and E_AMPS are defined using <element>
Element.
[0426] Tag <element> Element defining E_KH in the name
attribute states that the notification of power periodically
accumulated by the communication data. As being standardized, what
E_KH means can be interpreted from the description of <element
name="E_KH">. However, <description> Element is set such
that the contents of the exchangeable data (table) 1810 can be
understood without referring to a standard specification. Since
A-format can be described in a text format in a broad sense,
auxiliary explanation can be added by such a broadly used text in
A-format. Therefore, the contents of description can be interpreted
without referring to a standard specification, and the exchangeable
data (table) 1810 can be easily interpreted at the receiver
node.
[0427] As an example of A-format, values are set using <set>
Element. However, no limitation is intended thereby, and values may
be set through a different description method. Furthermore, in
advance to the use of <set> Element, a type of "E_AMPS_RCD"
is defined in <element> Element in which E_KH is defined with
the name attribution (thus, <element name="E_AMP"
type="E_AMPS_RCD"/>) to indicate that the item of a periodically
accumulated current value is packedRecord in the MAC layer
data/payload MSDU and notified. Then, <set> Element is
defined using the same E_AMPS_RCD.
[0428] The periodically accumulated current value measured by the
smart meter 1124 is defined in the value attribute in <enum>
Element (enum is an electrical numerator). Here, the smart meter
1124 automatically substitutes the measured value to $$$$ of
value="$$$$". Furthermore, a variable identifier E_AMPS of the
values set here is designated by the name attribution in
<enumerator> Element.
[0429] As an auxiliary explanation function in A-format,
<description> Element can be cited as aforementioned.
However, no limitation is intended thereby, and such auxiliary
explanation may be performed using label attribution or text
attribution.
[0430] Section 2.8 Address Table Used in System of Present
Embodiment and Example of Use Thereof
[0431] The descriptions in Sections 2.3 to 2.7 indicate that
addresses set in a module may be redundant in each level. FIG. 23
shows data structure of an address table indicating a list of
various addresses set with respect to a sensor mule 1260-1 and an
actuator module 1270-1 of FIG. 8A or an actuator combination module
1470-1 and a sensor combination module 1460-5 of FIG. 8B. As a
method of using the address table, a method described in Section
4.2 may be used aside from the method described in this
section.
[0432] In FIG. 23, vertical columns indicate the redundancy of
various addresses of the actuator combination module 1470-2 and the
sensor combination module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B, and also indicate the
redundancy of various addresses set in the sensor module 1260-1 and
the actuator module 1270-1 of the device 1250-1 of FIG. 8A. Note
that IEEE extension address EXADRS which is one of the address
items in the address table of FIG. 23 is given to the communication
module chip 1202-4 (cf. Section 2.3). Therefore, the IEEE extension
address EXADRS corresponding to the sensor module 1260-1 and the
actuator module 1270-1 of FIG. 23 is associated with the
communication module chip 1202-4 in the same device 1250-1.
[0433] Regarding the address items in the address table of FIG. 23,
an IEEE extension address EXADRS is set individually in a media
access layer MAC02, as explained in Section 2.3. Then, an IP
address IPADRS (sender IP address data SIPADRS/receiver IP address
data DIPADRS) is set individually in an internet protocol version 6
layer IPv6, as explained in Section 2.4. A same type device
identification code DIDC is set in a communication middleware layer
APL056 to conform to E-format explained in Section 2.6.
[0434] In the system of the present embodiment, the system
controller .beta._1128 and the memory 1232 of the system controller
.alpha._1126 include a list of FIG. 23 with the section data
indicative of the current position of each module, and thereby:
[0435] (1) service can be provided efficiently and accurately;
[0436] (2) format conversion in the system controller .beta._1128
and in the system controller .alpha._1126 can be performed easily;
and
[0437] (3) detection of error in the sender node or in nodes on a
communication passage can be performed easily.
[0438] Thus, the credibility of data communication can be improved.
As will be explained in Chapter 4, service can be provided with
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m individually. Thus, when conditions
of devices 1250 and actuator combination modules 1470 are
controlled (setting conditions are changed) in each section 1142 as
a form of the service, the condition control (change of setting
condition) of target devices 1250 and target actuator combination
modules 1470 can be very easily performed using the data of FIG.
23.
[0439] Furthermore, as explained in Section 2.1, if the data
communication is performed through different network lines
(in-system network line 1782/out-system network line 1788/in-domain
network line 2082), format may be changed during the data
communication. Such a format change can be performed smoothly and
accurately with the data of FIG. 23.
[0440] Now, a specific example of data communication will be given
with a case where the data communication is performed between a
device 1250 or combination modules 1460 and 1470 in the system
.alpha._1132 and a system controller .beta._1128 in the system
.beta._1134. During the data communication, a format conversion is
performed in the system controller .alpha._1126 performing the data
relay. However, in the system of the present embodiment, the data
of FIG. 23 can be used in any type of network communications. As a
precondition, a case where the data of FIG. 23 are preliminarily
stored in the memory 1232 in both the system controllers
.alpha._1126 and .beta._1128 is given. Even if the location of the
system controller .beta._1128 is greatly distant from the system
.alpha._1132, the system controller .beta._1128 can recognize what
kind of data can be collected from the system .alpha._1132 and what
kind of condition control (change of condition setting) can be
performed using the data of FIG. 23. Furthermore, since the
internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 can be used in the entire
data communication, the IP address data IPADRS are set in advance
in the system controller .beta._1128, devices 1250, and combination
modules 1460 and 1470.
[0441] Now, a method of converting C-format to E-format in the
communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 in the system
controller .alpha._1126 during the data communication will be
explained. As explained in Section 2.5, C-format does not include
any address data, and thus data necessary for setting E-format
cannot be obtained from C-format. However, data related to E-format
are preliminarily recorded in the table of FIG. 23. Thus, data
conforming to E-format are prepared in the system controller
.alpha._1126 (specifically, in the processor 1230 thereof) using
the device type group code DTGC, device type code DTC, and same
type device identification code DIDC in the table of FIG. 23.
[0442] In contrast, a case where A-format, E-format, or W-format is
conversed into C-format will be explained. As explained in Section
2.5, when C-format is used in the combination modules 1460 and
1470, expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS of FIG. 12B (d) and
(e), which is defined by the levels other than the communication
middleware layer APL02, is used. However, a C-format conforming
process can be performed smoothly if IEEE extension address EXADRS
of each of the combination modules 1460 and 1470 in the table of
FIG. 23. If any format which does not include an expanded IEEE
extension address EXEXADRS in the IEEE extension address EXADRS
should be used, the attribution data of the combination modules
1460 and 1470 still can obtained through the internet using the
IEEE 802.15.4 conformable per-chip address ADRSIEEE. Of course, no
limitation is intended thereby, and any other method may be used
instead. That is, since the internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6
is common in the entire data communication in the system of the
present embodiment, data of the expanded IEEE extension address
EXEXADRS of FIG. 12B (d) can be preliminarily stored in the
communication class data IPCLS of FIG. 13 (d) as explained in
Section 2.4 (even if the data communication is performed using a
format other than C-format).
[0443] Now, a method of converting a format in the system
controller .alpha._1126 (specifically, in the processor 1230
thereof) in relation to the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 and the
media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 will be explained. In that
case, only physical layers and media access layers are switched
using the data of the table of FIG. 23 on the basis of the common
IP address IPADRS designated by the internet protocol version 6
layer IPv6. That is, sender IP address data SIPADRS and receiver IP
address data DIPADRS (cf. FIG. 13 (b)) are stored in common in the
IPv6 header IPV6HD in the system of the present embodiment,
regardless of communication middle path. Thus, receiver PAN unique
data PANID and receiver IEEE extension address EXEADRS used in
Z-format can be extracted from the data in the table of FIG. 23 by
referring to the receiver IP address data DIPADRS.
[0444] The reliability of the data communication through network
lines can be improved using the data in the table of FIG. 23, and
this point will be explained in this final part of this section. If
an error should occur in the sender node or in data relaying nodes
in the middle of the communication path (including the system
controller .alpha._1126), inappropriate data may be incorporated in
a part of the communication data shown in FIGS. 12A to 15B, and
this will block the data communication in the network system.
However, such an error in the communication data and a position of
error can be very easily specified by the verification of the
communication data using the data in the table of FIG. 23 performed
by the system controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128. As a
result, the reliability of the data communication can be
improved.
[0445] Chapter 3 Management/Display Method for Each Unit
[0446] Section 3.1 Outline of Basic Unit Management Method
[0447] As described in Section 1.1 with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2,
the system of the present embodiment comprises a hierarchical
structure of "domain/system/section/unit/device or combination
module". That is, domain 2_1122-2 is composed of at least one
system .alpha._1132, and one system can be divided into the
sections 1142. Then, unit 1290 is arranged for each of the sections
1142. Device 1250, combination module 1295 or a mixed system
thereof is accepted as a specific form of unit 1290. Furthermore,
system controller .alpha._1126, which manages or controls network
communication in system .alpha._1132, or acquires data of the
network communication, is present, and manages unit 1290. Here,
alternative management/control/data acquisition of another system
controller .beta._1128 can also be properly performed to handle an
unexpected situation such as a power failure or a breakdown.
Furthermore, "movable" or "arrangement of the outside of
corresponding system .alpha._1132 at least for a temporary period"
is accepted for alternative system controller .beta._1128.
[0448] In the system of the present embodiment, units are managed
for each of systems .alpha._1132, as the management method of units
based on the hierarchical structure. As described above, system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) manages
or controls the network communication for each system, or acquires
data of the network communication. Thus, as described above, an
advantage is found in that convenience concerning the
management/control/data acquisition of the network communication of
system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128)
can be improved by collectively managing all units 1290 included in
the same system .alpha._1132 by the unit of system
.alpha._1132.
[0449] Alternatively, an advantage is also found in that a unit
1290 to be managed in system .alpha._1132 is switched depending on
units 1290 which enters or leaves system .alpha._1132 using plug-in
processing, plug-out processing or check-in processing to be
described later in Section 4.2. That is, when a specific unit 1290
enters system .alpha._1132, system controller .alpha._1126 (or
system controller .beta._1128) automatically detect it, and
automatically registers specific unit 1290 as a unit 1290 to be
managed of system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128). On the contrary, when another predetermined unit 1290
goes out of system .alpha._1132, system controller .alpha._1126 (or
system controller .beta._1128) automatically detects it, and
automatically deletes predetermined unit 1290 from unit 1290 to be
managed of system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128).
[0450] This allows the network communication in specific system
.alpha._1132 to be managed with stability and high reliability
kept, even if a plurality of units 1290 frequently enter or leave
specific system .alpha._1132.
[0451] For example, when an external hard disk device, an external
optical disk device, a USB memory device, or the like is connected
to a conventional computer system, it is automatically recognized
(plug-in processing) as a new additional drive (for example, D
drive or E drive), and managed as a drive. If the small number of
units 1290 are included in the same system .alpha._1132, each of
units 1290 may be managed as an individual drive as described
above. However, in the system of the present embodiment, a large
number of units 1290 can be included in the same system
.alpha._1132. If units 1290 are successively added as drives in the
same system .alpha._1132, for example, a D drive, an E drive, . . .
, as described above, the drive management will fail after a Z
drive is added. Units 1290 managed using the conventional art in
this manner comprises the following problem (A):
[0452] (A) It is impossible to handle increase of the number of
units 1290 in the same system .alpha._1132.
[0453] When port allocation for network communication control,
etc., is also taken into consideration as well as the drive
management, the following related problem (B) arises:
[0454] (B) As the number of units 1290 increases, corresponding
port allocation fails.
[0455] When unique and novel measures are taken to avoid problems
(A) and (B), the following problem further arises:
[0456] (C) Compatibility with management method in conventional
computer system is lost.
[0457] To simultaneously solve problems (A) to (C), units are
managed by a method similar to that of managing files through a
computer network in the present embodiment. One unit 1290 is
considered to be nearly equal to one pseudo file. The processing of
predetermined data acquisition (for example, gathering of sensor
data) from unit 1290 viewed from system controller .alpha._1126 (or
system controller .beta._1128) which manages unit 1290 is managed
as data reproduction (READ) processing from unit 1290. Similarly,
the processing of changing (controlling) a setting condition to
unit 1290 viewed from system controller .alpha._1126 (or system
controller .beta._1128) which manages unit 1290 is managed as
writing (WRITE) processing of setting condition data (content to be
controlled) after change of unit 1290.
[0458] Here, a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is often specified to
specify a file storage position on the network when files are
managed through a computer network. However, the position of unit
1290 is determined to be in the same system .alpha._1132, and thus,
system .alpha._1132 to be managed is allocated as one drive, folder
or directory, instead of specifying URL in the present embodiment.
If an individual drive is allocated for each of units 1290 as in
(A), it will be hard to handle the increase of the number of units
1290. However, if only a single drive, folder or directory is
allocated to one system .alpha._1132 as described above, the
increase of the number of units 1290 can be flexibly handled.
Further, a failure does not occur in the port allocation, producing
an advantage of securing compatibility with the management method
in the conventional computer world.
[0459] Next, a method of realizing the basic concept is described.
There is a method of defining a new unit management-capable
application interface (API) to apply the management method of unit
1290 by application software in which a computer network is used.
Alternatively, a new unit management-capable built-in function or a
subprogram which can be referred to or utilized may be defined. A
program called a "subroutine" may be used as a subprogram which can
be referred to or utilized from the other program. Furthermore, the
built-in function may be a program called "function" or a
predetermined program called "method" which is built in specific
application software (specific class) and used using
JavaScript.
[0460] Section 3.2 Unit Management Means
[0461] The basic concept of the unit management described in
Section 3.1 is realized not only by the above application software
but by hardware to be described below.
[0462] FIG. 18A shows a hardware configuration and a software
hierarchical structure around the conventional computer system.
Processor 3010 in a computer is connected to a communication
controller 3028 and a recording medium controller 3024 through a
busline 3012. Mutual communication of device drive (commonly called
debadora)-capable command/status data is performed between
processor 3010 and the recording medium controller 3024 through a
connector 3018 directly connected to the busline 3012. The
recording medium controller 3024 decodes it, and directly drives a
recording medium (hardware) 3014. Here, a hard disk, an optical
disk, a flash drive, etc., are cited as a specific example of the
recording medium (hardware) 3014.
[0463] The data communication executor 3016 indicates a portion in
which network communication is actually executed, and comprises
communication means based on wired or wireless communication
medium. The data communication executor 3016 is controlled by
processor 3010 in the same manner as the above.
[0464] As conventional computer control by software, an operating
system (OS) layer 3030 comprises a device driver area 3022 engaged
in the control of the recording medium (hardware) 3014, and a
communication driver area 3026 engaged in the control of the data
communication executor 3016. On the other hand, an application
software 3050 issues an application programming interface (API)
command 3045 to the OS layer 3030, and executes the application
software 3050.
[0465] System controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128) comprises a great advantage, in comparison with the
conventional art, that both data communication control by use of
the out-system network line 1788 and that by use of the in-system
network line 1782 are used as shown in FIG. 10A. Then, both an
out-system connection-capable data communication executor 3017 and
an in-system connection-capable data communication executor 3015
are included as shown in FIG. 18B. In FIG. 18B, both of them are
separately shown for convenience. However, no limitation is
intended thereby, and the out-system connection-capable data
communication executor 3017 and the in-system connection-capable
data communication executor 3015 may be overlapped/shared, or one
may be substantially included in the other, which is expressed as
broad inclusion.
[0466] The out-system connection-capable data communication
executor 3017 and the in-system connection-capable data
communication executor 3015 in FIG. 18B mean a transceiver of a
wireless radio wave (including detection) or a communication data
transceiver of wire communication. Thus, an out-system
connection-capable communication controller 3029 and an in-system
connection-capable communication controller 3021 which control them
are present. In the figure, a predetermined program area
corresponding to an out-system connection-capable communication
driver area 3027 and that corresponding to an in-system
connection-capable communication driver area 3025 are present in
the OS layer 3030 for convenience. However, an independent
subprogram is not necessarily present. Both of them may be
partially shared, or a program step of one of them may be
overlapped/shared with a program area corresponding to a Basic
Input/Output System (BIOS) control area 3020.
[0467] To realize the outline of operation described in Section
3.1, a management/control area of in-system unit 3034 corresponding
to a virtual device driver area (the term "device driver" which
corresponds to a recording device is used for management for each
unit as a pseudo file) is (physically really or virtually) formed
in the embodiment of FIG. 18B. The management/control area of
in-system unit 3034 is composed of (at least part of) processor
3010 with a hardware structure comprising a control program
corresponding to the in-system connection-capable communication
driver area 3025, the in-system connection-capable communication
controller 3021, and the busline 3012 (including the connector
3018) which connects both of them.
[0468] The structure in the management/control area of in-system
unit 3034 corresponds to the processor combination module 1465
described with reference to FIG. 4D. That is, as has already been
described in Section 1.3, a portion engaged with network
communication by use of the in-system network line 1782 in system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) forms
combination module 1295 called the processor combination module
1465.
[0469] Even if a special line of the in-system network line 1782 is
used, it is considered that the portion engaged with the network
communication should be regarded as part of the communication
controller 3028 or the communication driver area 3026 of FIG. 18A
in the conventional art. However, as described in Section 3.1, if
unit 1290 is managed by considering it to be nearly equal to one
pseudo file, the management/control area of in-system unit 3034 is
functionally close to the device driver area 3022 in FIG. 18A.
Thus, at least part of the management/control area of in-system
unit 3034 is included in a device drive area 3022 in the OS layer
3030 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 18B. As shown in FIG. 18B,
part of a control program corresponding to an existing device
driver area 3022 may be used to manage unit 1290. Alternatively,
part of the control program corresponding to an existing BIOS
control area 3020 may be used to manage unit 1290 (that is, part of
the control program corresponding to the BIOS control area 3020 may
be included in the management/control area of in-system unit
3034).
[0470] In the embodiment of FIG. 18B, a predetermined OS is used in
system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128).
However, no limitation is intended thereby, and system controller
.alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) may be executed
without using any existing OS.
[0471] The applied example of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 19A and
19B indicates means for managing unit 1290 using JavaScript. A Java
Virtual Machine (JVM) is placed in each of corresponding processors
3010 instead of using a predetermined OS in this JavaScript. The
program environment executed herein is composed of a class group
3160, and, for example, a main method 3148 in an application class
3158 is executed in accordance with a user request. The class group
3160 comprises various programs written in JavaScript.
[0472] In FIG. 19A, processor 3010 and the in-system
connection-capable data communication executor 3015 are hardware.
The operation of the in-system connection-capable data
communication executor 3015 is controlled by the in-system
connection-capable communication controller 3021.
[0473] In the conventional art, a program engaged with file
management in the class group 3160 is stored in a file class 3154
composed of a plurality of instance method groups in the file class
3144. On the other hand, in the applied example of the embodiment,
a management/control class in the in-system unit 3150 for managing
unit 1290 is newly set in the class group 3160. An area in which a
method group relating to management/control of units 3140 is stored
is present in the management/control class in the in-system unit
3150. A program for executing segmentalized operations related to
management/control of unit 1290 is present as various methods. A
group of these various methods is called a method group, and forms
the method group relating to management/control of units 3140.
[0474] Next, the relationship between a program 3188 described in
the main method 3148 in the application class 3158 and the method
group relating to management/control of units 3140 is described
with reference to FIG. 19B.
[0475] When the application class 3158 is started, import
processings 3174 and 3170 (import processing) of a prespecified
file class 3154 and the management/control class in the in-system
unit 3150 newly suggested in the applied example of the present
embodiment is performed. The instance method group in the file
class 3144 included in the incorporated (imported) file class 3154
and the method group relating to management/control of units 3140
included in the management/control class in the in-system unit 3150
can be used in the application class 3158.
[0476] Next, a file system can be effectively executed with
reference 3194 to a predetermined method in an instance method
group in the file class 3144 from a program step 3188 described in
the main method 3148. Similarly, management/control/data
acquisition of unit 1290 can be effectively performed with
reference 3190 to a specific method included in a method group
relating to management/control of units 3140 from another program
step 3188 described in the main method 3148.
[0477] In the applied example of the present embodiment, a
predetermined organization different from the user creates a
program compatible with the management/control class in the
in-system unit 3150 in advance, and properly additionally installs
it in system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128) over the Internet. Furthermore, since the program step
3188 which makes reference 3190 to a specific method in the method
group relating to management/control of units 3140 in a main method
3148 comprises one line (several lines at most), the
management/control/data acquisition of unit 1290 in the application
class 3158 can be performed very easily. The use of the method
produces an advantage that management/control/data acquisition
means of unit 1290 can be easily incorporated without substantially
placing a burden on a software developer of system controller
.alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128).
[0478] FIG. 20 shows comparison between an existing file system and
the unit management method in the present embodiment. Basic
management data is stored in a storage medium in the existing file
system, while being stored in memory 1232 of system controller
.alpha._1126 in the unit management method of the present
embodiment. Next, a method of accessing content (predetermined file
in file system, and predetermined unit in unit management) is
described. In the existing file system, a file name (including URL
where a file is stored) is specified, and a range in which
predetermined data in the file is recorded is specified by a
relative address range in the file. On the other hand, in the unit
management method of the present embodiment, an address of a
corresponding unit is specified. The specified address means an
address described in the address table of FIG. 23 (for example, IP
address IPADRS or IEEE extended address EXADRS). Since the size of
data of unit 1290 (setting condition data and sensor data to be
changed) is relatively small in the unit management method of the
present embodiment, data is read/written as a whole unit 1290. This
produces an advantage that the management/control/data acquisition
is greatly simplified in comparison with the existing file
system.
[0479] Management data for managing a whole file or the whole unit
1290 corresponds to file management data such as a file allocation
table (FAT) and a universal disk format (UDF) in the existing file
system, and corresponds to the address table in FIG. 23 in the unit
management method of the present embodiment. Here, data to be
read/changed corresponds to content (data) in a file in the
existing file system, and corresponds to sensor data and various
types of state data/setting status (to be changed) in the unit
management method of the present embodiment. Alternatively, the
exchangeable data (table) 1810 shown in FIG. 10B is also included
in the data to be read/changed in the unit management method of the
present embodiment.
[0480] The unit management method of the existing file system and
that of the present embodiment are greatly different from each
other in presence of a function of listing the whole content. That
is, in the existing file system, a list of file names can be known
by the file management data, but the whole file content cannot be
easily known. Thus, it is necessary to open all the files one by
one, and to newly summarize content in order to know all the file
content, which requires much effort. On the other hand, since the
unit management method of the present embodiment comprises the
time-series data tracking table of FIG. 28, the whole content of
unit 1290 can be instantly understood. The unit management method
of the present embodiment comprises the means for uniquely
understanding the whole content of unit 1290 as described above,
producing an advantage that the management/control/data acquisition
of the whole unit 1290 in system .alpha._1132 can be quickly and
easily performed.
[0481] Section 3.3 Specific Unit Management Example and Display
Example
[0482] In many cases, system controller .alpha._1126 (or system
controller .beta._1128) automatically acquires data from unit 1290
and controls unit 1290. However, the user sometimes wants to
manually control specific unit 1290, and to acquire data from
specific unit 1290. In that case, a display example of a management
screen of unit 1290 displayed in the user interface 1234 of system
controller .alpha._1126 shown in FIG. 2 is described below. A
display screen example is described below. However, a similar
method may be used as a management method for each of units 1290
based on system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128).
[0483] As has already been described in Section 3.1, only a single
drive, folder or directory is allocated to one system .alpha._1132
in the present embodiment. FIG. 21A shows the situation. A
plurality of units 1290 in system .alpha._1132 which comprise
various hierarchical structures (hierarchical structures as a
folder or those as a directory structure) ease management.
[0484] FIG. 21A (a) shows an example of unit 1290 hierarchized
(folder/directory division) for content, and FIG. 21A (b) shows an
example hierarchized (folder/directory division) for each of
sections 1142 divided in the same system .alpha._1132. However, no
limitation is intended thereby. It can be properly hierarchized
(folder/directory division) in accordance with convenience of the
user.
[0485] FIGS. 21B to 21D show a display/management example when the
folder moves to a low-level folder in accordance with the hierarchy
(folder/directory division) of FIG. 21A (a). In the
display/management example of FIG. 21A (a), a list data folder 2610
in which the address table in FIG. 23, the estimation/determination
collating table in FIG. 27, and the time-series data tracking table
in FIG. 28 are collectively stored, and folders divided for each
form of unit 1290 are arranged in "T drive" corresponding to a unit
management virtual drive. As has already been described in Section
1.2 with reference to FIG. 3A, the form of unit 1290 comprises
device 1250, combination module 1295, a mixed form thereof, and
others. In FIG. 21A (a), a device folder 2612 and a combination
module folder 2614 are arranged based on it.
[0486] Next, of these folders, a display example (internal
structure) of the folder corresponding to combination modules 2614
is shown in FIG. 21B. As has already been described in Section 1.3,
a form such as the sensor combination module 1460, the actuator
combination module 1470, the processor combination module 1465, the
memory combination module 1475, or the display combination module
1478 is accepted as the form of combination module 1295. Thus, in
FIG. 21B, a sensor combination module folder 2622, an actuator
combination module folder 2624, a processor combination module
folder 2626, a memory combination module folder 2628, and a folder
corresponding to another functional combination module folder 2630
are correspondingly arranged, and managed in accordance with
them.
[0487] Of these folders, a display example (internal structure) of
the sensor combination module folder 2622 is shown in FIG. 21C. As
has already been described in Section 2.5, two types of sensor data
are detected by the sensor combination module 1460 and acquired,
that is, in a case of binary data and a case of multivalued data.
In FIG. 21C, a binary data folder 2634 and a multivalued data
folder 2638 are correspondingly arranged and managed in accordance
with them.
[0488] In FIG. 21D (a), all the sensor combination modules 1460
included in the binary data folder 2634 are arranged as pseudo
files. The display/management made in this manner produces an
advantage that management/control/data acquisition can be performed
very easily by one unit 1290. Content of sensor data
detected/acquired by the sensor combination module 2_1460-2 can be
displayed to the user as in FIG. 21D (b) by, for example, clicking
a conventional file to open it. Here, when the actuator combination
module 1470 is opened, current setting status is displayed. Then,
control (setting condition change) can be easily performed by
pasting (inserting) another numerical value in a display area of
FIG. 21D (b) concerning unit 1290 which can control (change a
setting condition of) the actuator combination module 1470, etc.
Applying such a display method and a management method produces an
advantage of enabling the user to control (change the setting
condition of) a specific unit 1290 very easily and quickly.
[0489] Chapter 4 Outline of Section in System of Present
Embodiment
[0490] This part describes first the basic concept of a section in
the system of the present embodiment. Then, it describes methods of
collecting data and of offering services using the idea of the
section. It finally describes a method of detecting a position of a
source node using a radio wave generated from the source node, and
services by use of it.
[0491] Section 4.1 Position of Section in System of Present
Embodiment
[0492] The section in the system of the present embodiment is
defined as at least one of a unit related to integration or
management of data collected in a system, and a unit related to
services offered in a system. Thus, a unit corresponding to the
section may be used not only to integrate/manage the collected data
but also to offer services. To carry out both purposes, services
may be offered to the user in conjunction with (or based on) an
integration/management result of the collected data.
[0493] The unit may be a collection related to a function
concerning the data acquisition or the service offering in the same
system. Alternatively, another form of the unit may be a collection
related to predetermined space in the same system. The collection
related to the space may be specifically predetermined continuous
space in the same system. Alternatively, the collection related to
the space may be specifically, for example, a predetermined group
of collections of discretely-distributed continuous space (like
stepping stones). In this case, dispersed distribution may be mixed
between section 1_1122-1 and section 2_1122-2 which are different
from each other in the same system .alpha._1132.
[0494] As shown in FIG. 1, the same system .alpha._1132 is composed
of at least one section. Thus, the whole system .alpha._1132 may
spatially completely overlap one section 1_1122-1, and may be
divided into a plurality of sections 1_1122-1 to m_1122-m.
Alternatively, different sections 1_1122-1 to m_1122-m may be
partially spatially overlap each other.
[0495] First, the position of the section is described with an
example shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B. FIGS. 25A and 25B show a
building divided into two rooms. Spatial units, section 1_1122-1
(left room) and section 2_1122-2 (right room) are added to the
rooms. Suppose a light device is turned on in the left room
(section 1_1122-1) and turned off in the right room (section
2_1122-2) as shown in FIG. 25A. Then, suppose a plurality of
optical sensors are arranged in both sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2
(sensor module 1260 comprising a light detection function may be
included in device 1250 (FIG. 1), or sensor combination module 1460
may be formed as shown in FIG. 8B). When system controller
.alpha._1126 integrates/manages sensor data obtained from an
optical sensor arranged in section 1_1122-1, large light amount
detection data is obtained from all the sensor data. Conversely,
small light amount detection data is merely obtained from all
optical sensors arranged in section 2_1122-2. The sensor data
obtained from sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2 comprises a
communality as described above. Various sensor data obtained from
each of sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2 is integrated or managed to
estimate/determine conditions in each of sections 1_1122-1 and
2_1122-2 in the system of the present embodiment. The accuracy of
the estimation/determination is improved using a result obtained by
integrating or managing a plurality of data items acquired from
section 1122 to estimate/determine the conditions in the same
section 1122.
[0496] Next, a case where air conditioning is performed using only
an air-conditioner provided in section 1_1122-1 as shown in FIG.
25B under very cold outdoor conditions is assumed. In this case,
since the air conditioning is not performed in section 2_1122-2,
services of warmth are not offered to the user in the right room.
Conversely, the services of warmth are offered in common to the
user in the left room wherever the user is. The same services are
often offered in the same section 1122 in this manner. Controlling
the service offering for each section 1122 to the user in the
system of the present embodiment in this manner produces an
advantage of easily managing services to the user in the same
system .alpha._1132. Further, detailed services can be offered to
the user, in comparison with the services offered in the whole
system .alpha._1132, by carrying out the services by the unit of
sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m, improving end-user satisfaction.
[0497] Although a room is used to describe the section, no
limitation is intended thereby in the system of the present
embodiment. Any spatial unit meeting the above definition may be
applied to the section.
[0498] In the system of the present embodiment, system controller
.alpha._1126 configured to control or manage network communication
in network system .alpha._1132, or to acquire data of the network
communication may partition system .alpha._1132 into sections
1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. As described above, system controller
.alpha._1126 can automatically partition it into sections 1_1142-1
to m_1142-m by automatically detecting a range in which it is
darkened at the same time, a range in which it is lightened at the
same time, a range in which a temperature increases or decreases at
the same time, or the like. Alternatively, it may be partitioned
based on a result of a photo taken with a camera, etc. However, no
limitation is intended thereby, and it may be partitioned into
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m by direct designation of the
user.
[0499] Section 4.2 Method of Managing Position in Section of
Various Modules or Devices
[0500] As described in the above example, it is necessary to know
in advance which of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m comprises each of
units 1290 (device 1250 and combination modules 1295, 1460 and
1470) in order to acquire data in system .alpha._1132 corresponding
to system controller .alpha._1126, and to estimate/determine
conditions for each of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. To realizing
it, data of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m arranged in at least one
unit 1290 (device 1250 and combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470)
in the same system .alpha._1132 is managed. This is differently
expressed below. That is, system controller .alpha._1126 (FIG. 1)
configured to acquire and manage uniquely acquired and created data
(corresponding to function of the different function module 1440 in
FIG. 4A) from a plurality of units 1290 (FIG. 2) comprising a
function of communicating the data (by communication module 1660 in
FIG. 4A) partitions it into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m for each
of units 1290, manages it, and holds data concerning sections
1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each of units 1290 belongs.
[0501] From the perspective of system .alpha._1132 (client system),
this client system (system .alpha._1132) comprises system
controller .alpha._1126 which is connectable to an external cloud
(server n_1116-n) and configured to manage data, and unit 1290
comprising a function of acquiring or creating data provided to
system controller .alpha._1126 to transmit it, wherein the system
controller .alpha._1126 partitions unit 1290 into sections 1_1142-1
to m_1142-m, manages it, and holds data concerning the sections to
which each of the units 1290 belongs.
[0502] The data concerning the sections of each of units 1290
corresponds to the address table in FIG. 23 to be described.
[0503] In Section 4.2, the management method for realizing the
above is mainly described. The following description is premised on
a system model in which system controller .alpha._1126 placed in
system .alpha._1132 shown in FIGS. 2, 8A and 8B manages, operates
or controls network communication system .alpha._1132.
Alternatively, the description may be applied to a system model in
which system controller .beta._1128 or server n_1116-n placed
outside system .alpha._1132 in FIG. 9 manages, operates or controls
network communication system .alpha._1132 through the router
(gateway) 1300. In this case, system controller .alpha._1126 in the
description can be replaced with system controller .beta._1128 or
server n_1116-n.
[0504] The address table in FIG. 23 to be described later is
pre-recorded in memory 1232 in system controller .alpha._1126 shown
in FIG. 2 (and in system controller .beta._1128 of FIG. 1) to
manage unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or
1470) arranged in each of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. FIG. 23
shows an example of the address table in which sensor combination
modules 1460-1 to 5 and actuator combination modules 1470-1 and 2
shown in FIG. 8B, and devices 1250-1 to 3 shown in FIG. 8A are
mixed and arranged in the same system .alpha._1132. In the system
of the present embodiment, sensor modules 1260-1 and 2 can be in
one device 1250-1, as shown in FIG. 8A. Different types of sensor
data is obtained from sensor modules 1260-1 and 2. Thus, to acquire
various types of data and to estimate/determine the conditions of
each section 1142, data of section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in which
individual sensor modules 1260-1 to 5 or individual actuator module
1270-1 included in devices 1250-1 to 3 are placed is preferably
managed, without managing a position of devices 1250-1 to 3 by the
address table.
[0505] In the address table of FIG. 23, the section position in
which sensor module 1260-1, actuator module 1270-1, actuator
combination module 1470-2, and sensor combination module 1460-5 are
arranged is collectively described in the row of the section data.
It is understood from this that sensor module 1260-1 is arranged in
section 2_1142-2. In the system of the present embodiment, various
combination modules 1460 and 1470, each sensor module 1260 and each
actuator module 1270 which are arranged in each section 1142 are
managed in real time through the creation and maintenance of the
address table. However, no limitation is intended thereby in the
system of the present embodiment, and a management method of any
position which can be managed by system controller .alpha._1126 may
be used.
[0506] Different systems (client systems) can be present at the
same time in the system of the present embodiment. Combination of
the above, a result comprising also content described in FIG. 2,
and the address table (FIG. 23) produces the client system (system
.alpha._1132) which is a complex client system (corresponding to
domain 2_1122-2 in FIG. 1) comprising a plurality of client systems
.alpha._1132 (client system .alpha._1126 and client system
.beta._1134) comprising unit 1290 which is connectable to an
external cloud (server n_1116-n) and comprises a function (by
communication module 1660 in FIG. 4A) of communicating uniquely
acquired or created data, and system controller .alpha._1126
configured to acquire and manage the data from unit 1290, and can
transmit the uniquely acquired or created data to system controller
.alpha._1126, wherein system controller .alpha._1126 configured to
manage client system .alpha._1132 included in the complex client
system (domain 2_1122-2) partitions a plurality of units 1290-1 to
-7 into sections (section 1_1142-1, section 2_1142-1, and section
m_1142-m in FIG. 2), manages them, and holds data (address table in
FIG. 23) concerning the sections to which each of the units
belongs.
[0507] Next, FIG. 22 shows methods of creating and maintaining the
address table. In Step 101, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in the
same system_1132 are defined. In the system of the present
embodiment, the sections are defined first (Step 101), then
positional data is set or managed for each section 1142 based on
the definition (Step 102 or 103). Managing positions of various
modules and devices in accordance with a section division state
first defined in this manner produces an advantage that a state is
easily estimated or determined for each section in real time. In
addition, another advantage that positions of various modules or
devices are easily managed is produced.
[0508] As described later in, especially, Section 5.2.3, different
section definition methods can be present in the same area in the
social infrastructure sector. That is, in the example of FIG. 35, a
plurality of definition methods such as a method of dividing
section 1142 along a water pipe, and a method of dividing section
1142 along a path of power supply lines can be present, instead of
setting each section 1142 based on an address on a map. Thus, in
the social infrastructure sector, the method of dividing section
1142 is preferably defined uniquely for each intended purpose based
on any standard data such as map data.
[0509] Conversely, in the consumer sector, a section may be
automatically defined, as in a room assignment in a house, in
accordance with the definition of the user as a definition method
of section 1142. For example, the user makes a video inside his
house with a video camera (or camera-equipped smartphone, tablet,
or mobile phone) with a GPS function, and section 1142 is
automatically defined as shown in FIG. 24 by automatically
analyzing the video. In the above example, the user specifies the
definition method of section 1142. However, no limitation is
intended thereby in the present embodiment, and, for example,
division of section 1142 may be predefined by room assignment by
default. The default setting reduces the burden of the user in Step
101. Alternatively, the user may partially modify the section
division method using the user interface 1234 in system controller
.alpha._1126 of FIG. 8A, after the section is automatically divided
in accordance with the default section division method.
Alternatively, central positional data of an individual room may be
input using the GPS function to analyze the input result and
automatically define a section. As well as the above method,
physical spatial positional data of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m
may be obtained by any method in the present embodiment. For
example, the above method requires any assistance of the user to
define a section. However, physical spatial positional data of
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be obtained without any
assistance of the user. As an example of the specific method, room
assignment and positional data may be measured, while a robot
cleaner with a camera and a GPS function cleans rooms (section
1142) in a predetermined house. This method allows the physical
spatial positional data of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to be
easily obtained without any assistance of the user.
[0510] Further, as another applied example of the present
embodiment, the section may be automatically defined using data
obtained from various units 1290 (combination modules 1295, 1460
and 1470, and device 1250) without defining the section first (Step
101). That is, at least part of various combination modules 1460
and 1470, and various devices 1250 which are arranged in system
.alpha._1132 are operated first, and then, section 1142 is divided.
The user is not conscious of the section definition in the same
system (Step 101), reducing a psychological burden of the user. The
method is specifically described below. As will be described later,
system controller .alpha._1126 can ascertain positional data of
various combination modules 1460 and 1470, and various devices 1250
in real time by initialization (Step 102) or automatic tracking of
a moving position (Step 103). Further, as described in Section 4.1
with reference to FIG. 25 (a), when the user moves and the state in
section 2_1142-2 changes, state change related data is obtained as
a result of synchronization of combination modules 1460 and 1470
and devices 1250 arranged in it. Thus, relevance of the positions
of various combination modules 1460 and 1470 and various devices
1250 can be expected by synchronism of change of data (such as
sense data or state setting control data) obtained from units 1290
(combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470, and devices 1250)
arranged in system .alpha._1132. A position relationship of units
1290 (combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470, and devices 1250)
arranged in the same section 1142 can be estimated/determined with
accuracy by repeating the synchronism detection with time a
plurality of times. System controller .alpha._1126 enters the
estimation/determination result in a section data field in the
address table of FIG. 23.
[0511] Then, an initialization method (check-in method) of various
units 1290 (combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470, and devices
1250) corresponding to Step 102 in FIG. 22 is described. Sensor
combination module 1460 of FIG. 5 may comprise the near-field
communication module 1560 compatible with near-field radio such as
TransferJet of the proximity radio transfer technique and FeliCa
(coined word consisting of Felicity and Card) conforming to the
contactless IC card standard. Although it is not shown, actuator
combination module 1670 and device 1250 may comprise a similar
near-field communication module 1560. Communication with the
near-field communication module 1560 may be performed by moving a
portable external device with the GPS function (not shown) close at
the time of initialization in system .alpha._1132 when combination
module 1460 or 1470, or device 1250 according to one embodiment in
the system of the present embodiment is newly placed. The portable
external device comprises communication module 1202 which can
communicate data with system controller .alpha._1126 through the
in-system network line 1782 (refer to description in Section 2.1
with reference to FIG. 10A), along with the near-field
communication module 1560 compatible with the near-field radio.
System controller .alpha._1126 automatically registers the IP
address data IPADRS of new combination module 1460 or 1470, or
device 1250 (to be initialized) (refer to description in Section
2.4 with reference to FIG. 13 for details) at the time of
initialization. When the near-field communication is performed,
each of (1) the newly registered IP address data IPADRS, (2) the IP
address data IPADRS on the side of system controller .alpha._1126,
(3) the identification data PANID specific to PAN of a position of
the current portable external device (refer to description in
Section 2.3 with reference to FIG. 12A), (4) the identification
data PANID specific to PAN corresponding to a position where system
controller .alpha._1126 is placed, and (5) the IEEE extended
address EXADRS of system controller .alpha._1126 is transmitted
from system controller .alpha._1126 to new combination module 1460
or 1470, or device 1250. Further, (6) the IEEE extended address
EXADRS of its own is transmitted from new combination module 1460
or 1470, or device 1250 (to be initialized) to system controller
.alpha._1126 using the near-field communication. As described
above, data communication with the in-system network line 1782 is
prepared by exchanging data between both of them using means such
as the near-field communication at the time of initialization (Step
102). Although the near-field communication is used as an example
of the data exchange method at the time of initialization, data may
be exchanged in other ways at the time of initialization.
Alternatively, provisional communication is first performed on the
in-system network line 1782 using a provisional address, and a
regular address may be exchanged, as will be described later as
another initialization method. The portable external device with
the GPS function may be moved close instead of the near-field
communication. System controller .alpha._1126 automatically
recognizes the GPS positional data obtained from the portable
external device as positional data of corresponding unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) at this
moment. System controller .alpha._1126 compares the GPS data with
GPS range data for each of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m obtained
in advance at the time of section definition in Step 101. It
automatically estimates/determines, based on the result of the
comparison, which of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m comprises newly
arranged unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or
device 1250), and registers the result in a specific portion in the
address table of FIG. 23. Further, it displays the result in the
user interface 1234 of FIG. 8A to inform the user, causes him to
confirm whether it is correct, and, if necessary, causes him to
register correction.
[0512] In the above embodiment, an operation by the user is
required for initializing unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination
module 1295) (Step 102). However, no limitation is intended thereby
in the present embodiment, and the initialization (Step 102) may be
automatically performed. Its specific example is described. In the
present embodiment, the user can estimate movement of the position
of unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device
1250) halfway, and automatic tracking of unit 1290 (combination
module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) can be performed as in
Step 103. The method to be described later in Section 4.4 is used
for the automatic tracking. Thus, system controller .alpha._1126
monitors the position of unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460
or 1470, or device 1250) to be initialized using the automatic
tracking technique at the time of initialization. The obtained
positional data is compared with the GPS range data for each of
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and section 1142 corresponding to
unit 1290 to be newly set (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470,
or device 1250) is automatically estimated/determined to register
it in the address table of FIG. 23.
[0513] If unit 1290 to be initialized (combination module 1295,
1460 or 1470, or device 1250) first performs provisional
communication on the in-system network line 1782, each of data
storage areas of .alpha.) the source PAN identifier SPANID, .beta.)
the destination PAN identifier DPANID, and .gamma.) the destination
IEEE extension address DEXADRS in FIG. 12A (e) (refer to Section
2.3 for details), and .delta.) the source IP address data SIPADRS,
and .epsilon.) the destination IP address DIPADRS in FIG. 13 (b)
(Section 2.4) may be blanked, or a default value preset by Z-format
(refer to Section 2.1) may be stored in each area. The data
communication from system controller .alpha._1126 to unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) to be
initialized can be started using this default value (or blank
state) upon receipt of the first provisional communication from
unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250)
to be initialized as described above. Then, .alpha.) the source PAN
identifier SPANID to be initialized, and .delta.) the IP address
data SIPADRS to be initialized, which are described above, of the
communication data transmitted from system controller .alpha._1126
may be stored in the communication middleware data APLDT storage
area (refer to description in Section 2.2 with reference to FIG.
11) and be transmitted. Since it is understood, even in this case,
that unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device
1250) to be initialized is arranged in system .alpha._1132, the
risk that the initialization is erroneously performed in another
domain 1122 is eliminated. The above method does not involve the
user at the time of initialization, producing an advantage of
automatically performing the initialization operation without
placing a burden on the user.
[0514] The position of an object to be initialized is detected at
the time of initialization in the present embodiment as described
above. It can be confirmed that it is arranged in corresponding
system .alpha._1132 in system controller .alpha._1126, and domain
2_1122-2 related to it, producing an advantage of eliminating the
risk of erroneously initializing (registering) the object to be
initialized in another domain 1_1122-1 or another system
.beta._1134. Further, the assistance of the user is not required
depending on the initialization method, and human errors are
prevented, producing an advantage of improving reliability of the
initialization processing, as well as an advantage of being less
troublesome for the user. Further, in the present embodiment, a
section belonging state of the object to be initialized can also be
defined at the time of initialization. This produces an advantage
that services can be offered by the unit of the section using the
object to be initialized, even immediately after the
initialization.
[0515] The processing of enabling newly purchased unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) in domain
2_1122-2 is defined as initialization, which may also be called
"check-in". The processing of temporarily taking unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) outside
domain 2_1142-2 after the initialization, reentering the same
domain 2_1142-2, and restoring it to be in a state where network
communication is possible in system .alpha._1132 or system
.beta._1134 may be defined as plug-in.
[0516] Such unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or
device 1250) to be plugged in detects data of .delta.) the preset
IP address data SIPADRS on the side of plug-in, and .epsilon.) the
IP address data DIPADRS concerning any of system controllers
.beta._1126 and .beta._1128 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2,
the IP address data DIPADRS being set in a system controller of the
other party. Thus, as described in Section 2.1 with reference to
FIG. 10A, the network communication can be performed in principle
wherever unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or
device 1250) to be plugged in is in the world, as long as Internet
Protocol version 6 IPv6 is used for the network communication.
[0517] Thus, in the system of the present embodiment, automatic
plug-in processing may be performed depending on whether unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) to be
plugged in is arranged in a physical area defined by any of systems
.alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2.
Specifically, systems .alpha._1132 and 1134 examine the position of
unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250)
to be plugged in by the same method as the initialization. That is,
system controllers .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 always monitor a
data communication situation on the in-system network line 1782
(refer to description in Section 2.1 with reference to FIGS. 10A
and 16), and always continue to confirm that there is no data
communication from other than unit 1290 ([sensor module 1260 or
actuator module 1270 in] device 1250, or combination module 1295,
1460 or 1470) registered in the address table of FIG. 23. When
finding data communication from other than unit 1290 ([sensor
module 1260 or actuator module 1270 in] device 1250 or combination
module 1295, 1460 or 1470) registered in the address table of FIG.
23, they confirm content of the source IP address data SIPADRS. If
the source IP address data SIPADRS is data which is previously used
in systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134, they start the plug-in
processing. If the source IP address data SIPADRS is data other
than that previously used in systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134,
they start the initialization processing. That is, system
controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128 always manage the position
of unit 1290 ([sensor module 1260 or actuator module 1270 in]
device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) in systems
.alpha._1132 and .beta._1134. They automatically detect that unit
1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) to be
plugged in enters a physical area defined by any of systems
.alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2,
and automatically performs the plug-in processing. They may cause
the user to confirm whether plug-in is possible using the user
interface 1234 during the plug-in processing. Then, they add data
relevant to plugged-in unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or
1470, or device 1250) to the address table of FIG. 23 in the final
stage of the plug-in processing. As described above, since system
controllers .alpha._1126 and .beta._1128 automatically starts the
plug-in processing in accordance with the position of the object to
be plugged in, no manual procedures by the user are necessary. This
produces an advantage that the plug-in processing can be very
easily performed without placing a burden on the user.
[0518] From the perspective of system .alpha._1126 (client system)
described in Chapter 1, the client system (system .alpha._1126) in
the system of the present embodiment comprises unit 1290 comprising
a function of acquiring or creating data for communication, and
system controller .alpha._1126 configured to acquire and manage the
data from the unit, wherein system controller .alpha._1126
partitions each of a plurality of units 1290 into sections 1_1142-1
to m_1142-m, manages it, holds data (address table of FIG. 23)
concerning sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290
belongs, and holds data (FIG. 21D) concerning the unit, and wherein
when registering a new unit different from unit 1290 already
registered in the data (address table of FIG. 23) concerning
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs, it
(1) pre-checks whether the new unit necessary to be newly
registered is already registered in the data (address table of FIG.
23), (2) confirms that the new unit is not registered in the data
(address table of FIG. 23), (3) registers the new unit in the data
(address table of FIG. 23), (4) checks which of sections 1_1142-1
to m_1142-m the new unit belongs to, and (5) adds to the data
(address table of FIG. 23) concerning a section to which the new
unit belongs.
[0519] Further, it comprises data concerning a first section (that
is, data of unit 1290 belonging to the first section) and data
concerning a second section (that is, data of unit 1290 belonging
to the second section), especially, with respect to the plurality
of units 1290 as the address table.
[0520] Further, the data is recorded as time-series data with
respect to the address table.
[0521] As described above, the position of an object can be
detected and the plug-in can be performed, especially, in the
present embodiment. Moreover, when the plug-in is performed, a
section belonging state of the object is also defined. The
advantage obtained thereby corresponds to the advantage at the time
of initialization.
[0522] Whether the plug-in processing corresponding to the present
embodiment is performed can be easily determined by decoding change
of content in the address table (FIG. 23) (stored in memory 1232 in
system controller .alpha._1126 shown in FIG. 2) managed by system
controller .alpha._1126.
[0523] As another confirmation method, change of communication data
transmitted from unit 1290 to be newly registered when unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) to be newly
registered is moved from the outside of system .alpha._1132 to the
inside of system .alpha._1132 may be examined. That is, for
example, unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or
device 1250) is first arranged in another domain 1_1122-1. Then, an
address different from the destination IP address DIPADRS
corresponding to system .alpha._1132 is stored in the destination
IP address DIPADRS (FIG. 13 (b), Section 2.4) in the communication
data transmitted from unit 1290 to be newly registered arranged in
domain 1_1122-1. Similarly, data different from that of system
.alpha._1132 is stored also in a destination address (FIGS. 10A, 16
and 11, Section 2.2 which is set in media access layers MAC02 and
MAC06. Then, unit 1290 to be newly registered (combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) is moved in system
.alpha._1132, and the corresponding address after the plug-in
processing is confirmed. The destination IP address DIPADRS in the
communication data transmitted from unit 1290 to be newly
registered (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250)
after the completion of the plug-in processing corresponds to
system .alpha._1132 (or system controller .beta._1128 in the system
of FIG. 9). Further, the destination address set in media access
layers MAC02 and MAC06 (for example, the destination PAN identifier
DPANID, and the destination IEEE extension address DEXADRS of FIG.
12A (e) related to Section 2.3 also corresponds to system
.alpha._1132 (or system controller .beta._1128 in the system of
FIG. 9).
[0524] Change of address data in communication data during the
plug-in processing is described below for reference. First, the
description starts from a situation immediately after the position
of unit 1290 to be newly registered (combination module 1295, 1460
or 1470, or device 1250) pre-connected to a network in another
domain 1_1122-1 is moved. If unit 1290 to be newly registered is
device 1250-1, the GPS function is included in unit 1290 to be
newly registered. Thus, device 1250 can recognize movement of the
position. If unit 1290 to be newly registered is arranged in system
.alpha._1132 (before current plug-in processing), an address set in
the IP address data IPADRS and media access layers MAC02 and MAC06
in system controller .alpha. is stored in memory 1242 in
corresponding device 1250-1. Thus, corresponding device 1250-1
performs data communication with system controller .alpha. using
the data. Incidentally, the source IP address data SIPADRS and the
destination IP address DIPADRS shown in FIG. 13 (b) are hereinafter
collectively called simply IP address data IPADRS. Similarly, the
destination IEEE extension address DEXADRS and the source IEEE
extension address SEXADRS shown in FIG. 12A (e) are collectively
called an IEEE extended address EXADRS.
[0525] Conversely, if corresponding device 1250-1 is not previously
arranged in system .alpha._1132, an address area set in media
access layers MAC02 and MAC06 such as the source IP address data
SIPADRS and the source IEEE extension address SEXADRS is blanked.
Alternatively, predetermined dummy data is stored, and data is
communicated in system .alpha._1132 to urge system controller
.alpha._1126 to perform the initialization processing (Step 102 in
FIG. 22).
[0526] If unit 1290 to be newly registered is combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470, it does not comprise the GPS function
basically. Thus, in this case, unit 1290 to be newly registered
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) does not detect that the
position is moved. Thus, unit 1290 to be newly registered
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) transmits, in system
.alpha._1132, communication data similar to that when it is
arranged in another domain 1_1122-1, even after the position is
moved.
[0527] System controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128) always monitors communication data in system
.alpha._1132. Thus, when detecting that unexpected address data set
in media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 such as the IP address data
IPADRS and the IEEE extended address EXADRS is stored in the
physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11 (f)) communicated on the
in-system network line 1782 (FIGS. 10A and 16), it confirms the
position of the transmission source of the physical layer frame
PPDU by a method to be described in Section 4.4 (with FIGS. 31 to
34). If the position of the transmission source which is an object
is in an area of system controller .alpha._1126 (based on the
section definition result in Step 101 of FIG. 22), it starts the
initialization processing (Step 102) or the plug-in processing.
[0528] In both of the initialization and plug-in processing, data
is communicated (transmitted) from system controller .alpha._1126
(or system controller .beta._1128) to unit 1290 to be newly
registered (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) using a source
address (source IEEE extension address SEXADRS, etc.) set in media
access layers MAC02 and MAC06, and stored in the physical layer
frame PPDU. Receiving the data, unit 1290 to be newly registered on
the reception side (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) detects
the IP address IPADRS of system controller .alpha._1126 (or system
controller .beta._1128) and a destination address in media access
layers MAC02 and MAC06 (and the IP address IPADRS set at the time
of initialization).
[0529] In the next step, unit 1290 to be newly registered (to be
initialized/plugged in) (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or
device 1250-1) performs transmission to system controller
.alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) using the received
data. As a result, unit 1290 to be initialized/plugged in
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250-1) can
confirm that correct address data has been acquired. Then, system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) performs
regular registration processing in the address table of FIG. 23,
after confirming the content of the communication data transmitted
from unit 1290 to be newly registered (to be initialized/plugged
in) (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250-1), and
confirming that the initialization or plug-in processing has been
correctly performed.
[0530] As described in Section 1.8 with reference to FIG. 8B,
combination module 1295 such as sensor combination module 1460-5
can be independently present in the present embodiment.
Alternatively, it may be inserted into or mixed in a specific
product or component. Thus, combination module 1295 can be carried
and moved by the user. Specific combination module 1295, 1460 or
1470 (or device 1250) carried by the user can also be moved between
sections 1142 after initialization. That is, a section to which the
current position after movement belongs as in Step 104 of FIG. 22
can be repeatedly calculated by automatically tracking the movement
position of combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470 (or device 1250),
as in Step 103 of FIG. 22, which can be moved together with the
user, and can be present independently, or inserted into or mixed
in a product or component. State ascertaining accuracy for each of
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m is improved by acquiring sense data
and state data from combination modules 1460 and 1470 and device
1250 for each of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m based on the latest
positional data to offer services to the user (Step 105), producing
an advantage of improving user satisfaction.
[0531] Next, a method of automatically tracking a movement position
of unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or
1470) described in Step 103 of FIG. 22 is described in detail. In
step 103, a technique of detecting a position of a transmission
source of a radio wave transmitted from unit 1290 (device 1250, or
combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) which is an object may be
used as described later in Section 4.4. That is, if radio is used
as a physical medium (communication medium) of the network line
1782 (FIG. 10A or 16) in system .alpha._1132, a radio wave is
transmitted from unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470), and data is communicated to system controller
.alpha._1126. Which unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470) in system .alpha._1132 the radio wave is
transmitted from can be determined in real time for each of the
physical layer frames PPDU (FIG. 11) by analyzing communication
data in system controller .alpha._1126 (for example, by extracting
the source IP address data and the source IEEE extension address
SEXADRS in FIG. 13 (b) and referring to the address table of FIG.
23 as will be described later). At the same time, physical
positional data of the transmission source of the radio wave can be
obtained for each of the physical layer frames PPDU in real time
using the position detection technique of the transmission source
of the radio wave to be described in Section 4.4. When both the
data is compared with each other for each of the physical layer
frames PPDU, physical positional data is identified for each unit
1290 (each device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460 or
1470).
[0532] In this manner, system controller .alpha._1126 identifies
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which individual units 1290
(device 1250, and combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470) belong
(arranged therein) (in the same manner as the above initialization)
every time it receives the physical layer frame PPDU. The result of
identification is compared with content of the address table of
FIG. 23 one by one. If they are not different from each other as a
result of the comparison, it is considered that none of
corresponding device 1250 and combination modules 1460 and 1470 has
moved beyond section 1142, and the address table is not rewritten.
Conversely, if they are different from each other as a result of
the comparison, it is considered that specific device 1250 or
specific combination module 1460 or 1470 has moved beyond section
1142, and the address table is rewritten, then the processing may
proceed to Step 104. As described above, data (such as an address
table) related to section 1142 is included in the present
embodiment. Whether movement beyond section 1142 is present is
determined using the data related to section 1142 in the movement
position automatic tracking step (Step 103) of unit 1290 (device or
combination module). In Step 103, to perform position management
for each of units 1290 (device 1250, and combination modules 1295,
1460 and 1470) by the unit of section 1142, even if, for example,
unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470)
slightly moves in the same section 1142, it is considered that it
has not moved beyond section 1142, and predetermined processing
such as rewriting of the address table is not performed. This
produces an advantage of effectively acquiring data and offering
services to the user. To describe this advantage, the method is
compared with a method of successively performing feedback in
response to slight movement of unit 1290 (device or combination
module). For example, if the user wears a specific portable
combination module, he frequently moves in the same section 1142.
If the feedback processing (such as update of the address table or
shift processing to Step 104) is performed every time the user
slightly moves, the processing in system controller .alpha._1126
will be very complicated. Conversely, even if unit 1290 (device or
combination module) slightly moves in the same section 1142,
content of obtained sensor data does not often change, as described
in Section 4.1 with reference to FIG. 25A. Further, services are
often offered to the user by the unit of section 1142, as described
with reference to FIG. 25B. Thus, even if the feedback is performed
every time the user slightly moves, the quality of services offered
to the user is not improved much.
[0533] If unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460
or 1470) moves beyond section 1142 as a result of automatic
tracking of the movement position of unit 1290 (device or
combination module) in Step 103 of FIG. 22, the processing proceeds
to Step 104. Thus, if it does not move beyond section 1142, Step
104 may be omitted and the processing may proceed to Step 105. The
processing of calculating a section comprising a current position
of unit 1290 (device or combination module) which has moved in Step
104 specifically means the processing of correcting the address
table, and the processing of rearranging units 1290 (device 1250,
and combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470) arranged for each of
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in system controller
.alpha._1126.
[0534] The address table is corrected only in a predetermined frame
(cell), and rearrangement by the unit of vertical row is not
performed. To increase efficiency of state management and sensor
data acquisition in sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, the address
table is copied in a temporary storage area in processor 1230 of
system controller .alpha._1126, and the processing of rearranging
units 1290 (device 1250, and combination modules 1295, 1460 and
1470) arranged for each of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m
(rearrangement by the unit of vertical row) is performed.
[0535] Further, in Step 105 of FIG. 22, sensor/state data is
acquired from unit 1290 (device or combination module) which is an
object, or services are offered to the user for each of sections
1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Specifically, the method described in Section
4.2 with reference to FIGS. 26A to 30 is used.
[0536] Then, automatic tracking of the movement position of unit
1290 (device or combination module) is properly performed (Step
103), and the series of processing are repeated.
[0537] In the system of the present embodiment, "plug-out"
processing may be automatically performed on specific unit 1290
(device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) using the
automatic tracking of the movement position. That is, if unit 1290
(device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) which is
outside the range of a physical area of each of sections 1_1142-1
to m_1142-m defined in Step 101 is detected, it is considered that
unit 1290 is no longer an object to be managed by network
communication system .alpha._1132, and a corresponding item (the
whole corresponding vertical row) is provisionally deleted from the
address table. The data of the IP address IPADRS and the IEEE
extended address EXADRS of unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination
module 1295, 1460 or 1470) which is provisionally deleted is
recorded in memory 1232 (in system controller .alpha._1126 in FIG.
8A) to flexibly handle re-plug-in processing which will be
performed later. Inquiry concerning whether the plug-out processing
should be performed may be displayed to the user in the user
interface 1234 (in system controller .alpha._1126 of FIG. 8A)
immediately before the plug-out processing is performed.
[0538] From the perspective of system .alpha._1132 (client system),
a client system, which is the system of the present embodiment,
comprises unit 1290 comprising a function of acquiring or creating
data for communication, and system controller .alpha._1126
configured to acquire and manage the data from unit 1290, wherein
system controller .alpha._1126 partitions each of a plurality of
units 1290 into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, manages them, holds
data (address table of FIG. 23) concerning the section to which
each unit belongs, and holds data (FIG. 21D) concerning the unit.
If the data cannot be reacquired from the unit, system controller
.alpha._1126 is temporarily removed from an object of management of
the data (address table of FIG. 23) concerning the section to which
each unit belongs.
[0539] Further, in the re-plug-in processing, if the data can be
reacquired from the unit in addition to the above, system
controller .alpha._1126 is the management object of the data
(address table of FIG. 23) concerning the section to which each
unit belongs.
[0540] Further, regarding also the plug-out processing, the address
table comprises the data concerning the first section (that is,
data of unit 1290 belonging to the first section) and the data
concerning the second section (that is, data of unit 1290 belonging
to the second section) with respect to the plurality of units
1290.
[0541] Further, regarding the plug-out processing, the data is
recorded in the address table as time-series data.
[0542] Whether the plug-out processing can be executed is
understood by examining a communication history from system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) after
unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250)
pre-arranged in system .alpha._1132 is moved to the outside of
system .alpha._1132. That is, if the plug-out processing is
performed, the communication history does not comprise data
communication from system controller .alpha._1126 (or system
controller .beta._1128) to unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460
or 1470, or device 1250) a predetermined period after unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) is moved to
the outside of system .alpha._1132.
[0543] That is, system controller .alpha._1126 (or system
controller .beta._1128) configured to manage, operate and control
network communication system .alpha._1132 monitors the position of
the transmission source by the unit of the physical layer frame
PPDU of FIG. 11 (f) with respect to the communication data on the
in-system network line 1782. If the physical layer frame PPDU is
transmitted from the outside of system .alpha._1132, corresponding
unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250)
is deleted from the address table of FIG. 23 immediately after (it
is confirmed with the user), and the plug-out processing ends. Once
the plug-out processing ends, no data is communicated from system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) to
corresponding unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or
device 1250) until the plug-in processing is re-performed.
[0544] System controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128) does not sometimes recognize that specific unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) has moved
to the outside of system controller .alpha._1126 in terms of
timing. In this case, data is communicated from system controller
.alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128) to corresponding
unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250).
However, in this case, a response to system controller .alpha._1126
(or system controller .beta._1128) is not received. If no response
is received, data is re-communicated. If no response is received
for the second time in a row, a corresponding portion in the
address table of FIG. 23 is deleted, and the plug-out processing
ends. Inquiry to the user may be made through the user interface
1234 (FIGS. 8A and 8B) in system controller .alpha._1126 during the
plug-out processing.
[0545] If a time required from when specific unit 1290 (combination
module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) is moved to the outside
of system controller .alpha._1126 and to when the plug-out
processing is completed is too long, the accuracy of
estimation/determination of action/request of system .alpha._1132
or the user is decreased as will be described in Section 4.3. An
ordinary user accepts a delay of approximately five to ten minutes
regarding a delay in a service offering corresponding to a state
change. A patient user accepts a delay of approximately 15 minutes.
However, if the delay exceeds an hour, almost all users feel
dissatisfied. Thus, in the system of the present embodiment, the
time required from when specific unit 1290 (combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) is moved to the outside of
system controller .alpha._1126 to when the plug-out processing is
completed is less than or equal to 15 minutes, preferably, less
than or equal to five minutes. The time is less than or equal to an
hour at the longest for the above reason.
[0546] As described above, unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460
or 1470, or device 1250) outside the physical range of system
.alpha._1132 is plugged out. Using the position of unit 1290
(combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470, or device 1250) for the
plug-out determination in this manner produces an advantage of
keeping high reliability and of providing an easy plug-in operation
without placing a burden on the user. That is, if radio is used for
a physical communication medium (communication media) of the
in-system network line 1782 (FIG. 16), a personal information
protection function may be deteriorated by the line erroneously
crossed with a network communication line in adjacent domain 1122.
To avoid such risk, complicated initialization processing or
plug-in/plug-out processing is necessary for the user. Conversely,
as described above, the initialization processing or
plug-in/plug-out processing can be performed without placing a
burden on the user using automatically detected positional data,
producing another advantage of avoiding the crossed line with the
adjacent network communication line, of ensuring security, and of
securing the personal information protection function.
[0547] Although system controller .alpha._1126 arranged in system
.alpha._1132 performs the series of processing as shown in FIG. 22
in the above description, no limitation is intended thereby. System
controller .beta._1128 or server n_1116-n arranged outside system
.alpha._1132 on spatial arrangement may perform the operation of
FIG. 22 using, for example, the form in which FIGS. 8A and 8B are
mixed, which is described in Section 1.8.
[0548] Section 4.3 Processing Method from Data Acquisition to
Service Offering for Each Section
[0549] In Section 4.3, specific processing from acquisition of
sensor/state data to service offering to the user, which is related
to Step 105 in FIG. 22 is described. From the perspective of,
especially, system .alpha._1132 (client system), in Section 4.3, a
client system, which is the system of the present embodiment,
comprises unit 1290 comprising a function of acquiring or creating
data for communication, and system controller .alpha._1126
configured to acquire and manage the data from the unit, wherein
system controller .alpha._1126 partitions each of a plurality of
units 1290 into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, manages it, and
holds data (address table of FIG. 23) concerning the section to
which each unit belongs. State change data from one unit 1290 is
communicated to system controller .alpha._1126, and other units
1290 in the same section 1142 are controlled based on the state
change data. Further, system controller .alpha._1126 controls the
other units in the same section using the state change for each
predetermined time from one unit 1290.
[0550] Alternatively, from the perspective of the relationship with
server n_1116-n (cloud) shown in FIG. 1, system controller
.alpha._1126 is connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-n) as
a client/server system, and system controller .alpha._1126
communicates the state change from one unit 1290 to system
controller .alpha._1126, and transmits it to the cloud (server
n_1116-n). Other units 1290 in the same section are controlled
based on data from the cloud (server n_1116-n).
[0551] That is, as described in Section 4.3, services are offered
based on a plurality of acquired data items. For example, since the
accuracy of estimation/determination of a current state or action
or a request of the user is decreased if the services are offered
based on merely an acquired single data item, the services
satisfying the user are hard to offer. However, as described
herein, the accuracy of estimation/determination increases using
the plurality of data items, producing an advantage of improving
the user satisfaction by the services offered.
[0552] Further, state change control (change of setting condition)
is carried out a plurality of times in cooperation during service
offering. When the state change control (change of setting
condition) is performed a plurality of times in the same system a
1132 as a service offering form corresponding to action or a
request of the user, a detailed change state can be offered to the
user, producing an advantage of improving user satisfaction.
[0553] FIG. 26A shows the processing in system controller
.alpha._1126 from acquisition of various data from system
.alpha._1132 to service offering. The processing of FIG. 26A is
premised on the system of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, 8A or 8B.
Alternatively, system controller .beta._1128 arranged outside
system .alpha._1132 as shown in FIG. 9 may acquire data or offer
services. In this case, system controller .alpha._1126 needs to be
replaced with system controller .beta._1128 in the following
description.
[0554] First, upon receipt of a service execution request from
server n_1116-n or system controller .beta._1128 (Step 110), system
controller .alpha._1126 starts data acquisition from system
.alpha._1132 (Step 111). The data to be acquired comprises not only
sensor data from sensor combination module 1460, but also sensor
data from various sensor modules 1260 in device 1250, current
setting condition data in actuator combination module 1470, and
current setting condition data for (mainly actuator module 1270 in)
device 1250. Moreover, system controller .alpha._1126 may acquire
data from server n_1116-n or system controller .beta._1128 as shown
in Step 112. When a series of data acquisition ends in this manner,
all the data acquired in system controller .alpha._1126 is
integrated and arranged, and necessary data is stored in internal
memory 1232 (Step 113).
[0555] In the next step, the state in the same system .alpha._1132
is estimated and determined (Step 114). Further, current action of
the user is estimated and determined based on the
estimated/determined state (Step 115). When the state is
estimated/determined in Step 114, or when the current action of the
user is estimated/determined in Step 115, the state of the
individual user such as the height of the user and a color of
clothes or accessories of the user is also estimated/determined.
Sensitivity setting of a touchpad or a capacitive button is cited
as an example in which the estimation/determination result of the
state of the user affects service offering to the user (Step 119).
A stable user input is possible, for example, for a large man
having thick fingers even if sensitivity of a touchpad or a
capacitive button is low. Conversely, the input is not sometimes
possible for a child or a woman having thin fingers unless the
sensitivity of the touchpad or capacitive button is increased.
Thus, an estimation/determination result of the user state affects
service offering to the user. To change sensitivity setting of the
touchpad or capacitive button after the finger thickness of the
user is estimated/determined, the communication data described in
Section 2.5 needs to be changed.
[0556] Action prediction of the user (Step 116) and
estimation/prediction of a request of the user (Step 117) are
performed based on the result of estimation/determination of a
state in system .alpha._1132 (Step 114) and the result of
estimation/determination of current action of the user (Step
115).
[0557] Then, results of the series of estimation/prediction are
displayed in the user interface 1234 (FIGS. 8A and 8B), and inquiry
and confirmation to the user are made (Step 118). If the results of
the series of estimation/prediction are incorrect, the processing
returns to the estimation/prediction in system .alpha._1132 of Step
114. If the confirmation content to the user is correct, services
are offered to the user in Step 119. The series of processing up to
the service offering to the user are properly repeated. The service
offering is indicated to server n_1116-n or system controller
.beta._1128 at necessary timing (Step 109).
[0558] A plurality of data items acquired in Step 111 or 112 are
used in various estimation/determination processing executed in
Steps 114 to 117 of FIG. 26A. The estimation/determination accuracy
is increased using the plurality of data items in comparison with
the case where only a single data item is used, which is an
advantage. This situation is described in detail with reference to
FIG. 26B.
[0559] If a state changes or the user acts in system .alpha._1132,
a situation where any of units 1290 (device 1250, and combination
modules 1295, 1460 and 1470) moves across section 1142, or a
situation where various data obtained from units 1290 (device 1250,
and combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470) changes often occurs.
Thus, if only corresponding section 1142 is selected in system
.alpha._1132, and the series of estimation/determination processing
are performed only in section 1142, the processing efficiency
increases in system controller .alpha._1126. The processing of
finding section 1142 in which any of the two situations occurs
corresponds to Step 120 in FIG. 26B. An operation of extracting
units 1290 (device 1250, and combination modules 1295, 1460 and
1470) arranged in corresponding section 1142 corresponds to Step
121. In Step 121, the address table of FIG. 23 is used.
[0560] Data is acquired from sensor module 1260, actuator module
1270, sensor combination module 1460 and actuator combination
module 1470 described in this address table to a plurality of
modules arranged in the same section 1142. As a specific example,
response requests (requests) 1872 are transmitted from system
controller .alpha._1126 to a plurality of object modules, and
corresponding responses 1874 are obtained, as shown in case 2 of
FIG. 10B.
[0561] As a method of offering services to the user shown,
especially, in FIG. 26B, a state not adaptive to the
estimation/determination result performed for each of corresponding
sections 1142 is automatically extracted, and adaptation processing
is performed by performing state change control or setting
condition change instructions on the non-adaptive portion. One
example of the service offering method is described below. For
example, when the user turns off a light and a television in a room
and attempts to go out, the state where an air-conditioner in the
room is in operation is automatically extracted as a non-adaptive
state, and the operation state of the air-conditioner is
automatically controlled as the adaptive processing. It is
especially important that only the single data item of the
television turned off in the room is insufficient to estimate the
next action of the user. The accuracy of estimation/determination
is increased by further acquiring another data item of the light
turned off in the room, the data item being included in the same
section 1142. An advantage of effectively offering services to the
user is produced by extracting a state not adapted to an
estimated/determined result in the present embodiment as shown
above.
[0562] The example of turning off the television in the room and
that of turning off the light in the room corresponds to
acquisition of various sense data and that of current state data
from units 1290 (device 1250, and combination modules 1295, 1460
and 1470) arranged in a specific section (Step 122). After a
plurality of data items in the same section 1142 are acquired (Step
122), a state in a corresponding section is estimated/determined
(Step 123), the user action is estimated/determined (Step 125), and
a user request is estimated/determined (Step 127). Data not adapted
to each estimation/determination result is extracted (Steps 124,
126 and 128), and a state change control method (changing method of
setting condition) for adopting the extracted non-adaptive data to
the estimation/determination result is inquired of the user (Step
129). The inquiry to the user may be displayed in the user
interface 1234 in system controller .alpha._1126. If it is denied
by the user, estimation/determination (Steps 123, 125 and 127) is
re-performed using the plurality of acquired data items.
[0563] When permission is obtained from the user as a result of the
inquiry to the user, the command 1852 (case 1 in FIG. 10B) is
provided to actuator module 1270 included in a device or actuator
module 1270 in actuator combination module 1470, and state change
in corresponding section 1142 is controlled (state setting is
changed) to offer services to the user (Step 130).
[0564] Regarding Step 120 in FIG. 26B, unit 1290 (device 1250, or
combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) moving across section 1142,
or data obtained from unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470), content of which is changed, may be extracted
using the left side of the time-series data tracking table in FIGS.
27 and 28. The time-series data tracking table is data in which a
history of various data acquired by system controller .alpha._1126,
and a history of various types of estimation/determination
performed based on it are recorded in a list form in chronological
order along an elapsed time 2310. It is added in a timely manner,
and stored in memory 1232 in system controller .alpha._1126. In
FIGS. 27 and 28, various sensor data obtained from sensor modules
1260-1 and 1260-2 in device 1250-1 in FIG. 8A or a state (setting
value) set for actuator module 1270-1 are all described as, for
example, state A. Section numbers of sections in which device
1250-1 is arranged are also described. Sense data of sensor
combination module 1460-5 obtained as binary sense data is also
described on the left side of the time-series data tracking table.
Further, the section numbers of the sections in which sensor
combination module 1460-5 is arranged are also described, the
section numbers being obtained by detecting a position by the
method to be described in Section 4.4.
[0565] Suppose a light detection sensor module is included in
sensor combination module 1460-5, and the user wearing sensor
combination module 1460-5 moves from section 2_1142-2 where a light
is turned on to section 5_1142-5 where a light is turned off. In
this case, sensor combination module 1460-5 is arranged in section
2_1142-2 at the elapsed time 2310 of t3. Light data detected by
sensor combination module 1460-5 is "present". When the user moves
from t3 to t4 with respect to the elapsed time 2310, sensor
combination module 1460-5 after the movement is arranged in section
5_1142-5. The light data detected at this moment changes to
"absent". The movement across section 1142 of device 1250 or
combination module 1460 or 1470 and change of acquired data content
can be easily extracted using the time-series data tracking table
in this manner.
[0566] The estimation/determination collating table in FIGS. 27 and
28 is used for the estimation/determination processing performed in
Steps 114 to 117 of FIG. 26A and in Steps 123, 125 and 127 of FIG.
26B. First, candidates for an estimation/determination result of a
state item 2320 for each section 1142 such as "predetermined
section being used" are preset as state .alpha., state .beta., . .
. , and are sequentially described in the horizontal row direction
of this estimation/determination collating table. For example, a
state collected from device 1250-1 as data such as "air-conditioner
being in operation" and "timer setting time of air-conditioner" is
set as state A, state B, . . . , and is sequentially described in
the vertical row direction of this estimation/determination
collating table. Further, for example, sensor data detected from
sensor combination module 1460-5 configured to detect the presence
of light, and a state setting value indicating a current state in
actuator combination module 1470-2 are sequentially described in
the vertical row direction of this estimation/determination
collating table. A correlation coefficient value between both of
them is described in a corresponding cell in this
estimation/determination collating table. For example, if state A
of "an air-conditioner being in operation" positively correlates
with state .alpha. of "the predetermined section being used" in the
state item 2320, "80" is described in a corresponding cell as a
correlation coefficient value. Furthermore, if data of "light being
present" in the same section 1142 obtained from sensor combination
module 1460-5 positively correlates with state .alpha. of
"predetermined section being used" in the state item 2320, "57" is
described in a corresponding cell as the correlation coefficient
value. Conversely, if there is a negative correlation (inverse
correlation), a negative value is sometimes described in a
corresponding cell as a correlation coefficient.
[0567] During state estimation/determination in section 1142, the
sum of correlation coefficients of the same row is calculated for
each of states .alpha., .beta., . . . , and corresponds to a value
of state probability 2330. When states .alpha., .beta., . . . ,
comprising the largest total value indicate a state in the
corresponding section 1142, estimation/determination is performed.
Not an acquired single data item but a plurality of acquired data
items in the same section 1142 can be used by calculating a total
value of correlation coefficients in the same row in this manner.
The use of the plurality of acquired data not only allows
multidirectional estimation/determination, but also produces an
advantage of increasing accuracy of the
estimation/determination.
[0568] Similarly, candidates for an estimation/determination result
of a user action item 2340 are preset as action .alpha., action
.beta., . . . , and are sequentially described in the horizontal
row direction of this estimation/determination collating table.
Further, candidates for an estimation/determination result of a
user request item 2360 are also preset as request .alpha., request
.beta., . . . , and are sequentially described in the horizontal
row direction of this estimation/determination collating table.
Further, each correlation coefficient value is entered in a
corresponding cell in a manner similar to that described above.
[0569] A total value of correlation coefficients is calculated for
each of rows of actions .alpha. and .beta. and rows of requests
.alpha. and .beta. at each of t1, t2, t3, . . . , as the elapsed
time 2310, and is successively entered in corresponding portions on
the side of the time-series data tracking table in FIGS. 27 and 28
as values of an action probability 2350 and a request probability
2370.
[0570] A state in section 1142, and an action and a request of the
user can be estimated/determined in real time using the time-series
data tracking table. An example of the service offering method
using this time-series data tracking table is described based on
the examples shown in, for example, FIGS. 27 and 28. Suppose the
user carrying sensor combination module 1460-5 moves from section
2_1142-2 where a light is turned on to section 5_1142-5 where a
light is turned off. In this case, since the light in section
2_1142-2 remains turned on, a value of the state probability 2330
of state .alpha. indicating "corresponding section being used" in
section 2_1142-2 does not change much. Conversely, the action
probability 2350 of action a corresponding to the movement of the
user rises suddenly between t3 and t4 from 4 to 87%. As a result,
it is estimated/determined that the user has moved between t3 and
t4. Moreover, the request probability of request .alpha.
corresponding to the request to turn on the light in section
5_1142-5 also rises suddenly between t3 and t4 from 4 to 98%.
[0571] A result of estimation/determination of the user request,
for example, to turn on the light in section 5_1142-5, which is
shown in Step 127 of FIG. 26B, is obtained using this time-series
data tracking table. Data indicating absence of light in section
5_1142-5 is obtained from sensor combination module 1460-5 as data
not adapted to this user request. Then, services are offered to the
user in Step 130. Specifically, the command (issuance of command)
1852 to change setting conditions (refer to FIG. 10B) is provided
from system controller .alpha._1126 to actuator combination module
1470-2 configured to turn on the light in section 5_1142-5.
[0572] The estimation/determination of the state in each section
1142, that of the user action based on data acquired for each
section 1142, and that of the user request are mainly described
above. Alternatively, for example, the state of the whole system
.alpha._1132 may be estimated or determined, or the user action or
user request may be estimated or determined based on data acquired
from the whole system .alpha._1132.
[0573] Next, the method of offering services to the user described
in Step 119 of FIG. 26A or in Step 130 of FIG. 26B is described
with reference to FIG. 29. First, a state change control candidate
is extracted in unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295,
1460 or 1470) in corresponding section 1142 based on the result of
extraction of non-adaptive data performed in Step 124, 126 and 128
of FIG. 26B (Step 141). After inquiry to the user is made (Step
129), change of setting conditions (state change control) is
sequentially executed as in Steps 142 and 143.
[0574] As an example of the above, if a light is turned off in
section 5_1142-5 to which the user moves, an air-conditioner and a
television are also sometimes in an off state. Thus, if the
non-adaptive data is extracted in Steps 124, 126 and 128 of FIG.
26B, the change of the setting conditions (state change control)
needs to be performed for a plurality of items in the same section
5_1142-5. In that case, the change of the setting conditions (state
change control) is sequentially performed for the plurality of
items, or the change of the setting conditions (state change
control) is simultaneously performed for part of the items, as
shown in Steps 142 and 143 of FIG. 29. This produces an advantage
of reducing a time required for optimal environmental setting in
the same section 5_1142-5.
[0575] If the change of setting conditions (state change control)
is sequentially or simultaneously performed for the plurality of
items in this manner, data communication corresponding to a
plurality of commands (issuance of commands) 1852 is sequentially
or simultaneously performed from the same system controller
.alpha._1126 to a plurality of units 1290 (actuator combination
modules 1470 or devices 1250) as in case 1 of FIG. 10B. All content
of the source IP address data SIPADRS (FIG. 13 (b)) conforms to a
source address data in communication middleware layers APL02 and
APL06 (for example, content of source PAN identifier SPANID and
source IEEE extension address SEXADRS in FIG. 12A (e)) in each
physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11 (f)) indicating communication
data corresponding to each of the commands (issuance of commands)
1852. Furthermore, part of destination date such as the destination
PAN identifier DPANID in FIG. 12A (e) sometimes conforms to it.
[0576] Thus, when the change of the setting conditions (state
change control) is sequentially or simultaneously performed for the
plurality of items, the data communication corresponding to the
commands (issuance of commands) 1852 is preferably collectively
performed without performing other processing halfway in system
controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128 in system
shown in FIG. 9). When the data communication is collectively
performed in this manner, different communication data items can be
created by the above processing of copying common data. The use of
the above method produces an advantage of increasing processing
efficiency of system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128 in system shown in FIG. 9).
[0577] As has already been described in Section 4.2, an ordinary
user accepts a delay of approximately five to ten minutes regarding
a delay in a service offering corresponding to a state change. A
patient user accepts delay of approximately 15 minutes. However, if
the delay exceeds an hour, almost all users feel dissatisfied.
Thus, if services are sequentially offered for a plurality of items
in the system of the present embodiment, a difference in time
between services continuously offered is less than or equal to 15
minutes, preferably, less than or equal to five minutes. The time
is less than or equal to an hour at the longest. This produces an
advantage of keeping stress of the user to a minimum.
[0578] The service offering for each section 1142 is mainly
described above. Alternatively, for example, services may be
collectively offered in the whole system .alpha._1132.
[0579] The service offering method has been described based on the
example in which the user carrying sensor combination module 1460-5
moves from section 2_1142-2 where a light is turned on to section
5_1142-5 where a light is turned off. The processing method when
specific unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460
or 1470) moves across different sections 1142 is additionally
described.
[0580] In this case, section data before and after movement of unit
1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) needs
to be extracted as shown in the steps of FIG. 30. The time-series
data tracking table described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 is
useful for this extraction. The section of sensor combination
module 1460-5 in FIGS. 27 and 28 changes between t3 and t4 of the
elapsed time 2310 from 2 to 5. The section data before and after
movement can be easily extracted by seeking a position of change.
In this case, services are often offered, especially, for the
section before and after movement. Thus, in the system of the
present embodiment, services are simultaneously or sequentially
offered in both of section 2_1122-2 and section 5_1122-5 from and
to which specific unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470) moves. Services can be efficiently offered to
the user in system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller
.beta._1128 corresponding to system in FIG. 9) by intensively
performing service offering in section 2_1122-2 and section
5_1122-5 before and after movement. The series of processes from
Step 155 to Step 158 in FIG. 30 correspond to the processing in
FIG. 26B. Further, unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module
1295, 1460 or 1470) arranged in section 2_1122-2 before movement is
extracted as in Step 151 of FIG. 30. Services are offered to the
user also in section 2_1122-2 before movement through similar
processing (Step 130). As has already been described above, change
of setting conditions (state change control) may be sequentially or
simultaneously performed for a plurality of items also in section
2_1122-2 before movement.
[0581] The data communication corresponding to the commands
(issuance of commands) 1852 is preferably collectively performed
without performing other processing halfway in system controller
.alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128 in system shown in
FIG. 9) as described above, even when services are simultaneously
or sequentially offered in both of section 2_1122-2 and section
5_1122-5. When the data communication is collectively performed in
this manner, different communication data items can be created by
the above processing of copying common data. The use of the above
method produces an advantage of increasing processing efficiency of
system controller .alpha._1126 (or system controller .beta._1128 in
system shown in FIG. 9).
[0582] Section 4.4 Method of Tracking Movement Between Sections in
Various Modules or Devices
[0583] Section 4.4 describes a method of detecting a position in
which communication module 1202 included in device 1250 or
communication module 1660 included in a combination module is
arranged.
[0584] If radio is used for physical communication medium
(communication media) used on the in-system network line 1782 in
FIG. 10A, a radio wave is emitted from communication modules 1202
and 1660 at a certain time. A position of communication module 1202
or 1660, a device comprising it, or a combination module is
detected from the position of emission of the radio wave using this
timing in the present embodiment. The GPS technology is known as a
conventional method of detecting the position of a device. However,
only GPS-related components mounted in a device are expensive if
this technology is applied. Conversely, additional components are
not necessary to detect a position in the above method, producing
an advantage of allowing communication module 1202 or 1660 (or a
device comprising it, or a combination module) to be less expensive
and smaller.
[0585] The technology of a beacon is also known as well as the GPS
technology which is used to know positional data. A radio wave
emitted from an artificial satellite is used in the GPS technology.
Conversely, for example, a ground radio wave conforming to the
short range radio standard called Bluetooth is used in the beacon
technology. That is, a plurality of devices configured to transmit
a short range radio wave are placed in a plurality of ground
portions, and a short range radio wave transmitted from each device
is received to calculate a relative position of reception. However,
a circuit for calculating a position is necessary on the reception
side. Thus, a circuit of a receiver increases in size, causing the
receiver to be larger and more expensive even in this method. On
the other hand, active position detection in combination module
1295 (or unit 1290) requiring position detection is unnecessary in
the system of the present embodiment, allowing combination module
1295 (or unit 1290) to be less expensive and smaller.
[0586] FIG. 31 shows a principle of position detection in the
present embodiment. Each of system controller .alpha._1126, device
1250-1 and device 1250-4 configured to receive the radio wave and
to detect a position of a transmission source comprises a GPS
function. Thus, positions of system controller .alpha._1126, device
1250-1 and device 1250-4 are known in advance. An emission position
of the radio wave is measured using a characteristic of the radio
wave received by system controller .alpha._1126, device 1250-1 and
device 1250-4.
[0587] A received time (received timing) of a radio wave on the
reception side engaged with the detection of the position (system
controller .alpha._1126, device 1250-1 and device 1250-4) is used
to detect a position. A transmission source is identified in a
network communication system comprising a plurality of radio wave
transmission sources using a received time (received timing) of a
radio wave. Alternatively, it may be said that the transmission
source is identified in the network communication system comprising
the plurality of radio wave transmission sources using content of
communication data. For example, emission timing of the radio wave
is different between sensor combination module 1460-5 and actuator
combination module 1470-3 in FIG. 31. Thus, which of sensor
combination module 1460-5 and actuator combination module 1470-3
the radio wave is emitted from can be identified from the received
timing. Using the received timing of the radio wave for position
detection in this manner produces an advantage of detecting
different positions at the same time, and of improving efficiency
of position detection. The position detecting method of the present
embodiment is not limited to the above, and a signal from a beacon
(conforming to the Bluetooth Smart standard) may be used.
[0588] A specific method of identifying a transmission source of a
radio wave is described. Data is communicated on the same system
network line 1782 by the group of the physical layer frame PPDU
shown in FIG. 11 (f). System controller .alpha._1126 controls or
manages system network line 1782 to prevent the physical layer
frames PPDU transmitted from different transmission sources from
overlapping each other at the same time.
[0589] Address data indicating a transmission source is stored in
one physical layer frame PPDU. Specifically, the source IP address
data SIPADRS in FIG. 13 (b) described in Section 2.4 can be used to
identify the transmission source. Alternatively, for example, the
source IEEE extension address SEXADRS in FIG. 12A (e) described in
Section 2.3 may be used to identify the transmission source as data
stored in the MAC layer header MACHD (FIG. 11 (a)). Thus, a radio
wave characteristic at the time of reception is measured on the
reception side of the radio wave, and transmission source address
data described in a corresponding physical layer frame PPDU is
decoded. This allows a radio wave characteristic to be acquired for
each radio wave transmission source.
[0590] Further, simultaneously received radio wave characteristics
in a plurality of portions are compared to calculate positional
data of a transmission source. Using the radio wave characteristics
in the plurality of portions in this manner produces an advantage
of increasing accuracy of position detection. There is a method of
using radio field strength as a radio wave characteristic used to
detect a position of the transmission source. That is, the radio
field strength in a position of reception is inversely proportional
to a square of a distance to the transmission source in an ideal
state. Thus, relative positional data of sensor combination module
1460-5 and actuator combination module 1470-3 can be estimated by
comparing reception radio field strength of system controller
.alpha._1126, device 1250-1 and device 1250-4.
[0591] Further, a radio wave phase may be used as another radio
wave characteristic used to detect a position of the transmission
source. That is, since a phase of a received radio wave differs
depending on the distance between a transmission source and a
destination, this phenomenon is used to detect the position. The
relative positional data of sensor combination module 1460-5 and
actuator combination module 1470-3 can be estimated by comparing a
phase of a radio wave simultaneously received by system controller
.alpha._1126, device 1250-1 and device 1250-4.
[0592] Alternatively, a traveling direction of the radio wave may
be used as another radio wave characteristic used to detect a
position of the transmission source. To detect the traveling
direction of the radio wave, the traveling direction of the radio
wave is measured by comparing each of detection signals obtained
from a plurality of receivers comprising different detection
sensitivity with respect to the traveling direction of the radio
wave. The position is detected from a traveling direction of the
radio wave emitted from the obtained transmission source using
trigonometry. This embodiment produces an advantage of accurately
detecting the position of the transmission source with very
inexpensive equipment. The radio wave characteristic used for the
position detection in the present embodiment is not limited merely
to the traveling direction of radio wave. It may be combined with
reception strength, a phase at the time of reception, or other
radio wave characteristics.
[0593] The position of the transmission source can be easily and
accurately detected using trigonometry if, for example, system
controller .alpha._1126 and device 1250-1 in FIG. 31 can
individually detect the traveling direction of the radio wave
transmitted from sensor combination module 1460-5. The position can
be detected using the trigonometry based on at least two receiving
points of the radio wave. System controller .alpha._1126 preferably
covers one of the radio wave receiving points for the reasons (1)
system controller .alpha._1126 manages/operates/controls data
communication on system network line 1782, (2) system controller
.alpha._1126 always analyzes data in the physical layer frame PPDU,
and (3) the detection position of the radio wave characteristic
should be physically close to the calculation position of the
transmission source in terms of efficiency. As another radio wave
receiving point, general device 1250 comprising the GPS function
may be used, or a dedicated device for detecting a position of a
transmission source may be provided.
[0594] Next, a principle of a method of measuring the traveling
direction of the radio wave is described with reference to FIG. 32
(b). Detection sensitivity of a parabolic antenna 2760 used, for
example, to receive a ground wave comprises directional dependency
of a received radio wave. For example, the parabolic antenna 2760
configured to obtain detection signal .alpha. comprises the highest
detection sensitivity when the received radio wave comes from the
direction of A, and low detection sensitivity when it comes from
the direction of B or C. As described above, the parabolic antenna
2760 comprises a characteristic that detection sensitivity differs
depending on the traveling direction of the radio wave. Conversely,
the parabolic antenna 2760 configured to obtain detection signal
.beta. comprises the highest detection sensitivity when the
received radio wave comes from the direction of B, and the
parabolic antenna 2760 configured to obtain detection signal
.gamma. comprises the highest detection sensitivity when it comes
from the direction of C. Thus, the traveling direction of the
received radio wave can be estimated in principle by simultaneously
receiving the received radio wave from an arbitrary direction using
the three parabolic antennas 2760, and comparing the strength
between detection signals .alpha., .beta. and .gamma.. The process
of estimating the traveling direction of the received radio wave
corresponds to the method of comparing each of detection signals
obtained from a plurality of receivers and measuring the traveling
direction of the radio wave.
[0595] FIG. 32 (a) shows a structure of an antenna for directional
detection with higher directional accuracy. The basic structure
thereof is composed of a stealth plate 2730 formed to be
substantially a triangular pyramid or quadrangular pyramid. Antenna
2710-1 is arranged in a cross shape on the side of the
substantially triangular pyramid or substantially quadrangular
pyramid. Antenna 2710-1 is composed of a pair of antennas
orthogonal to each other. Only one pair of antennas 2710-1
orthogonal to each other in a cross shape may be arranged on one
surface of the stealth plate 2730, as indicated by the solid lines
in FIG. 32 (a). Alternatively, pairs of antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3
orthogonal to each other in a cross shape may be arranged on one
surface of the stealth plate 2730, as indicated by the broken lines
in FIG. 32 (a). Each pair of antennas 2710-2 and 2710-3 indicated
by the broken lines in FIG. 32 (a) is attached to be rotated 30
degrees relative to antennas 2710-1 orthogonal to each other in a
cross shape. Both of A) reception of communication data on the
in-system network line 1782, and B) position detection of the
transmission source are performed using antennas 2710-1 orthogonal
to each other in a cross shape. An amplifier and signal processing
circuit 2720 is arranged in each of antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3
arranged in a cross shape. Detection signals .alpha., .beta.,
.gamma. and .delta. are individually obtained from each amplifier
and signal processing circuit 2720. The structure is not
necessarily formed to be accurately a triangular pyramid or a
quadrangular pyramid. It suffices that the surfaces of the stealth
plates 2730 face in different directions.
[0596] The detection sensitivity of cross-shaped antenna 2710
arranged on the surface of the stealth plate 2730 in FIG. 32 (a)
comprises reception direction dependency. Thus, the pair of
cross-shaped antennas 2710 correspond to a receiver comprising
different detection sensitivities depending on the traveling
direction of the radio wave. The comparison between individual
detection signals .alpha., .beta., .gamma. and .delta. obtained
from each amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720 corresponds
to the comparison of each detection signal.
[0597] FIG. 33 (a) is an enlarged view of one surface in FIG. 32
(a). The stealth plate 2730 arranged on the back side of
cross-shaped antennas 2710 plays roles of (1) preventing a radio
wave from entering cross-shaped antennas 2710 from the back side,
and (2) absorbing a radio wave passing through cross-shaped
antennas 2710. Arranging the stealth plate 2730 on the back side of
antennas 2710 configured to detect the traveling direction of the
radio wave in this manner produces an advantage of controlling
reflection of an unnecessary radio wave which decreases the
accuracy of detection, and of increasing the position detection
accuracy of the transmission source. To exert this advantage, the
stealth plate 2730 comprises a two-layer structure as shown in FIG.
33 (b). The layer in the back is composed of a metal plate layer
2734 with the minutely uneven front side. The arrangement of the
metal plate layer in the back solidly prevents the radio wave from
penetrating, and also prevents it from entering cross-shaped
antennas 2710 from the back side.
[0598] However, the radio wave is reflected on the front side of
the metal plate layer 2734. Thus, the structure is devised in
various ways in order for the reflected radio wave not to enter
cross-shaped antenna 2710. One of the devices is found in that the
surface of the substantially triangular pyramid or substantially
quadrangular pyramid is curved as shown in FIG. 33 (c). The curved
surface changes the traveling direction of an incident radio wave
2800, which is made incident substantially in parallel, at an
incident position. Further, the metal plate layer 2734 with the
minutely uneven front side is intended to irregularly reflect the
incident radio wave 2800 which is made incident substantially in
parallel.
[0599] Original purpose (2) of the stealth plate 2730 is not to
reflect the radio wave but to absorb the radio wave. To realize
function (2), a weak conductive organic layer 2738 with the
minutely uneven front and back sides is arranged on the upper side
of the metal plate layer 2734 with the minutely uneven front side
in the stealth plate 2730. Specifically, the weak conductive
organic layer 2738 with the minutely uneven front and back sides
may be formed by hardening metallic powder on an organic layer, or
entirely formed of a weak conductive organic matter. The incident
radio wave 2800 is absorbed in the weak conductive organic layer
2738. Since the incident radio wave 2800 cannot be completely
absorbed only in the weak conductive organic layer 2738, the
incident radio wave 2800 is irregularly reflected on the uneven
front side. This allows irregular reflection efficiency to be
improved between the weak conductive organic layer 2738 with the
minutely uneven front and back sides and the metal plate layer 2734
with the minutely uneven front side, and causes the irregularly
reflected radio wave to be absorbed in the weak conductive organic
layer 2738, preventing the radio wave from reaching cross-shaped
antennas 2710.
[0600] The detailed structure of cross-shaped antennas 2710-1 shown
in FIG. 32 (a) and the principle of the detection signal
characteristic are described with reference to FIG. 34. The
internal structure of the cross-shaped antennas 2710 is achieved by
combining a structure in which two antennas 2710 arranged in a
lateral direction (X-direction) are connected to each other through
a resistor 2920 and a structure in which two antennas 2710 arranged
in a lengthwise direction (Y-direction) are connected to each other
through the resistor 2920, as shown in FIG. 34 (a). A capacitor or
an inductance as well as the resistor 2920 may be properly arranged
for the connection between the two antennas 2710 to improve a
frequency characteristic of signal detection. The amplifier and
signal processing circuit 2720 is composed of voltage
differentiators 2940-1 and 2940-2 configured to detect a difference
in voltage generated between the resistors 2920, and an accumulator
2960 configured to add signals obtained from each of them.
[0601] If, for example, the plane of polarization is tilted by e
relative to the horizontal axis (X-axis) as shown in FIG. 32 (b),
and a radio wave having electric field amplitude A passes in a
direction perpendicular to the cross-shaped antennas 2710, a signal
of
A.sup.2e.sup.i2.omega.t cos.sup.2 .theta. (1)
[0602] is obtained from voltage differentiator 2940-1, and a signal
of
A.sup.2e.sup.i2.omega.t sin.sup.2 .theta. (2)
[0603] is obtained from voltage differentiator 2940-2. In formulae
(1) and (2), a phase term of a detection signal is expressed by a
complex number. Thus, an output signal from the accumulator 2960
which adds each signal is given by
A.sup.2e.sup.i2.omega.t. (3)
[0604] Tilt angle .theta. of the plane of polarization is not
present in formula (3). That is, a fixed characteristic of the
obtained detection signal is obtained without depending on tilt
angle .theta. of the plane of polarization, as long as the radio
wave passes in the direction perpendicular to cross-shaped antenna
2710.
[0605] If a radio wave passes the cross-shaped antennas 2710 at an
angle .xi. relative to the direction perpendicular thereto as shown
in FIG. 34 (c), an output signal from the accumulator 2960 is
given
A.sup.2e.sup.i2.omega.t sin.sup.2 .xi.. (4)
[0606] Above formula (4) indicates that the output signal of the
accumulator 2960 changes depending on the traveling direction of
the radio wave with respect to the cross-shaped antennas 2710
(depending on an angle tilted relative to the direction
perpendicular to the cross-shaped antennas 2710).
[0607] Thus, the traveling direction of the radio wave can be
calculated by comparing output signals .alpha., .beta., .gamma. and
.delta. (of the accumulator 2960) obtained from each of the
cross-shaped antennas 2710 disposed on stealth plates 2710 facing
opposite directions as in FIG. 32 (a) using above formula (4).
[0608] If tilt angle .xi. is especially small in FIG. 34 (c), the
amount of output signals tends to greatly depend on a vibrating
surface of the radio wave. To reduce the harmful influence, the
pairs of cross-shaped antennas 2710-2 and 2710-3 which are
indicated by the broken lines in FIG. 32 (a), and comprise a
rotation angle are arranged. Detection signal errors caused when
tilt angle .xi. is small can be reduced by cancelling merely the
most different output signal of output signals obtained by
cross-shaped antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3, and averaging the other two
output signals.
[0609] The traveling direction of the radio wave can be efficiently
measured (without being affected by the plane of polarization) by
arranging antenna 2710 to make a right angle as in formula (3).
Alternatively, antenna 2710 may be arranged at an arbitrary angle
(if any correction is made when the traveling direction of the
radio wave is calculated). Further, antenna 2710 is not necessarily
linear as described above. It may be in other shapes, for example,
in a leaf shape as shown in FIG. 34 (d).
[0610] The detection accuracy is sometimes reduced due to
reflection on a wall and the ceiling during the progress of a radio
wave if the position of the transmission source is detected from
the traveling direction of the radio wave. To prevent it, radio
waves comprising different frequencies may be used for the position
detection. For example, frequency bands of 2.4 GHz, 915 MHz, 950
MHz and 868 MHz can be used depending on areas as a reference
frequency used for short range radio communication. Thus, for
example, wireless communication based on the above different
reference frequencies may be simultaneously performed. A reflection
characteristic during the progress of the radio wave on the wall
and ceiling changes depending on a reference frequency to be used.
Thus, the accuracy of detecting the position of the transmission
source is improved by comparing the results of the position
detection for which the wireless communication comprising each of
the different reference frequencies is used.
[0611] As described above, if the trigonometry is used for the
position detection, the position of the transmission source can be
detected merely by measuring the traveling direction of the radio
wave basically at two positions. However, the traveling direction
of the radio wave may be measured at least three receiving points
to prevent the position detection accuracy from being reduced due
to the reflection during the progress of the radio wave. The
comparison of measurement results at least three receiving points
improves the accuracy and reliability for the position detection of
the transmission source. The method is not limited to either of
them. A method of increasing receiving points for position
detection and increasing reference frequencies to be used may be
combined. This produces an advantage of improving the position
detection accuracy of the transmission source.
[0612] Section 4.5 Adaptability Between Different Systems in Unit
(Combination Module or Device)
[0613] System .alpha._1132 in the system of the present embodiment
can be applied to a network communication system widely ranging
from a consumer sector, a healthcare field to a social
infrastructure sector. As described in Section 4.2, initialization
(check-in), plugging-in and plugging-out of unit 1290 (device 1250,
or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) in system .alpha._1132
can be performed very easily in the system of the present
embodiment. The combination of the above allows unit 1290 (device
1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) to be easily
incorporated into a plurality of different types of systems and to
be used in the system of the present embodiment. Furthermore, the
same unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or
1470) can be used in different systems.
[0614] Thus, the use of the system of the present embodiment
produces an advantage that universality of unit 1290 (device 1250,
or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) can be secured in a very
wide area. If, especially, combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470
comprise universality in the very wide area, they can be easily
less expensive because of mass production. Furthermore, since
combination modules 1295, 1460 and 1470 which are less expensive
can be used in different systems, the usability of combination
modules 1295, 1460 and 1470 is greatly improved.
[0615] The relationship between system .alpha._1132 and system
.beta._1134 across which the same unit 1290 (device 1250, or
combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) is used may be included in
the same domain 2_1122-2 as shown in FIG. 1. Alternatively, system
.alpha._1132 and system .beta._1134 may belong to domain 1_1122-1
and domain 2_1122-2, respectively.
[0616] The initialization (check-in), plug-in, and plug-out methods
of unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or
1470) between system .alpha._1132 and system .beta._1134 are
described in Section 4.5.
[0617] First, a case where system .alpha._1132 and system
.beta._1134 comprise different functions is described. In this
case, system controller .alpha._1126 in system .alpha._1132 and
system controller .beta._1128 in system .beta._1134 individually
perform identification processing of an adaptive/non-adaptive
system on unit 1290 (device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460
or 1470). If the adaptive/non-adaptive system is identified
regarding device 1250, exchangeable data 1810 (refer to FIG. 10B)
is exchanged on communication middleware layer APL06 for
identification, as described in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG.
16 or 17B. Conversely, the adaptive/non-adaptive system is
identified regarding combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470 using
communication data in media access layer MAC02, as described in
Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10A. For example, as described
in Section 2.3 using FIG. 12A (e), the source IEEE extension
address SEXADRS included in communication data transmitted from
combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470 may be used. In this case,
server n_1116-n may be accessed from data of the obtained IEEE
extended address SEXADRS through the Internet, and identity data of
combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470 may be acquired to identify
the adaptive/non-adaptive system.
[0618] As a result of the processing, if corresponding unit 1290
(device 1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) is
determined to be an adaptive system, whether it is incorporated
into a corresponding system is confirmed to the end-user through
the user interface 1234 (FIG. 2, 8A, 8B or 9).
[0619] First, if system .alpha._1132 and system .beta._1134
comprise the same function, the adaptive/non-adaptive system is
identified using data of a position in which unit 1290 (device
1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) is arranged, as
described in Section 4.2.
[0620] Next, a situation occurring when the same unit 1290 (device
1250, or combination module 1295, 1460 or 1470) is used across
system .alpha._1132, system .beta._1134, etc., and a method of
handling it are described. As an example of unit 1290, C-format may
be used, as shown in FIG. 17A, as communication middleware layer
APL02 used when combination module 1295 communicates data with
system controller .beta._1128. Alternatively, another format may be
used for data communication with combination module 1295 as
communication middleware layer APL02. As another example of unit
1290, not only A-, E- and W-formats but also the extension
application layer EXL06 may be used, as shown in FIG. 17B, for
communication middleware layer APL06 used when device 1250
communicates data with system controller .beta._1128. As shown
above, different formats may be used on communication middleware
layers APL02 and APL06 depending on unit 1290 (device 1250,
combination module 1295 or 3583) to be used.
[0621] FIG. 36A shows a configuration example of system controller
3581 configured to mutually communicate with various units 1290
(combination modules 3583). FIG. 36A shows various processing
executers by connections of hardware forms for ease of description.
The structure of system controller 3581 may be composed of the
connections of hardware forms in this manner. Alternatively, if
system controller .alpha._1126 is composed of processor 1230 and
memory 1232 as shown in FIG. 2, the Internet connector 3581a to the
Internet matching data output unit 3581g shown in FIG. 36A
correspond to a processing flow executed in processor 1230.
[0622] A plurality of combination modules 3583 developed by
different makers are present as a unit or combination module 3583
which is an example of the unit. Further, different formats
(standards) may be used on communication middleware layer APL02 for
each combination module 3583. Thus, different formats (first to
n.sup.th communication standards) are available on communication
middleware layer APL02 such that the same system controller 3581
can mutually communicate with various combination modules.
Accordingly, different communication standards are identified in
the communication standard recognition unit 3581c in system
controller 3581, and processing is properly performed in accordance
with the communication standards based on the identification
result. Then, the universality of system controller 3581 is
improved, producing an advantage of communicating data with
different combination modules 3583 developed by different
makers.
[0623] Various formats which are used in communication middleware
layers APL02 and APL06, and described in Section 2.1 comprise:
[0624] A-format written in text format in a broad sense;
[0625] C-format in "command/request/response/status" form;
[0626] E-format in which a setting code is stored in a
predetermined area; and
[0627] W-format in which the transmission side is entered in a
specific field, or in which a tag specific to HTML/HTML5 is
described. Thus, data described in communication middleware layers
APL02 and APL06 (data described in the communication middleware
data APLDT of FIG. 11) is analyzed, and the corresponding
communication standard can be identified by determining which
format the data corresponds to.
[0628] Combination module 3583 is connected to the Internet 3585
through an access point 3584A and/or a base station 3584B, as shown
in the embodiment of FIG. 17A. The Internet 3585 in FIG. 36A
corresponds to the out-system network line 1788 in FIG. 17A.
Although it is omitted in FIG. 37A, the battery built-in router
(gateway) 1300 in FIG. 17A is placed between the Internet 3585 and
the Internet connector 3581a in system controller 3581.
[0629] Combination module 3583 may comprise sensor module 1260 as
shown in, for example, FIG. 4B (a) or (b), and transmit a detection
signal from sensor module 1260. Alternatively, identification data
may be stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 (FIG.
7B) of communication module 1660 in combination module 3583, and
may be accessed from outside through the Internet 3585 and the base
station 3584B using the data (or address of combination module 3583
[for example, IP addresses SIPADRS and DIPADRS in FIG. 13]).
[0630] As described in Section 1.6, communication module 1660 with
the structure of FIG. 7A or 7B is used also in part of
communication module 1202-3 (FIG. 2) in system controller 3581 and
system controller .alpha._1126. Thus, the Internet connector 3581a
in FIG. 36A corresponds to the data communication executor 3016 in
FIG. 7A. Similarly, a protocol recognition unit 3581b in FIG. 36A
corresponds to the physical layer frame analyzer 1918 in FIG. 7A,
and a data detector 3581d in FIG. 36A corresponds to the content
extraction unit 1938 in FIG. 7A. The Internet matching data output
unit 3581g in FIG. 36A corresponds to the physical layer frame
generator 1914 in FIG. 7A. Both of the communication standard
recognition unit 3581c and a communication standard matching format
setting unit 3581f in FIG. 36A correspond to the combination of the
signal processor 1780 and processor 1736 in FIG. 7B. The processing
performed in a data processor 3581e of FIG. 36A is executed in
processor 1230 in FIG. 2.
[0631] As shown in FIG. 17A, combination modules 3583 and 1295 can
be connected to system controller 3581 (system controller
.beta._1128) through the Internet 3585. Communication data used at
this moment comprises a structure shown in FIG. 11. The source IP
address data SIPADRS and the destination IP address data DIPADRS
are stored in it, as shown in FIG. 13.
[0632] A signal received in the Internet connector 3581a is
analyzed in the protocol recognition unit 3581b. The IPv6 header
IPv6HD and the communication middleware data APLDT (and the
extension data EXDT) in FIG. 11 are individually extracted in the
protocol recognition unit 3581b. Then, the extracted communication
middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) is analyzed in the
communication standard recognition unit 3581c.
[0633] The communication standard recognition unit 3581c comprises
a data processing routine for analyzing formats of various
communication standards in advance. Thus, the communication
standard recognition unit 3581c can easily determine which of A-,
E-, and W-formats (FIG. 17B) a combination module adopts, or
whether C-format (FIG. 17A) is adopted. After a corresponding
communication standard is recognized, it is input to the content
(for example, sensor detection data) data processor 3581e extracted
in the data detector 3581d.
[0634] In the present embodiment, after a communication standard to
which the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension
data EXDT) in received communication data conforms is automatically
determined, the communication middleware data APLDT (and the
extension data EXDT) is generated based on the format conforming to
the communication standard, and a response is transmitted to
destination unit 1290. Specifically, the communication middleware
data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) is generated in the
communication standard matching format setting unit 3581f based on
data of the communication standard (formats of communication
middleware layers APL02 and APL06) identified in the communication
standard recognition unit 3581c. This produces an advantage of
allowing system controller 3581 to stably communicate data with a
plurality of units 1290 (or combination modules 1295) developed by
other makers.
[0635] That is, as described above, the communication standard on
communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (and the extension
application layer EXL06) used by corresponding unit 1290 (or
combination module 3583) is already recognized in the communication
standard recognition unit 3581c. Thus, the data transmitted from
the data processor 3581e is converted into the communication
middleware data APLDT (FIG. 11) and, if necessary, the extension
data EXDT based on the data in the communication standard matching
format setting unit 3581f. As a result, destination unit 1290 of
transmission (reply) (or combination module 3583) can recognize the
communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT).
Transmission data of a predetermined data format is input to the
Internet matching data output unit 3581g.
[0636] FIG. 36B shows an example of combination module 3583 (or
unit 1290) moving to different areas. Network system .alpha._1132
and network system .beta._1134 are present in each area. Thus,
system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2 and 3581-3 which are configured
to control and manage network communication, and to acquire data in
a network system are placed in each area. System controllers
3581-1, 3581-2 and 3581-3 arranged in each area comprise the same
structure as system controller 3581 in FIG. 36A.
[0637] As described above, all of system controller 3581-1, 3581-2
and 3581-3 flexibly conform to different formats (communication
standards) on communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (and
the extension application layer EXL06). Thus, combination module
3583 (or unit 1290) can mutually communicate with system
controllers 3581-1, 3581-2 and 3581-3 regardless of the area it may
move to.
[0638] Chapter 5 Examples of Various Applicable Fields
[0639] Section 5.1 Examples of Application to Consumer Electronics
Technology
[0640] Section 5.1.1 Example of Application of Wide Area Network
System to Consumer Electronics Technology
[0641] As an example of application of a wide area network system
shown in FIG. 1 to the consumer electronics technology, "specific
information" may be related to the goods to be circulated among a
wholesale firm B1_1104-1, a service provider B_1112-2 and system
.alpha._1132. For example, the service provider B_1112-2 collects
materials from the wholesale firm B1_1104-1, such as wide-area
weather information from such the Meteorological Agency, accident
information from the police stations or road congestion information
from the road traffic information center, and processes the
information into useful form for each area, to be published on the
Internet. A general end user may operate a personal computer
(system controller .alpha._1126) on hand to receive browsing
service of such information.
[0642] Further, as an example of application to the consumer
electronics technology, each of domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3 shown
in FIG. 1 may be related to a predetermined activity area on the
network, of a member or members who constitutes a specific group
relating to a family (for a single person, the person is counted as
one family) or a business, or hobby/community. Moreover, a specific
member on a social network service (SNS) may form a specific one of
domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3 as the above-described specific
group.
[0643] Furthermore, as another specific example, in which when
system .alpha._1132 shown in FIG. 1 is related to PAN constituted
at home of an individual user, system .beta._1134 may be related to
the network environment (the specific PAN environment or LAN
environment) in a place from home. In this case, the personal
digital assistant in hand of the user at the place from home, such
as a smart phone and a tablet, is related to a system controller
.beta._1128. Here, the system .beta._1134 may be related to, not
only one set of the personal digital assistant, but also the entire
local network space (constructed within physically or
geographically close specific area) to where the system controller
.beta._1128 is connected may be related to the entire system
.beta._1134. Examples which show the relationship between the
system .alpha._1132 and the system .beta._1134 in the domain
2_1122-2 are as follows. That is, there is such a method that a
user operates the above-mentioned personal digital assistant
(system controller .beta._1128) out of the system .beta._1134 of
the place from home, to enter the domain 2_1122-2 with
identification information ID and its own password specific to the
domain, and controls a specific equipment in system .alpha._1132
constructed in the house. There is also another method to receive
an original service based on the information from a predetermined
sensor module in the house (system .alpha._1132) (for example, to
obtain in a place from home a suggestion of a dinner recipe from
the foods material information stored in the refrigerator of the
house).
[0644] Section 5.1.2 Examples of Application of Combination Module
to Consumer Electronics Technology
[0645] As an example of application to the consumer electronics
technology, the sensor combination module 1460 or actuator
combination module 1470 may be attached to a commercially-available
small-size household appliance such as an alarm clock, a
flashlight, a toothbrush or a drier, to drastically improve the
function of the household appliance at low cost as an advantageous
effect. Here, as the method of attaching the sensor combination
module 1460 and the actuator combination module 1470 to the
commercially-available small-size household appliance, it is not
always necessary to fix it with a screw, but, for example, it may
be attached temporarily using a double-stick tape or adhesive. By
merely attaching (adhering) a sensor combination module 1460, for
example, of one of various kinds, to one of these household
appliances, various types of sensor functions can be added to these
household appliances very easily. Various types of information
detected by these sensor combination modules 1460 are collected in
the system controller .alpha._1126. Further, by merely attaching
(adhering) an actuator combination module 1470 which generates
sound or light, for example, to these small-size household
appliances, a new additional function can be provided to these
small-size household appliances very easily. These addition
functions are controlled by the system controller .alpha._1126 in
an integral manner. Thus, the household appliances with the new
additional functions are able to provide the optimal service for a
user's action or status. For example, if a user has a problem of
waking on time in the morning, such a service can be provided that
an alarm clock outputs the notification by a loud human voice. Or
if a user left a specific small-size household appliance at home,
or nowhere to find it in the house, such a service can be provided
that the small-size household appliance itself tells the user where
to find.
[0646] Other examples of application will be described below. That
is, for example, sensor combination modules 1460 with such a
function as a temperature sensor, a wind sensor, a sound sensor, a
photo-sensor or a short-range human presence sensor are installed
in numerous places in the section 2_1142-2 (room), to enable
communications within the system .alpha._1132 with respect to the
system controller .alpha._1126. Simultaneously, a actuator
combination module 1470 is build in the remote controller for
controlling device such as an air-conditioner, television or a
lighting device, to enable the system controller .alpha._1126 to
control device such as the air-conditioner, television, lighting
device via the remote control. In this manner, the system
controller .alpha._1126 is able to ascertain the distribution
characteristics in the temperature, wind, sound, brightness
(luminance) and the motion of people in the section 2_1142-2 in
detail. Then, based on the result of ascertaining, the device is
controlled at the optimal conditions for the user.
[0647] Especially, in a large room, the air conditioning effect
greatly deviates, and therefore the difference in temperature or
wind force tends to be large from one place to another. In such a
situation, by way of the above-described service, the level of
satisfaction of users using a large room can be significantly
improved. With this method, the level of satisfaction of many users
can be advantageously and efficiently improved by merely replacing
the commercially-available remote control with the above-described
remote controller with the built-in actuator combination module
1470 without a necessity of replacing the already installed main
body of the commercially-available device (such an air-conditioner,
television or lighting device).
[0648] Here, in the communications where the remote control with
the built-in actuator combination module 1470 is used as the device
1450-4 with the built-in actuator combination module 1470-2 shown
in FIG. 8B, C-format, which is capable of communicating much
simplified communication information described in Chapter 2 using
FIG. 25, may be used. Not only this, it is also possible to improve
the configuration of the remote controller to the level of the
device 1250-1 with the built-in actuator module 1270-1, the
communication module 1202-4 and the device controller 1240-1 as
shown in FIG. 8A. In this case, A-format or E-format, which will be
described later, may be used for the communications within the
system .alpha._1132 with respect to the system controller
.alpha._1126.
[0649] Next, a further application example will be provided. That
is, FIG. 37B shows a state in which milk 3506 purchased by a
purchaser is stored in a refrigerator 3521. The container of the
milk 3506 is equipped with a combination module 3523. The
combination module 3523 is attached the outer surface of the milk
container and covered with a seal. Meanwhile, a system controller
3522 is installed inside the refrigerator 3521, and the system
controller 3522 can communicate with the combination module
3523.
[0650] It should be noted here that the combination module 3523
contains an antenna-equipped communication module 1666 (FIG. 4A
(b)) so as to be able to store self-attribute data 1793 in the
communication module 1666. The system controller 3522 can request a
reply of contents of the self-attribute data 1793 from the
combination module 3523. As the result, the system controller 3522
can check the "best-before-date data" contained in the
self-attribute data. Since the system controller 3522 has the
present date data therein, the best-before-date data obtained and
the date data are compared to measure the degree of how close to
the end of the best-before date of the milk. That is, for example,
the system controller 3522 can detect the cases of, for example,
within one week, within four days, within two days, within one day
or the expiration of the best-before date.
[0651] Not only that, moreover, but also the system controller 3522
can receive the self-attribute data 1793 from the combination
module 3523 provided on each of the articles, foods, etc., in the
refrigerator 3521. Thus, the system controller 3522 can display the
list data of the foods, articles, etc., stored in the refrigerator
on a display 3525 provided on the refrigerator 3521 using the
communication line in the network. The user, as viewing the display
3525 of the refrigerator 3521, can confirm the status of the
best-before date of the milk 3506. Then, under the control of the
system controller 3522, the status of the best-before date of the
milk 3506 can be displayed by changing the color on the display
3525. For example, when the status of the best-before date of the
milk 3506 is within one week, green may be indicated, and blue for
the status within four days, yellow for the status within two days,
pink for the status within one day and red for the status of the
expiration of the best-before date. In place of changing the color,
this display method may use various indicating modes, for example,
a bar indication and a warning message display. Moreover, when the
self-attribute data 1793 contains data of purchase date and store
identification data, these data may be indicated on the display
3525.
[0652] An example where the combination module 3531 is buried in
the heel portion of a shoe 3505 is shown in FIG. 37C. The
combination module 3531 contains a pressure sensor, a moisture
sensor, etc., built thereinto. When the user goes home, the
combination module 3531 and the system controller 3532 at home
mutual communicate to read from the system controller 3532 the
number-of-walking-steps data and humidity data previously recorded
in the combination module 3531. Thus, the system controller 3532
can calculate the number of walking steps by the user for the day.
Not only that, moreover, but also the present humidity data in the
shoes 3505 can be obtained. Using the results, the number of
walking steps made by the user for the day and the humidity of the
shoe can be displayed on the smart phone 3533, for example.
[0653] Section 5.1.3 Example of Application of Section Division
Method to Consumer Electronics Technology
[0654] In Section 5.1.3, examples of the application of the section
division method to the consumer electronics technology will be
described. FIG. 24 shows an example of division of one entire
housing site into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m when the housing
site is related to the system .alpha._1132. For FIG. 25, the
description was made by relating the sections 1_1142-1-m_1142-m to
every room. By comparison, FIG. 24 is directed to a slightly wider
concept, in which also the yard in the housing site is related to
one section 10_1142-10. Further, as in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8B, the
space in the car is related to one section 1_1142-1 in FIG. 24.
Also, as in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8B, the place where the smart meter
1124 is placed is withdrawn from the objects of the sections in
FIG. 24, but the configuration is not limited to this. The place
where the smart meter 1124 is placed may be defined as a specific
independent section. Moreover, sections 3_1142-3 to 8_1142-8 are
assigned to respective rooms including a toilet or a bathroom. In
the system of this embodiment, the section division is not
necessarily carried out for each room, but an "entire detached
house", which is partitioned into a plurality of rooms within
itself, may be assigned to one section 2_1142-2. Moreover, for
example, a storeroom, which is a space where the user is not often
present may be related to section 9_1142-9.
[0655] Moreover, an example in which the results of integration and
management of data collected for each section 1142 are actually
used is as follows. That is, the system controller .alpha._1126 (or
the processor 1230 thereof) may estimate or judge in units of
sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, the presence/absence of the end user
and action/state (which is whether the end user is awake or asleep,
or he or she is an adult or child, etc.). Moreover, the integration
or management of collected data may be performed not only in units
of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m as described above, but also in
units of, for example, systems .alpha.-.beta._1132-1134 (for
example, it is estimated/judged how many users are at home in one
housing site).
[0656] An example of the method of providing services to users will
be described. That is, the setting of temperature of the
air-conditioner, the ON/OFF or brightness control of lighting, the
output volume control of TV, radio, audio deck, etc., may be
performed in units of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. In this
manner, such fine services can be provided in units of sections
1142, and thus there is also an advantageous effect of saving power
consumption within systems .alpha.-.beta._1132-1134 (energy-saving
measures).
[0657] Section 5.2 Example of Application to Social Infrastructure
Field
[0658] Section 5.2.1 Example of Application 1 of Wide-Area Network
System to Social Infrastructure Field
[0659] When the wide-area network system shown in FIG. 1 is applied
to the social infrastructure field (Social Infrastructure
Technology), a state, a local government and a public institution
such as a public corporation or a charitable corporation, are also
related to wholesale firms A_1102, B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2. Here,
the information (merchandise) to be handled by the wholesale firms
A_1102, B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2, may be related to the personal
information of a citizen of a nation, prefecture, a city, a
metropolis, such as a domicile or resident card, a tax-payment
history and the like. Or the information (merchandise) to be
handled by the Public Roads Administration and the Housing
Corporation may be related to the road congestion information and
accident information, land cost (land price) for each region, and
housing data. When applied to the social infrastructure field, in
particular, the infrastructure owned, managed or run by the
wholesale firms A_1102, B1_1104-1, and B2_1104-2 (for example,
power lines, water-and-sewage pipes, utility gas pipes), or the
delivery systems (delivery means using trains, trucks, etc.) can be
utilized.
[0660] First, an example of services of a railroad or traffic
infrastructure to be provided under a commission from the public
organization of a state, a local government and a public
corporation, a charitable corporation, etc., will be described.
Here, information of deterioration of a road, an iron bridge, a
tunnel, a railroad track for each area are periodically notified
from the system controller .alpha._1126 to the server n_1116-n. The
information of all the servers 1_1116-1 to n_1116-n in the service
provider B_1112-2 are integrated for planning for a future road
reconstruction or issuing a warning of abnormality, and reported
(notified) to the commissioning agency, that is, the state, the
local government or the public organization (which corresponds to
wholesale firms A/B_1102/1104). Another example of integrative
management of systems for a railroad, traffic, postal,
transportation and air-traffic control will be described. Various
types of service situations and accident information periodically
notified from the system controller .alpha._1126 to the server
n_1116-n are managed in an integrative manner, and service change
instructions as needed are notified to the system controller
.alpha._1126 or system controller .beta._1128 from the service
provider B_1112-2. The service provider B_1112-2 which provides
these services is specifically related to a particular social
infrastructure management organization and a social system
management organization (a business corporation or a charitable
corporation). Not only the above, moreover, but also, for example,
an NPO corporation and an NPO may be related to the service
provider B_1112-2.
[0661] The above-described examples are directed to the methods in
which only the single service provider 1112 provides services. The
system of this embodiment is not limited to this, but also, two or
more service providers A/B_1112/1114 may cooperate with each other
to provide services. That is, as explained in the above-provided
description of Section 1.7 using FIG. 1, data-and-resource sharing
1114 is carried out between the service provider A_1112-1 and the
service provider B_1112-2 or between the service provider B_1112-2
and the service provider C_1112-3, thus making it possible to
improve the efficiency and the advancement of the service. When
this structure is combined with the information acquired by the
smart meter 1124, such an advantageous effect can be obtained, that
new effective use and diversion of public consumption items can be
obtained. As an example thereof, let us consider a case where the
electric power supply is received using the infrastructure and
distribution system of the wholesale firm A_1102, and the payment
for the power amount is made to the service provider A_1112-1 of
the power retailer, and the waterworks supply is received using the
infrastructure and distribution system of the wholesale firm
B-2_1104-2 and the sewage disposal service is obtained using the
infrastructure and delivery system of the wholesale firm B1_1104-1,
and the payment for the amount of the water and sewage used is made
to the service provider B_1112-2 of the water-and-sewage retailer.
Database 1118-n corresponding to server n_1116-n in the service
provider B stores the collected information acquired from the smart
meter 1124, which include, for example, the amount of water
reserved in the system .alpha._1132 in real time (the difference in
the amount of water supplied via the waterworks and the amount of
water discharged via the sewer), and the water pressure information
in the waterworks. Here, if "information of momentary sudden rise
in the power consumption fee" and "a request to limit the power
consumption" in a specific time zone are received from the service
provider A_1112-1 of the power retailer, the server n_1116-n in the
service provider B_1112-2 of the water-and-sewage retailer reads
the stored data in the database 1118-n and determines whether or
not the water-power generation is possible based on the amount of
water stored in the target system .alpha._1132, or the water
pressure in the waterworks. When the water-power generation within
the target system .alpha._1132 is possible as a result of the
determination, the server n_1116-n makes a proposal to the system
controller .alpha._1126a to "switch to the water-power generation"
in the system .alpha._1132. Thus, such an advantageous effect can
be obtained that not only to decrease the power rates in the system
.alpha._1132, but also the risk of an excessive amount of power
used in the respective area can be avoided.
[0662] Next, another service form different from the contents
described above will be described. The system of this embodiment is
described in Section 1.7 in connection with the case where there
are a plurality of commodity supply courses from the wholesale firm
A_1102 towards the smart meter 1124 which serves as a sales window
for supplying a specific commodity into the domain 2_1122-2 or the
system .alpha._1132 (the direct course indicated by "dashed lines"
from the wholesale firm A_1102 into the smart meter 1124 and the
course via the service provider A_1112-1 in FIG. 1). A specific
example of the method of providing services carried out by the
service provider A_1112-1 in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system
.alpha._1132 based on the advantage of the above-described feature,
and its unique effect obtained thereby will be described below.
Here, as examples of the commodity related to the service, public
consumption items such as electric power, gas, water service,
gasoline, etc., whose charges change depending on the region where
or time when they are utilized, will be discussed. Naturally, not
only those, but also other services or commodities (for example,
general consumer goods, trading of fixed assets, etc., using
networks, circulation of specific information, and the like) may be
subjects of the application. For example, when a public consumption
item is used in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system .alpha._1132
during the winter and summer seasons and daytimes, in which the
cost of the utility becomes high, the quantity equivalent to the
amount of use in the wholesale firm A_1102 measured with the smart
meter 1124 is returned from a predetermined commodity storage 1154
(for example, a storage battery or a water or gas tank) to the
wholesale firm A_1102. On the other hand, when the cost of utility
is low, such as nighttime and the time when the use of an
air-conditioning equipment is not needed, the public consumption
item is purchased from the wholesaler A1102 and stored in the
predetermined commodity storage 1154. Thus, the substantial cost of
utility to be paid by the end user (the user in the domain 2_1122-2
or the system .alpha._1132) for the public consumption item can be
reduced. Simultaneously, the service provider A_1112-1 can receive
part of the reduction amount of the cost of use of the public
consumption item (that is, profit margin) as remuneration.
Furthermore, with the above-described method, such a new
advantageous effect can be obtained that the amount of use of the
public consumption items as viewed over a very wide area (the
amount of the commodities supplied by the wholesale firm A_1102
[the public consumption items]) can be smoothed (that is, the
temporary increase and decrease in the amount of use of the public
consumption items caused by a season or time can be reduced).
[0663] In the case of returning the quantity equivalent to the
amount of use in the wholesale firm A_1102 measured with the smart
meter 1124 from the predetermined commodity storage 1154 to the
wholesale firm A_1102, as described above, a high control accuracy
is required in the charge/discharge controller or storage/outflow
controller. In order to achieve a high control accuracy, the system
of this embodiment performs a real-time feedback of the
charge/discharge or storage/outflow amount in the charge/discharge
controller or storage/outflow controller (and similarly the
portions corresponding to the inflow controller 1214 and the
outflow controller 1212) based on detected information (detection
signal) from a charge/discharge monitor or storage/outflow monitor
(which is a portion corresponding to the inflow monitor 1218 or
outflow monitor controller 1216, which will be described later
using FIG. 8A and FIG. 9, present in the predetermined commodity
storage 1154, but omitted from the illustration in FIG. 1). Not
only that, as needed, the total cumulative amount of
charge/discharge or storage/outflow for a predetermined period may
be calculated out and compared with a predetermined target value to
use the amount corresponding to the differential value with respect
to the target value as a feedback on the amount of charge/discharge
or the storage/outflow in the next predetermined period. Thus, with
the implementation of the above-described control method, such an
advantageous effect can be obtained that the accuracy in the
control of the total cumulative amount for each predetermined
period is improved to become able to suppress the loss (the amount
of deviation in the gains, caused by the shortage of controllable
amount) in the dealing of public consumption items to the
minimum.
[0664] Incidentally, when applying the wide-area network system to
the social infrastructure field, one of the domains 1_1122-1 to
3_1122-3 shown in FIG. 1 may be related to an entire specific
social infrastructure or an entire specific social system. For
example, a unit of administration or status observation of a
railroad, traffic, postal, air-traffic control, transportation and
public consumption item production business, etc., for a
predetermined group (a specific corporation or specific corporation
group), or a unit of administration or status observation of any
other social infrastructures and social systems may be related to a
respective one of the domains 1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3. Furthermore, a
large group of administrations or observations of statues of an
activity of a specific community, a predetermined organization or a
predetermined corporation whose dispersed activities for each area
are integrated by a network, may be related to one of the domains
1_1122-1 to 3_1122-3.
[0665] On the other hand, one of the systems
.alpha./.beta._1132/1134 shown in FIG. 1 may be related to one
building or area. That is, the objects of the power saving system
(energy management system) are called as Home Energy Management
System (HEMS), Building Energy Management System (BEMS) or
Community Energy Management System (CEMS), depending on the scale
or size. Here, one of the systems .alpha./.beta._1132/1134 in this
embodiment may be related to one management unit of the HEMS, BEMS
or CEMS.
[0666] Moreover, an example of relationship between the domain 1122
and the systems .alpha./.beta._1132/1134 as a specific relating
method other than the above will be described. For example, when
the domain 1122 is related to the operation management or status
observation of a specific railroad company, an automatic ticket
gate system, a ticket issuing system, a commuter pass issuing
system, an operation situation management system for each train, an
automatic breakage state management system for a railroad track, a
train breakage state management system, a platform degradation
management system, a power supply state management system for each
train, a malfunctional warning system in a train/on a platform, an
in-train system for arresting a molester, a management system for
managing duty and salary payment for train crews and station
officers, a salary payment/accounting system or the like may be
related to one of the systems 1132-4. Moreover, when the domain
1122 is related to the administration and state management of a
traffic or transportation business, a degradation management system
for a road, an iron bridge or a tunnel, a road accident information
management system, a traffic congestion management system, a
breakage state management system for transportation means (truck,
etc.), a gate management system (for a highway, etc.) (including an
ETC management system), a check-in-and-out office management system
for employees, a salary payment accounting system, or the like may
be related to one of the systems 1132-4.
[0667] On the other hand, in Section 1.7, it is discussed that in
the case where one system .alpha._1132 is related to a physically
or geographically close specific area, one domain 2_1122-2 can be
related to a region on a network which transcends the physical or
geographical space. When, accordingly, an entire management system
for degradation of a road, an iron bridge and a tunnel is related
to one domain 2_1122-2, the degradation management unit of the
road, iron bridge and tunnel set up for each area may be related
the respective one of the systems .alpha..beta._1132/1134.
[0668] Section 5.2.2 Examples of Application of Combination Module
to Social Infrastructure Field
[0669] When the system of this embodiment is applied to the social
system or Social infrastructure, the sensor combination modules
1460 may be placed on part of or in the vicinity of a signal, a
road, entrance or exit gate of a highway or the like, or a public
bulletin board (including an electronic bulletin board) for the
system controller .alpha._1126 to ascertain the traffic situation
and traffic congestion situation of pedestrians and vehicles, and
notify only necessary information to the server n_1116-n. In this
case, the device 1450 may be related to the signal, electronic
gate, electronic bulletin board or the like. Further, in relation
to this case, the section later described in Chapter 4 may be
related to a predetermined region in the vicinity of the signal,
electronic gate or electronic bulletin board, or within a specific
zone of a road.
[0670] Especially, the sensor combination modules 1460 described
above have a feature of easily adaptable to light weight/small
size/power saving (an external power supply being unnecessary).
Therefore, taking advantage of this merit, various and numerous
sensor combination modules 1460 may be installed in roads, bridge
beams and tunnels or piping parts (of water and sewage etc.), and
thus the roads, bridge beams and tunnels or the insides of the
piping parts can be easily monitored for degradation for a long
period. With respect to the various sensed information acquired
here, only the necessary information can be extracted, that is, for
example, the detection of changed components, in the system
controller .alpha._1126, and thus the analysis or data processing
by the server n_1116-n side is facilitated.
[0671] Another example of the application of the above-described
sensor combination modules 1460 to the social infrastructure field
is as follows. That is, the sensor combination modules 1460 may be
attached to carts in stores, such as a supermarket, a convenience
store and a department store, to collect the information on the
behavioral history of customers in the store. From the collected
behavioral histories of the customers, for example, a "counter
where customers stay long" and an "order of counters in which
customers visit" can be extracted, which may be reflected in the
marketing (market research), such as commodity exhibition in store.
Thus, there is an effect of contributing to the enhancement of
sales of the store.
[0672] Incidentally, in a large space, especially, for example,
such as an office, a hospital, a large-sized store, the air
conditioning effect is significantly uneven, and thus there is a
high tendency that the temperature and wind force significantly
differ from one place to another. Here, as in Section 5.1.2, by
installing the sensor combination modules 1460 with functions, such
as a temperature sensor, a wind sensor, a sound sensor, a
photo-sensor and or a short-range human presence to numerous places
in an office, hospital, large-sized store building and the like,
the bias in the air conditioning effect in a large space can be
significantly reduced, and thus such an advantageous effect of
enhancing the degree of satisfaction of many customers.
[0673] Another embodiment which practically utilizes the
combination module 1295 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4A (a)
or (b), all the combination modules 1295 contain communication
modules 1660. Moreover, as described in Section 1.6 using FIG. 7B,
there is a self-attribute data storage region 1793 in each
communication module 1660. In each product, commodity, part or the
like, provided with the combination module 1295, the contents of
the self-attribute data 1793 are changed or switched according to
the situation of use. The term "situation of use" used here covers
a change of the area where the product, commodity, part or the like
is located (that is, the change of the system in which the
combination module 1295 is placed as shown in FIG. 37B), or a
change of lapsed time, or a change of conditions. When the
combination module 1295 is used as the sensor combination module
1460, the circumferential state in various operating environments
can be monitored in combination with sensors.
[0674] FIG. 37A schematically shows, for example, an inside area
3501 of a supermarket, a cash register area 3502 and an exit area
3503 of the supermarket. Here, the inside area of the supermarket
corresponds to one independent system .alpha._1132 (see FIG. 1).
Cash registers 3511a and 2511b shown in FIG. 37A each operate as
the system controller .alpha._1126. Let us suppose here that in the
system .alpha._1132, a pair of shoes 3505, milk 3506, and a bag
3507 are sold as commodities.
[0675] Each of the shoes 3505, milk 3506 and bag 3507 is provided
with the sensor combination module 1460 as the combination module
1295. A specific example of the attaching method is that a
sheet-like sensor combination module 1460 (combination module 1295)
is adhered to each respective commodity with adhesive. Not only
that, it may be inserted (or mixed) to the shoes 3505, milk 3506
and bag 3507. Here, it is assumed that part of the self-attribute
data 1793 contains an antitheft flag (for example, "1"). When the
purchaser finishes payment, the information of the antitheft flag
is erased under the control of the cash register 3511a or 2511b of
the cash register area 3502. More specifically, for example, when
the cash register 3511a reads the bar code in which the price of
the commodity is indicated, a read completion signal is transmitted
to the combination module 1295 (or the sensor combination module
1460 or unit 1290) in the commodity. Then, the corresponding
combination module 1295 (or sensor combination module 1460 or unit
1290) determines that the payment is completed at the time of
reception of the reading completion signal and erases the antitheft
flag to be "0". Furthermore, the cash register 3511a or 2511b can
add the identification data of the supermarket and the date data of
the payment to the self-attribute data storage region 1793.
[0676] If a commodity is passed through the exit area 3503 of the
supermarket while the antitheft flag has not been erased (the
payment has not been made), an alarm will be output automatically.
That is, the monitoring device 3512 which can output an alarm is
installed in the exit area 3503 of the supermarket. As described in
Section 4.4, according to the system of this embodiment, the
locations of all the combination modules 1295 (or sensor
combination modules 1460) can be detected in real time. Therefore,
when the combination module 1295 (or sensor combination module
1460) passes through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket,
communications of information are automatically made with respect
to the system controller .alpha._1126 (cash register 3511a or
2511b). If the antitheft flag is "1", the alarm is output from the
monitoring device. On the other hand, if the antitheft flag is "0",
the alarm is not output from the monitoring device 3512.
[0677] The above-provided example of the system of the embodiment
describes the case where store clerks are placed at the cash
registers 3511a and 3511b and the antitheft flag is stored in the
self-attribute data storage region 1793. Not only that, however,
but also the selling price of a target commodity may be recorded in
advance in the self-attribute data storage region 1793. When the
combination modules 1295 (or sensor combination modules 1460 or
units 1290), which store the selling prices in advance, pass
through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket, the total amount of
the payment to be paid by the purchaser is displayed automatically.
Also, the combination module 1295 (or sensor combination module
1460 or unit 1290) is mounted similarly in the wearing articles (a
tiepin, a necklace, etc.) which the purchaser has put on, and as
the purchaser passes through the unattended cash registers 3511a
and 3511b, the total amount of payment will be charged directly to
the bank account of the purchaser automatically. In addition, in
order to make it possible, the bank account number and password of
the purchaser are recorded in advance in the self-attribute data
storage region 1793 in the combination module 1295 (or sensor
combination module 1460 or unit 1290) mounted in the purchaser's
worn articles.
[0678] Instead of mounting the combination module 1295 (or sensor
combination module 1460 or unit 1290) on which the accounting
information of the purchaser is recorded in a worn article as
described above, the module may be placed in the purchaser's body
by, for example, swallowing as described later in Section
5.3.2.
[0679] As described above, the use of the combination module 1295
(or sensor combination module 1460), not only the prevention of
theft, but also the automatic charging, which does not require the
presence of a clerk, can be achieved. Thus, such an advantageous
effect can be obtained that the labor cost can be significantly cut
down to help the enhancement of the profit of the supermarket.
[0680] FIG. 37D shows an example which uses the combination module
for, for example, a system which inspects the corrosion state of
the steel frame supporting a wall of a building, the wall of a
tunnel, a bridge, etc. For example, steel frames 3541a, 3541b,
3541c and so on support the back side of a wall 3540 of a tunnel to
be inspected. The combination modules 3542 and 3543 are attached to
the surface of each of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c. In
FIG. 37D, the communication modules 3542 and 3543 attached to the
steel frame 3541a appear on the drawing. When the wall 3540 to be
inspected has a shielding effect on the radio wave, an antenna 1480
is externally installed to the communication module 1660 in the
combination module 1295 (FIG. 4A (a)). The external antenna 1480 is
set at a position where the radio waves which can be transmitted
and received. That is, in the example of FIG. 37D, antennas 3542a
and 3543b of the combination modules 3542 and 3543 are guided out
on the outer surface of the wall 3540 to be inspected through the
lead lines which penetrate the wall 3540 to be inspected.
[0681] Here, the sensor modules 1260 (FIG. 4B (a)) in the
combination modules (sensor/communication modules) 3542 and 3543
are tightly attached to the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a,
3541b and 3541c via an insulating film. If the surface of any of
the steel frames 3541a, 3541b and 3541c rusts and rises, the
adhesion film will be torn and the sensor module 1260 will come
into direct contact with the rust. When the sensor module 1260
contacts the rust, the resistance in the sensor module 1260 will
fall. Therefore, by detecting the resistance in the sensor module
1260, the surface rusting state of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b
and 3541c can be ascertained.
[0682] In many cases of the examples of the system of this
embodiment described so far, the system controllers 1126 and 3546
are installed in the fixed system, whereas the units 1290 (or
combination module 1295) are movable. By comparison, the feature in
the example of the system of the embodiment shown in FIG. 37D (or
FIG. 37E to be described later) is that the units 1290 (or
combination modules 1295) are fixed and the system controllers 1126
and 3546 are movable. For example, there are some cases where the
sensor information of a very wide area region need to be obtained
at once or the situation of the system does not allow the system
controller .alpha._1126 to be installed easily. In such cases, the
units 1290 (or combination modules 1295) are installed in the fixed
system, and the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are moved as
described above to collect the sensor information of each unit 1290
(or combination module 1295). Thus, such an advantageous effect can
be obtained that the sensor information of a very wide area can be
easily acquired.
[0683] In the system of this embodiment, the identical units 1290
(or combination module 1295) are adaptable to several different
systems as described in Section 4.5. Therefore, even in this case,
each time different system controllers 1126 and 3546 are used for
different usages, the fixed units 1290 (or combination module 1295)
can operate appropriately for each respective usage.
[0684] In the example of the system of this embodiment shown in
FIG. 37D, the system controller 3546 is installed in a part of a
inspection vehicle 3545 (in FIG. 37D, the roof part of the
inspection vehicle 3545) and it passes through the vicinities of
the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the combination module. Each time
it passes through the vicinities of the antennas 3542a and 3543b of
the combination module, a command request of "respond of the
resistance in the sensor module 1260" is transmitted from the
system controller 3546 to each of the combination modules (units)
3542 and 3543. Then, in reply to the request command, a response of
"the resistance in the sensor module 1260" is made from each of the
combination modules (units) 3542 and 3543 to the system controller
3546 as requested. Thus, the system controller 3546 can inspect the
rusting state of all the steel frames 3541a, 3541b and 3541c. In
this manner, the periodical rust inspection can be carried out
easily at high accuracy. Note that the above-described rust
detection method is only an example and it is also possible to
detect rust using other detection means.
[0685] Thus, when an intolerable range of fall of the resistance is
detected in the sensor module 1260 as a result of the rust
inspection, the information on the specific steel frame 3541
degraded by rust is notified to the server n_1116-n of FIG. 1 from
the system controllers 3546 and 1126 via the Internet. In this
case, the wholesale firm B1_1104-1 of FIG. 1 corresponds to the
government or the Public Roads Administration. The contractor of
the maintenance of the walls under a commission of the government
or Public Roads Administration corresponds to the service provider
B_1112-2. The contractor of the maintenance the walls formulates a
repair plan on the basis of the information on the steel frame 3541
degraded by rust, which is stored in the server n_1116-n and
applies for the repair budget to the Public Roads Administration
(wholesale firm B1_1104-1).
[0686] FIG. 37E shows an example of application of the system of
this embodiment in which, for example, the combination module 1295
or unit 1290 is used for leak detection of a gas pipe, a water
pipe, a hydrant pipe or the like. The gas pipes, water pipes,
hydrant pipes, etc., are arranged underground along roads in many
cases. Therefore, the combination module (unit) 3549 is attached on
the surfaces of a pipe 3548, such as gas pipe, a water pipe or a
hydrant pipe. As the sensor module 1260 built into the combination
module (unit) 3549 and used for leak detection of a gas pipe, a
water pipe, a hydrant pipe, etc., a composite sensor in which a gas
sensor, a humidity (water) sensor, a sound sensor, a vibration
sensor, etc., are combined may be incorporated.
[0687] As in FIG. 37D, FIG. 37E shows that the system controller
3546 is mounted in the inspection vehicle 3545 (in FIG. 37E, the
system controller 3546 is mounted on the bottom of the inspection
vehicle 3545) and leaking is checked periodically. In reply to the
request command of the system controller 3546, the detection data
from the sensor module 1260 is returned to the system controller
3546 as in FIG. 37D. The system controller 3546 collects and
analyzes the sensor information from each combination module (unit)
3549 to determine the location of gas leak, water leak or the like.
Moreover, as in the case of FIG. 37D, the system of the embodiment
shown in FIG. 37E has such an advantageous effect that the abnormal
site can be detected in a wide area by a very simple method. In
addition, the system controllers 3546 may be provided by fixation
along the line of the pipes installed, instead of being mounted in
the inspection vehicle 3545.
[0688] FIG. 37F show an example in which the combination module
(unit) is applied to a greenhouse cultivation device. The
greenhouse cultivation device may be called, for example, a
greenhouse or a plastic greenhouse. A greenhouse 3550 is provided
with a system controller 3551 and a monitoring camera 3552, for
example. The monitoring camera 3552 can pick up the image of the
state of plants in the greenhouse house 3550, and transmit the
visual signal thus picked up to a monitor display of the grower
(owner).
[0689] Let us suppose that in the greenhouse house 2550, vegetables
such as carrots, Japanese radishes or burdocks are grown, for
example. In the case of such vegetables, it is not possible to
determine the growth condition under the surface of the ground only
by viewing from the outside. The system of the embodiment shown in
FIG. 37F is provided with bar-like monitoring devices 3553a, 3553b,
3553c, . . . , set in the ground, in each of which a plurality of
combination modules (units) are built.
[0690] The right-hand side of FIG. 37F shows an enlarged view of
the bar-like monitoring device 3553c. Here, the pentagonal portion
indicated the bar-like monitoring device 3553c is an attachment
plate of the monitoring device 3553c and has such a shape that the
tip is sharpened to be easily inserted into the ground. Combination
modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are equipped in the
longitudinal direction of the attachment plate. Moreover, each of
the combination modules (units) FC1 to FC5 contains within itself a
sensor module 1260 which can measure the size of a material in its
vicinity by, for example, transmission and reception of an
ultrasonic wave. The combination modules (unit) FD1 to FD5 are each
equipped with a sensor module 1260 containing a moisture sensor
which can measure humidity, for example. From the results of the
measurement obtained from the combination modules (units) FC1 to
FC5, the growth (length) information on near-by vegetables (carrots
or Japanese radishes) are collected. The method of collecting the
growth (length) information on the near-by vegetables (carrots or
Japanese radishes) is not limited to the imaging by ultrasonic
wave, but, for example, the near-infrared rays having a wavelength
within a range of 700 to 2500 nm may be used for the imaging.
Moreover, the measurement data of the humidity obtained from the
combination modules (units) FD1 to FD5 are useful to monitor the
underground moisture condition. The measurement data obtained by
the combination modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are
transmitted to the system controller 3551 through an antenna
ANT.
[0691] The output data of the combination modules (units) FC1 to
FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are compiled by the system controller 3551. The
compiled results are indicated as needed on the display for the
user to be able to easily determine the harvest time. Not only
that, moreover, but also, by monitoring the compiled results of the
measurement data of the humidity obtained from the combination
modules (units) FD1 to FD5, the user can see the appropriate time
for watering. Thus, an excellent growth of vegetables can be
monitored.
[0692] Furthermore, inside the greenhouse house 3550, a combination
module (unit) 3554 containing a built-in infrared sensor and/or
high-frequency high-sensitivity microphone is provided. The
combination module (unit) 3554 is operated periodically to monitor,
for example, pests and insects on the vegetables.
[0693] As other examples of the application of the system of the
embodiment, FIGS. 37G and 37H show that different types of
combination modules (units) are used in combination for monitoring.
In particular, FIG. 37G shows such a feature of the "detection of a
usually impermissible combination". Based on this, such an
advantageous effect can be obtained that the abnormality can be
detected with high efficiency and accuracy. Further, FIG. 37H shows
such a feature of the "detection of correlation between a plurality
of different identification data". Based on this, such an
advantageous effect can be obtained that that the accuracy of the
detection of the state can be improved. Thus, by obtaining sensor
information from a plurality of different types of combination
modules (units) simultaneously as described above, such an
advantageous effect can be obtained that the accuracy of detection
of a change in state can be improved.
[0694] First, a method of "detection of a usually impermissible
combination" will be described using FIG. 37G. For example, when a
weapon is located around a hospital, a school (an elementary, a
junior high, a high school or a university), a police station, or
the Imperial Palace, the system computer can detected such a
situation as an impossible combination of objects (specifically,
the detection of a metal using a metal detector, etc.). FIG. 37G
shows one concrete example of a room in a hospital. The room is
provided with, for example, a bed 3560 for patients and a box 3561
for medical instruments. Here, a combination module (unit) 3560a is
attached inside the bed 3560 for patients. Also, a combination
module (unit) 3561a is attached to the medical-instruments box
3561. The identification data of the bed 3560 is stored as
self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the combination module (unit)
3560a. Here, the identification data of the bed 3560 is ready to be
transmitted as needed in reply to a request from the system
controller 3562 installed outside. On the other hand, the
identification data of the medical-instruments box 3561 is stored
as self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the combination module
(unit) 3561a. Here, the identification data of the
medical-instruments box 3561 is ready to be transmitted as needed
in reply to a request from the system controller 3562 installed
outside. In this manner, the system controller 3562 can ascertain
the combination of items always present in the room. Thus, the
system controller 3562 comprises the database of various items
which may be present in the room.
[0695] Let us suppose here that a weapon 3565, such as a knife, is
brought into the room. The combination module (unit) 3565a is also
built into the weapons 3565, such as a knife. As the combination
module (unit) 3565a transmits the self-attribute data 1793
(identification data of the product) stored in advance, the system
controller 3562 recognizes that a product which is allowed to be
present in the room has appeared. As a result, the system
controller 3562 can quickly notify an abnormal condition to the
security guards room, the monitoring room, or the security
company.
[0696] The above-provided example is described in connection with a
room in a hospital, but, not only that, the same concept can be
applied to various areas and facilities, such as the security
regions around the Imperial Palace, the presidential residence, and
the Prime Minister's official residence, schools (elementary,
junior high, high schools and universities, etc.), and police
stations.
[0697] FIG. 37H shows another example of monitoring by combinations
of a plurality of types of sense information acquired from several
different types of combination modules 1295 (or units 1290). Here,
the example shows a case where a passenger 3570 moves from an
airport 3567 to an airport 3568 by an airplane 3569. Here, the
combination module (unit) 3570a is built into each of the
passenger's personal effects such as the passport, a bag, a hat and
shoes, and the applicable identification data are stored in advance
in the self-attribute data storage region 1793 (see FIG. 7B) in the
combination module (unit) 3570a. Similarly, the combination module
(unit) 3573a is attached to the passenger's carrier bag 3573 as
well. The identification data of the carrier bag is also stored in
advance in the self-attribute data storage region 1793 in the
combination module (unit) 3573a.
[0698] While the passenger 3570 is boarding on the airplane 3569,
the system controller 3571 collects the identification data of the
passenger's personal effects (baggage) 3572 and the carrier bag
3573. Then, these plurality of identification data (the
identification data of the passenger's personal effects 3572 and
that of the carrier bag 3573) are associated with each other, and
are recognized by the system controller 3571 as an essential
combination identification data for the passenger 3570.
[0699] On the other hand, another system controller 3572 is also
installed in advance in the airport 3568, which is a destination of
the passenger. When the passenger 3570 arrives at the airport 3568
of the destination, the plurality of identification data associated
with the passenger 3570 (that is, the identification data of the
passenger's personal effects 3572 and that of the carrier bag 3573)
are transmitted automatically to the system controller 3572
installed at the destination from the system controller 3571 of the
departure origin via the Internet. Then, the system controller
3572, on it's side, accesses the combination modules (unit) 3570a
built into the personal effects such as passport, bag, hat and
shoes and the combination module (unit) 3573a built into the
carrier bag 3573 to acquire the identification data (the
identification data of the passenger's personal effects 3572 and
that of the carrier bag 3573).
[0700] Next, the plurality of identification data acquired from the
combination modules (unit) 3570a and 3573a and the plurality of
identification data (the identification data of the passenger's
personal effects 3572 and that of the carrier bag 3573) obtained
from the system controller 3571 of the departure origin are
compared. Thus, the system controller 3572 of the destination can
judge whether the passenger's effects 3570 have been normally
carried to the airport 3568 from the airport 3567.
[0701] Section 5.2.3 Example of Application of Section Division
Method to Social Infrastructure Field
[0702] Section 5.2.3 describes an example of section division in
the case where the section division method is adapted in the social
infrastructure field. The section division units in the social
infrastructure field are tend to be larger than the scale described
in Section 5.1.3.
[0703] For example, in the case where each section 1142 is related
to each partition (room) or each floor in a building, the average
size of the rooms of a private house is larger than that of the
partitioned area in a building. Or each section 1142 may be
assigned to each respective unit in collective housing.
[0704] In the case where the section division is adapted to the
social infrastructure field, the sectional structure to divide may
be made to have hierarchy. For example, in the case of the
above-described collective housing, a higher-level section division
may be assigned to each unit individually as the first high-level
hierarchy, and a lower-level section division may be further
assigned to partitioned rooms in each housing unit. Similarly,
hierarchical sections may be assigned to predetermined regions for
each dividing scale. That is, for example, the country of Japan is
divided in units of prefectures including a capital (the
higher-level sections are assigned according to these units), and a
capital of Tokyo is further divided into a plurality of wards and
cities. Some of the prefectures are divided into a plurality of
cities and counties. According to this division, a middle-level
section may be assigned, and further a low-level section may be
assigned to each address.
[0705] FIG. 35 is a schematic drawing of a map of a specific area.
As shown, each section 1142 may be assigned to each respective
address. Not only that, but also the division of the sections 1142
may be based on the predetermined functions. An example thereof
will be described. In Japan, some water pipes and cables for
communication lines (telephone wires, optical fibers, etc.) are
installed directly underground along main roads. Further, some
power supply lines are installed above the ground along main roads.
Therefore, a division 1900 of the sections 1_1142-1 to 4_1142-4 may
be carried out for each area or by a predetermined interval along
main roads, piping of water and sewage, power distribution lines or
communication cable lines. Moreover, with the system of this
embodiment, a plurality of sensor modules 1260 or sensor
combination modules 1460 may be provided in the sections 1142 and
the sensor information acquired therefrom may be integrated and
managed for each section 1142, and thus it becomes possible to
extract a damaged site on the road, search a leakage site in a
water and sewage pipe, or disconnected part of a power distribution
line or a communication cable line in units of sections 1142. As a
result, it is further facilitated to extract a damaged site on the
road, search a leakage site in a water and sewage pipe, or
disconnected part of a power distribution line or a communication
cable line in more detail.
[0706] Similarly, the division 1900 of the sections 1_1142-1 to
4_1142-4 may be carried out for each area or by a predetermined
interval along main roads for ascertaining the traffic congestion
state of main roads including highways. When the traffic congestion
state for each section 1142 is displayed, the traffic congestion
state can be easily and exactly ascertained. As relatively similar
contents, the division technique of the sections 1142 may be used
for ascertaining the congestion state within a predetermined area.
More specifically, when such an event as a soccer or baseball game,
or a concert is held, the area around the event hall is divided
into a plurality of sections 1142. Thus, the congestion state of
the crowd can be ascertained in units of these sections. Then, the
guidance to the crowd and the arrangement of security persons can
be done more efficiently.
[0707] As described above, the system of this embodiment integrates
and manages the results of collected information in units of
sections 1142 to facilitate the assessment of the status of a wide
area in its entirety. Not only that, such an advantageous effect
can be obtained that the convenience of the maintenance of the
social infrastructure system can be improved.
[0708] An example of application in the social infrastructure
field, which is slightly similar to the assessment of the situation
of traffic congestion on main roads, described above, the
management of physical distribution may be raised. For example, in
order to carry fish and shellfishes to a remote place while keeping
the freshness thereof, the air transport method may be used to
shorten the transit time. At the same time, from the viewpoint of
saving the cost for transportation, such a method of keeping the
freshness for a long period while transporting to a remote place by
a vehicle is also examined. As a result of the examination, it has
been found important to manage the temperature during the
transportation for keeping the freshness of fish, shellfishes,
vegetables or fruits.
[0709] More specifically, the oxidation reaction rate and rotting
rate inside fish and shellfishes, vegetables, or fruits are
dependent on the ambient temperature, and therefore, from this
viewpoint, the storage temperature of fish and shellfishes,
vegetables or fruits should desirably be set low. On the other
hand, if a fish is placed in an environment below freezing point,
blood in the fish body freezes and expands, which causes
distinctive degradation in freshness. As well in vegetables and
fruits, the water contents on the surface and the inside are frozen
to expand the volume, which causes distinctive degradation in
freshness. For this reason, in the transportation to a remote place
by a vehicle, it is essential to maintain the temperature of the
fish, shellfishes, vegetables or fruits in the refrigerator car
within a range of "0.+-.1".
[0710] Therefore, the temperature sensors are installed in the
packing containers of the fish, shellfishes, vegetables or fruits
to control the air-conditioning in the refrigerator car based on
the temperature information acquired from each packing container.
The temperature sensors in this case correspond to the sensor
combination modules 1460. The section 1142 corresponds to the
"environment in each refrigerator car".
[0711] In the system of this embodiment, not only the above, but
also some other section division method may be adopted. As
described in Section 4.4, the system of this embodiment is
configured to detect the location of the origin of radio
transmission from individual sensor combination modules 1460. With
this structure, by utilizing the location detection technology for
the sensor combination modules 1460 to detect temperature, the
current location of each packing container of fish, shellfishes,
vegetables or fruits can be tracked in real time. Furthermore, from
the contents of Section 2.3, each packing container can be
identified by using sender IEEE extension address SEXADRS in FIG.
12A (e) (or sender IP address SIPADRS described in Section 2.4.
Therefore, when the above-described techniques are combined, not
only the transportation routes and time can be managed for each
packing container of fish, shellfishes, vegetables or fruits, but
also the transportation delay by the traffic congestion in the
transportation routes for the refrigerator car storing a particular
packing container, etc., can be managed in real time. As a result,
an instruction as to whether to avoid traffic congestion may be
given to the refrigerator car in consideration of the reserve time
of the packing container prior to this vehicle transportation.
[0712] When this embodiment system is adapted to the
above-mentioned physical distribution management, it is important
to select appropriate physical communication media to be used for
the network line 1782 in the same system of FIG. 10A, which will be
described later. For example, with the standard 802.11n of the
institute of electrical and electronics engineers (IEEE), compliant
to medium-range radio, the effective radius of cell is said to be
several hundreds meters. Therefore, when the medium-range radio is
adopted as the physical communication media, it is necessary to set
the physical size of each of the systems .alpha._1132 and
.beta._1134 to 1 km or less. On the other hand, the cell radius of
IEEE 802.16e-2005 compliant to the long-range radio is 1 to 3 km.
Therefore, when the medium-range radio is adopted as the physical
communication media, it is desirable to set the physical size of
each of the systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 to appropriately 3
km.
[0713] In each of the systems .alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 of the
above-described size, the transportation route (for example, the
main roads of FIG. 35) may be spatially divided into multiple to
define the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Thus, when the current
location during the transportation for each packing container of
fish, shellfishes, vegetables, or fruits is managed in each of the
section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, such an advantageous effect can be
obtained that the location where the delay in delivery caused by
traffic congestion on the transportation route can be ascertained
in detail, for example. Then, when the result is notified to other
delivery vehicles to instruct to avoid the traffic congested site,
the other delivery vehicles can achieve smooth transportation.
[0714] Another example of application of the method adopting the
system of this embodiment to the physical distribution management
will be described. In this application, the "simple
plug-in/plug-out method utilizing the position detection of the
combination module" described in Section 4.2 is utilized. In this
case, the short-range radio is adopted as the physical
communication media of the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A) within the
same system.
[0715] Here, the inside of a large-sized refrigerator for storing
the packing container of the fish, shellfishes, vegetables or
fruits which contain the built-in sensor combination modules 1460
for detects temperature is assigned as the system .alpha._1132.
Since the space inside is divided finely into the section 1_1142-1
to m_1142-m as so defined, the storage place of the packing
container in the large-sized refrigerator is managed automatically.
When the packing container is to be shipped, it will be taken out
of the large-sized refrigerator. Thus, it is automatically plugged
out from the system .alpha._1132, and also the date and time of the
shipment is managed within the system controller .alpha._1126.
[0716] Next, the inside of the truck space in the refrigerator car
which transports the packing container is assigned to the system
.beta._1134. The space inside is also defined finely as the
sections 1142. The system controller .beta._1128 installed therein
collects temperature information from the sensor combination module
1460 and controls the air-conditioning in the refrigerator car.
[0717] Note here that with the method of Section 4.4, only the
location of the placement of the communication module 1202
compliant to radio communications is detected, and the position of
the sensor module 1260 in the sensor combination module 1460 or the
position of the actuator module 1270 in the actuator combination
module 1470 is not detected. Therefore, when the accuracy in
temperature management in the refrigerator car is so high that the
temperature management for each packing container is not
necessarily required, a single communication module 1202 compliant
to short-range radio communications may be used in place of the
sensor combination module 1460.
[0718] Then, the inside of the warehouse (large-sized refrigerator)
of the destination of delivery for the refrigerator car is assigned
to a system .gamma.. A system controller .gamma. mounted in the
system .gamma. share the information with the system controllers
.beta._1126 and .beta._1128, the freshness of the fish,
shellfishes, vegetables or fruits in the packing container can be
predicted from the information including the delivery delay
information, the prior storage time in the warehouse prior to
shipment, and the internal temperature during transportation. Since
the freshness after delivery can be thus predicted, it becomes easy
to price the fish, shellfishes, vegetables or fruits, and also to
select the destination of delivery thereafter, as an advantageous
effect.
[0719] Furthermore, as another example of application which
utilizes the "simple plug-in/plug-out method utilizing the position
detection of the combination module" described above, an "automatic
settlement of accounts at the time of passing gate or purchasing
commodity" may be considered. Here, as a combination module used in
this application example, a sensor combination module 1460
compliant to audio input may be used. For example, now in Japan, a
near-field radio of the standard of a noncontact IC card such as
FeliCa (coined word which combined Felicity and Card) is used in
the check-in/out management at a door of a predetermined room, the
checking process of, for example, a ticket-examining device (gate)
while commuters pass therethrough in a railroad station, or the
automatic settlement of accounts at the time of purchasing
commodity. But, since the near-field radio communication is used
for the communication of the noncontact IC card, every time the
user should use the noncontact IC card, he or she must take it out
from the place where it is carried, which takes time and
effort.
[0720] In contrast, if the near-field radio communication is
changed to the short-range radio communications (or middle-range
radio communications), it is a merit for the user since he or she
no longer take it out from the carried (stored) place, such as a
bag or a pocket to use it, which can save time and effort. Here,
the physical form of the package in which the sensor combination
module 1460-5 is mounted is not necessarily a card, but a form easy
to carry, for example, a tiepin or a necklace may be allowed. Then,
the area for the system .alpha._1132 is set only in the vicinity of
the front of the entrance door of a predetermined room, the
ticket-examining gate for passing in a railroad station, a vending
machine or the sales counter of a store. It should be noted that
with the method of Section 4.4, only the location of the placement
of the communication module 1202 compliant to radio communications
is detected, and the position of the sensor module 1260 in the
sensor combination module 1460 or the position of the actuator
module 1270 in the actuator combination module 1470 is not
detected. Therefore, for the check-in/out management at a door of a
predetermined room, or the checking process of a ticket-examining
device (gate) in a railroad station, a single communication module
1202 compliant to radio communications may be used in place of the
sensor combination module 1460-5.
[0721] When the user proceeds to the front of a predetermined
entrance door, or just before the passing zone of a ticket
examining machine (gate), or approaches the vending machine or
sales counter of a store, the "plug-in process" (Section 4.2 is
automatically carried out. Thereafter, when the user leaves the
place, the "plug-out process" is automatically carried out, but the
system controller .alpha._1126 still manages the gate passage
history (in the entrance door or ticket-examining device) or the
purchase settlement history of the user. Furthermore, by using the
position detection (refer to Section 4.2 of the sensor combination
module 1460-5, a state of emergency such as the user falling by
accident from a platform onto a rail track, can also be
automatically recognized.
[0722] In front of a predetermined entrance door or a
ticket-examining device (gate), in particular, the passengers or
users may hold a hand over or place a finger on a predetermined
place for authentication of the individuals. The individual
authentication method in this case is not limited to the collation
of lines of a palm or a fingerprint, but also the image of a venous
line pattern picked up by using the near-infrared light reflecting
near the palm or finger surface may be used for the authentication
of individuals. Furthermore, the authentication of individuals may
be by the facial recognition without through a hand or a finger.
Here, prior to the authentication of a user, the plug-in processing
is carried out in the stage where the user proceeds to the front of
a predetermined entrance door or just before the passing zone of a
ticket-examining device (gate). Then, immediately after the plug-in
process, the system controller .alpha._1126 (refer to FIG. 8A or
FIG. 8B) uses the particular identification information (for
example, IEEE extension address EXADRS of FIG. 12A (e) or the like)
of the sensor combination module 1460-5 or the communication module
1202, to access the server n_1116-n and obtain the information for
authentication (identification) of an individual (such as the lines
on the palm/fingerprints/venous line pattern/facial pattern, etc.)
in advance. Then, the information for authentication
(identification) of the individual obtained in advance, and the
information obtained at the front of the predetermined entrance
door or the passing zone of thee ticket-examining device (gate) are
collated. Only the passengers who match the collation information
are allowed to pass the entrance door or the ticket-examining
device (gate), and the collation information are canceled. Thus,
the system controller .alpha._1126 obtains the information for
authentication (identification) of the individual in advance
immediately after plug-in, such an effect can be obtained that the
authentication (identification) of individuals can be quickly
performed.
[0723] Meanwhile, when a user needs to be authenticated for
electronic settlement of accounts, he or she is requested to utter
a speech (such as a keyword) which is assigned to the user. Thus,
the system controller .alpha._1126 of FIG. 8B receives the voice
(or utterance word) information from the sensor combination module
1460-5, and performs the "user's voiceprint collation" using the
information from the server n_1116-n. Then, the individual is
authenticated by checking the collation between the voiceprint and
the IP address data (FIG. 13 (b)) stored in the sensor combination
module 1460-5 or the information corresponding to IEEE extension
address EXADRS. As a next step, the word uttered by the user may be
estimated/determined by the system controller .alpha._1126 using
the speech recognition technology as to whether the word indicates
the "intention to agree with electronic settlement of accounts".
Here, when all the collations are completed, the communication
between the system controller .alpha._1126 and the server n_1116-n
relating to the banking management of the user will be established,
thereby completing the electronic settlement of the accounts.
[0724] When the system of this embodiment is applied to any of the
"physical distribution management", "gate pass management" and
"electronic banking for purchasing commodities" described above,
such an effect can be obtained that the sensor combination modules
1460-5 corresponding to these examples can be manufactured at very
low cost, thereby making it possible to circulate them in great
number. Note that the global positioning system (GPS) used for
position detection involves expensive parts, and therefore a
circulation in great number is conventionally difficult. By
contrast, usually, in this embodiment, the position detection is
carried out using the radio wave transmitted by the sensor
combination modules 1460-5, and therefore no extra cost will be
added for the position detection of the sensor combination modules
1460-5. Thus, the sensor combination module 1460-5 can be
manufactured at very low cost.
[0725] The examples of application in the social infrastructure
field are mainly described by focusing on the use of the sensor
combination modules 1460. The use is not limited to these, but the
actuator combination module 1470 may be used for the remote control
of a mobile robot built into a movement controller. For example,
the section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are defined for the respective
rooms of a hotel or collective housing. Then, with use of the
position detection technology of the actuator combination modules
1470, the system controller .alpha._1126 controls the mobile robot
to move to the entrance of a predetermined room. The mobile robot
may be used to clean the predetermined room or to carry a
predetermined load.
[0726] In addition to the above-described examples of application,
the embodiment is also applicable to agriculture. More
specifically, in production of plants, for example, the systems
.alpha._1132 and .beta._1134 may be assigned to different types of
plants to be cultured, respectively, and thus these plants are
grown under different growth conditions. Further, the sections 1142
may be respectively assigned to growth sites of the plants of the
same kind to control the amount of lighting, the amount of
supply/refill of water, the temperature and humidity for each
section, and also to manage the states of culture of the
vegetables.
[0727] Section 5.3 Example of Application to Health Care Field
[0728] Section 5.3.1 Example of Application of Wide Area Network
System to Health Care Field
[0729] An example of application of the wide area network system
shown in FIG. 1 to the health care field would be as follows. That
is, under a commission from a wholesale firm B1_1104-1, which
corresponds to a state, a service provider B_1112-2, equivalent to
a specific public institution, collects the names of diseases of
patients and their conditions, and the genetic information of each
individual patient from the system .alpha._1132, equivalent to a
hospital or a medical institution of an area, and can provide a
method of collecting and organizing information of diseases on a
nationwide scale. In this case, the public institution (the service
provider B_1112-2) accesses the system controller .alpha._1126
which manages the database in the medical institution (the system
.alpha._1132) of the area via a network to collect required data
automatically. The result of the analysis obtained as a result is
reported to the state (the wholesale firm B1_1104-1) and is
published to the people via the Internet or by media reports such
as newspapers/magazines.
[0730] Section 5.3.2 Example of Application of Combination Module
to Health Care Field
[0731] Each sensor combination module 1460 having the structure
shown in FIG. 5 has a number of merits including a light-weight,
small-size, power saving (an external power being unnecessary), and
low-cost. Therefore, taking advantage of these merits, the sensor
combination modules 1460 can be mounted directly on the bodies of
the users in motion. As a specific mounting method, the sensor
combination modules 1460 may be mounted directly on the body, by
way of using a worn item such as a wrist watch, glasses or tiepin,
or it may be pinned to the clothes. Thus, the sensor combination
modules 1460 each combined with a temperature sensor, a pulse
sensor, a respiratory sensor (accelerometer), a blood oxygen
concentration sensor and the like, are mounted on patients and/or
healthy persons. In this manner, such an effect can be obtained the
health conditions can be traced in real time. Further, with the
system controllers .alpha._1126 installed in units of hospital
rooms or housing rooms of individuals, the results detected are
analyzed in real time and abnormalities, if any, are notified to a
doctor or a nurse. Such an effect can be obtained that efficient
care can be realized for patients and healthy persons. Furthermore,
only the necessary information can be sorted out and transmitted to
the server n_1116-n (FIG. 1) installed in each hospital, such an
effect can be obtained that the efficiencies of the data management
and data processing in the server n_1116-n are improved.
[0732] The method described above is related to the case where the
combination module is attached directly to a human body. The method
is not limited to this, but the combination module (for example,
the combination module 7_1295-7 of FIG. 2) may be directly
inserted/input or embedded into the body. In this case, instead of
the form that the combination module 7_1295-7 is singly installed
in the network system .alpha._1132, it is incorporated in the body
(specific user) to be moved together with the human body (specific
user). Here, the method of mounting the combination module on the
body described above may be troublesome when putting on or taking
off the combination module (the user may feel it troublesome). In
contrast, by directly inserting/inputting or embedding
(incorporating) the combination module in the body in advance, such
an effect can be obtained that the user-related information can be
appropriately obtained by the system controller .alpha._1126 side
without causing any trouble of wearing or removing the module to
the user.
[0733] First, a method of embedding the combination module into the
body will be described. For example, immediately after a surgical
operation on a patient, the combination module 1295 shown in FIG.
4A (b) is embedded near the sutured part. Here, there is a risk
after the operation that the incised part or the part where the
affected portion has been extracted (cut) may suppurate, or that it
may bleed internally. Therefore, it is important for a
postoperative care to find the occurrence of suppuration or
internal bleeding, if any, of the part where the affected portion
has been extracted (cut) as early as possible. When bacteria enter
the incised part or the part where the affected portion has been
extracted (cut) to cause suppuration, the pH value (hydrogen ion
exponent) of the suppurating part changes. Here, as the combination
module 1295 to be embedded in the sutured part, the sensor
combination module 1460 containing a built-in pH sensor module
which detects a pH value and a built-in blood sensor module, may be
used.
[0734] In this case, it is not necessary to take such a long time
to follow up the postoperative condition. Therefore, as described
in Section 1.6, the life management data 1794 or the operation
period management data 1795 shown in FIG. 7B may be used to operate
the sensor combination module 1460 only for the postoperative
follow-up period. Not only that, moreover, the durable period
(battery life) of the battery charger module (battery) 1554 in the
sensor combination module 1460 shown in FIG. 5 may be set short in
advance to disable the sensor combination module 1460 by battery
life when the postoperative follow-up period has elapsed. In this
manner, it becomes possible to prevent unnecessary radio
transmission from the combination module 1295 (sensor combination
module 1460) after the postoperative follow-up period. Thus, such
an effect can be obtained that the load on the system controller
.alpha._1126 which controls/manages the network communications in
the network system .alpha._1132 can be lightened.
[0735] Next, a method of inserting the combination module into the
body will be described. In this case, the combination module 1295
in the form shown in FIG. 4A (b) is enclosed in a capsule for the
user to be able to swallow the capsule with water, a soft drink or
the like. For example, when the soft drink containing the capsule
mixed thereinto is produced at low price, the combination module
1295 can be inserted to the body without a burden to users. Not
only that, moreover, but also, for example, when the user, who has
a disease, take a medicine periodically, he or she may swallow the
capsule together with the medicine. The capsule of the built-in
combination module 1295 stays inside the user's body until it is
excreted in a toilet or the like, thus making it possible for the
module to continuously transmit the user information until then.
Further, as described above, the life management data 1794, the
operation maturity control data 1795, or the battery life of the
battery charger module (battery) 1554 may be utilized to prevent
unnecessary radio transmission from the combination module 1295
after excreted.
[0736] As examples of use of this method are the management of the
user's health care, the early detection of the onset/development of
a disease, and the daily management of the exercising state of the
user. First, the application to the management of the user's health
care or the early detection of the onset/development of a disease
will be described. In this case, the sensor module 1260 shown in
FIG. 4B (b) is used as the different function module 1440 which has
functions other than the communication function shown in FIG. 4A
(b). As an example of the sensor module 1260, the temperature
sensor module which measures the body temperature in the living
body may be used.
[0737] As a conventional early detection method for a patient who
has influenza, there is a technique of installing a sensor which
measures the temperature of the body surface of the user by means
of infrared rays, for example, at a gate in an airport or the like.
But, if the user passes through the installed temperature sensor
before his or her body temperature rises by the onset of influenza
(that is, just before the development of symptoms), there is a risk
of overlooking the patient with influenza. By contrast, by tracking
the change in body temperature along with time with the capsule
containing the built-in temperature sensor module 1260, it becomes
possible to improve the accuracy of detection of patients with
influenza.
[0738] As another example of the sensor module 1260 to be built
into the capsule, a sensor module configured to measure blood sugar
level may be used. According to this method, the sugar content in
blood is measured from a near-infrared light spectral pattern
obtained from blood. A diabetic patent tends to have a blood sugar
level (sugar content in blood) higher than that of a healthy
person. When the blood sugar level of the diabetic exceeds
tolerance level, the prompt action of medication, or the like is
required. Under these circumferences, by monitoring the blood sugar
level in the patient's body with the capsule containing the blood
sugar sensor module, it becomes possible to quickly find the
abnormalities in the blood sugar level and therefore the
therapeutic effect for the diabetic patients can be improved.
[0739] Conventionally, in hospitals or institutions, a nurse
measures the body temperature and blood sugar level of inpatients
periodically. By contrast, if the inpatients can take the capsule
containing the built-in combination module 1295 periodically, it
becomes possible to take immediate measures to a sudden change of
the patient's condition. Not only that, but also such an effect can
be obtained that the personnel expenses for the measurement of body
temperature or blood sugar level can be saved, thereby making it
possible to improve the administration of the hospital or
institution. Furthermore, by combining the position detection of
the combination module 1295 by the method described in Section 4.4
with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, there is also an effect that
it is possible to detect a dementia patient if he or she wanders
around in the hospital or institution.
[0740] Moreover, the "name of the person who took the medicine" may
be recorded with the "name of the medicine" as a part of the
self-attribute data 1793 in the combination module 1295 (see the
corresponding part in Section 1.6. Here, the inpatients and tenants
are monitored with a camera installed in the hospital or
institution at all times, to manage the timing when they take
specified medicines. When the inpatients and tenants take the
specified medicine, the system controller .alpha._1126 records such
information in the combination module 1295. Thus, the compliance of
the medicine for each inpatient or tenant can be always managed,
and therefore such an effect can be obtained that it can help to
prevent them from forgetting to take the specified medicine.
[0741] Next, an example of use in the daily management of the
exercising state of the user will be described. In this case, an
accelerometer may be used as the sensor module 1260 build in the
capsule. Here, by combining the output of the accelerometer
incorporated inside the body and the position detection information
of the combination module 1295 described, the exercising state of
the user can be always monitored in real time. Here, when the
amount of daily exercise for the user to be managed is less than a
predetermined target value, the I/F unit 1234 in the system
controller .alpha._1126 or the display in the system controller
.beta._1128 indicates to the user a suggestion for the measures to
be taken.
[0742] Moreover, an example of the system of this embodiment, in
which the "detection of a usually impermissible combination"
described using FIG. 37G is utilized for the determination whether
or not a combination of medicines is possible, will be described.
Generally, two or more medicines are prescribed in combination for
patients in many cases. In such cases, it is possible to
automatically determine whether a combination of certain different
types of medicines is safe or not. For example, the combination
module 1295 (unit 1290) is contained in each of medicine tablets.
As described before, each combination module 1295 (unit 1290) is
enclosed in a capsule comprising a harmless material to the body.
When the patients excrete the capsules when they go to a toilet,
the capsule is removed from the body to the outside. Thus, the
combination modules 1295 (units 1290) will not affect the body.
Here, the capsules containing the built-in combination modules 1295
(units 1290) mixed into the medicine tablets are configured by the
same method described above to stop radio transmission when
discharged from the body to the outside.
[0743] It should be noted here that the combination module 1295
(unit 1290) contains communication module 1660 as shown in FIG. 4A.
Further, the self-attribute data 1793 is stored in advance in the
communication module 1660 as shown in FIG. 7B. Here, in the example
of the system of this embodiment, the identification data of
medicine is stored in the self-attribute data 1793.
[0744] Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 2, the memory 1232 of the
system controller .alpha._1126 exclusively used for checking a
plurality of medicines of a prescription, stores in advance a data
table of the medicines which can be combined in a prescription, or
a data table of the medicines which may cause a problem for health
when combined. When a patient or pharmacist who prepared prescribed
medicines passes through the system controller .alpha._1126 for
checking medicines, while carrying the medicines, whether or not
the combination of the medicine is possible can be determined
quickly and easily.
[0745] In the system of this embodiment, as described in Section
4.4, the locations of all of the units 1290 or combination modules
1295 can be detected in real time. Therefore, when a combination
module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed into in a medicine passes through a
predetermined place, the system controller .alpha._1126 for
checking medicine can detect the situation as needed. Then, the
system controller .alpha._1126 for checking medicine requests a
reply of the self-attribute data 1793 (medicine identification
data) from the combination module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed into the
medicine, and thus the system controller .alpha._1126 for checking
medicine can appropriately monitor the contents of the plurality of
prescribed medicines. The medicine information collected by the
system controller .alpha._1126 for checking medicine are referred
to with the above-described data tables, an inappropriate
combination of medicines to be taken, can be extracted easily. When
an inappropriate combination of medicines is detected, warning is
output by voice or display to the user or pharmacist.
[0746] Conventionally, such data tables indicating the combinations
of medicines which may cause problems to health are managed by each
pharmacy or medical office of hospitals. In Japan, a "medicine
notebook" is exclusively issued for each patient, which indicates
the medicinal history taken by the patient in the past. With this
system, as the patient shows the medicine notebook, the pharmacist
can easily detect an inappropriate combination of medicines to be
taken. However, if there are a great number of patients waiting for
medication in a pharmacy or the medical office of a hospital, the
pharmacist is not allowed to have a sufficient time to refer to the
medicine notebook with the data table each time. Here, in some
cases, the pharmacist determines whether or not a prescription
involves an inappropriate combination of medicines based on his or
her memory. As a result, there may be a risk of prescribing a
inappropriate combination of medicines unwillingly due to a lapse
of memory of the pharmacist.
[0747] When the above-described example of application of the
system of this embodiment is used, the pharmacist no longer needs
to refer to the data table manually. As a result, the efficiency of
pharmaceutical preparation in the pharmacy can be improved
significantly, and also such an effect can be obtained that an
appropriate combination of medicines to be taken can be checked
automatically at high speed and high efficiency. In the meantime,
at a pharmacy or the medical office of a hospital, the prescribed
medicines are prepared manually (by a pharmacist), and therefore
there is always a risk of preparation error. By contrast, with the
example of the application of the system of this embodiment here,
it is possible to detect a pharmaceutical preparation error at high
precision. As a result, the reliability of medication, on which the
patients depend, can be significantly improved.
[0748] In addition, Section 5.3.2 discusses the technique in which
the combination module 1295 (or unit 1290) is built into a capsule
in order to set the combination module 1295 (or unit 1290) into the
body. The method is not limited to this, but other means may be
used as well. For example, the combination module 1295 (or unit
1290) comprising a single chip (or a hybrid chip) may be laminated
(or coated) with a material harmless to the body instead of putting
it in a capsule.
[0749] Section 5.3.3 Example of Application of Section Division
Method to Health Care Field
[0750] As an example of application of the section division method
to the health care field, the section 1142 may be divided in units
of floors or rooms of a hospital ward, or the section 1142 may be
partitioned in units of medical departments of a hospital ward as
in the case discussed in Section 5.2.3. In the system of this
embodiment, various types of sensor information thus acquired may
be integrated and/or managed for each divisions of the section
1142. Thus, the situation can be ascertained for each section level
of a hierarchy, or, for example, the frequency of nurse calls and
the frequency of occurrence of sudden change in the patient's
condition to the worse can be ascertained. When the results thus
ascertained are reflected in the planning of the arrangement of
staff, such as nurses, such an effect can be obtained that the
quality of the care service for the patients in the hospital can be
improved.
[0751] On the other hand, the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be
assigned to the respective parts of the body as an example of
application to the health care field. Here, as the sense
information regarding the body, various types of sense information
such as a regional body temperature, a regional perspiration, a
strain rate of regional skeletal muscle, a regional change in
oxygen concentration in blood vessel and a regional pulse state are
acquired. When such various types of sense information are
integrated and/or managed for each division of the section 1142, it
becomes easy to ascertain an abnormal part in real time. Thus, such
an effect can be obtained that it becomes easy to extract a part
where the condition is quickly aggravated and to grasp the
condition of disease for the patient.
[0752] While certain embodiments have been described, these
embodiments have been presented by way of example only, and are not
intended to limit the scope of the inventions. Indeed, the novel
embodiments described herein may be embodied in a variety of other
forms; furthermore, various omissions, substitutions and changes in
the form of the embodiments described herein may be made without
departing from the spirit of the inventions. The embodiments and
their variations are encompassed by the scope and outline of the
invention and by the inventions recited in claims and their
equality. Note that a part or the whole of an embodiment of the
disclosed embodiments combined to a part or the whole of another
embodiment of the disclosed embodiments will be encompassed by the
scope and outline of the invention.
* * * * *